Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 519

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100

Contribution Platform
User Manual
Release 04.10
Edition A

ContactThomsonVideoNetworks

Contents

Contents
Preface ............................................................ 13
Chapter 1
Overview ......................................................... 19
Product Overview .................................................................. 20
Purpose ....................................................................................... 20
Description.................................................................................. 20
Slot number ........................................................................... 20
MPEG board ........................................................................... 20
Modulator............................................................................... 20
Power Supply......................................................................... 20
Future Proof Contribution Platforms.................................... 21
Main Features ............................................................................. 22
System Applications .................................................................. 24

Product Description ............................................................... 26


Front Panel.................................................................................. 26
Rear Panel ................................................................................... 26
Manager Board ...................................................................... 27
MPEG Board........................................................................... 27
Modulator Board.................................................................... 28

Chapter 2
Installation and startup ................................... 29
Unpacking .............................................................................. 30
Removing the Protective Film .............................................. 31
Installing the Device (Steps) ................................................. 31
Mounting in Rack................................................................... 32
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform Installation Requirements.... 32
Ventilation................................................................................... 32
Mounting CP6100 Platform(s) in a Rack ................................... 35
Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19 Rack................... 35
Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19 Rack ...... 36
Cabling ........................................................................................ 40
EMC Ground ............................................................................... 40
Power Supply and Protective Ground ...................................... 41
Power Inlet ............................................................................. 41
Power Supply Cord(s) ........................................................... 42

Connecting the Signal Cables............................................... 44


On the Manager Board .............................................................. 44
On each MPEG Board used as Encoder ................................... 46

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Contents

Dual Channels MPEG Board .................................................


Single Channel MPEG Board................................................
On each MPEG board used as Decoder ...................................
Dual Channels MPEG Board .................................................
Single Channel MPEG Board................................................
On a Modulator board ...............................................................

46
46
47
47
48
49

Powering Up ......................................................................... 50
Performing the Initial Settings............................................. 51
Accessing the Command Line Interface...................................
Entering the Login and Password.............................................
Getting Help................................................................................
Setting Initial Parameters ..........................................................
Commands to Reboot the Equipment .................................
Commands Relating to IP Parameters .................................
Commands Relating to the Date and Time .........................
Commands Relating to the NTP Server...............................
Commands Relating to SysName, SysContact and
SysLocation............................................................................
Commands Relating to Community Strings .......................

51
52
53
54
55
55
57
58
60
61

Chapter 3
Chassis Configuration ..................................... 63
Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards. 64

Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation ..................................... 67
Front Panel Description ........................................................ 68
Foreword..................................................................................... 68
Description and overview.......................................................... 68
Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast............................ 70

Screen Description ............................................................... 71


Screen menu tree ....................................................................... 71
Summary of screen functions ................................................... 73
Device booting screen ............................................................... 73
Status screen .............................................................................. 74
Main menu screen...................................................................... 75
Alarms screen............................................................................. 75
Setup screen ............................................................................... 76
IP Setting screen.................................................................... 76
Recall screen .......................................................................... 77
Reboot screen ........................................................................ 79
LCD CAL screen ..................................................................... 79
Info screen .................................................................................. 80
Main Board Information screen.......................................... 80
Temperature Information screen ....................................... 80
Configuration screen.................................................................. 81
Parameters that can be edited from the device front panel 81
4

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Contents

Procedure for changing parameter values .......................... 87

Chapter 5
Web Browser Interface .................................... 89
Reaching the GUI................................................................... 90
Compatible Web Browsers........................................................ 90
Definition of Users ..................................................................... 90
Setting up the link between the PC and the Device ................ 91

Screen Layout ........................................................................ 93


Panels .......................................................................................... 93
Customizing Configuration Tab Layout.................................... 94
Status Bar.................................................................................... 95
Information............................................................................. 95
Login Name and Password................................................... 96
Monitoring Panel........................................................................ 98
Purpose................................................................................... 98
Main Window......................................................................... 98
Configuration Panel ................................................................. 102
Management Tab................................................................. 102
Statistics Tab........................................................................ 103
Ip Counters Tab.................................................................... 111
Automation Tab ................................................................... 113
Configuration Tabs .............................................................. 115
Alarms Panel............................................................................. 118
Purpose................................................................................. 118
Main Window....................................................................... 118

Basic Settings....................................................................... 121


Foreword................................................................................... 121
Creating a New Configuration................................................. 121
Setting an MPEG Encoder ....................................................... 123
Creating the Encoder Branch.............................................. 123
Selecting the Slot................................................................. 125
Selecting the Source ........................................................... 125
Creating the Compressed Video Component.................... 126
Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service) ........................ 128
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual Channels
MPEG board ......................................................................... 129
Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Single Channel
MPEG board ......................................................................... 132
Setting the Transport Stream ............................................. 136
Encapsulating TS over ASI ................................................. 138
Encapsulating TS over IP .................................................... 139
Linking TS to Modulator ..................................................... 141
Linking TS to MPTS ............................................................. 142
Setting the Ethernet Interface............................................. 142
Setting an MPEG Decoder ....................................................... 145
Creating the Decoder Branch.............................................. 145
Selecting the Slot................................................................. 146
Selecting the ASI Input Interface........................................ 147

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Contents

Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface ............................... 147


Selecting the IP Rx Stream ................................................. 149
Setting the Service Configuration...................................... 151
Setting the SDI Output Interface ........................................ 153
Setting the Audio Output Interface (Single Channel MPEG board)
154
Setting a Modulator ................................................................. 156
Creating the Modulator Branch .......................................... 156
Selecting the Slot ................................................................ 157
Selecting the TS Source...................................................... 157
Creating ASI Output Monitoring ........................................ 158
Setting Modulation.............................................................. 159
Setting the RF Output.......................................................... 160
Applying or Sending the Configuration to the Equipment... 161

Advanced Settings.............................................................. 162


Advanced Settings, MPEG Encoder........................................
Creating an Ancillary Component......................................
Creating a VBI Component .................................................
Creating an SCTE 35 Component.......................................
Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards ............
Adding an External Component to a service ....................
Setting Automatic Encoding configuration .......................
Advanced settings, MPEG Decoder ........................................
Setting TS Redundancy ......................................................
Creating ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateways ............................
Setting an ASI to IP Gateway, MPEG Encoder ..................
Setting an IP to ASI Gateway, MPEG Decoder..................
Setting Scrambling / Descrambling........................................
Setting Automation..................................................................
Principle................................................................................
Creating a Schedule ............................................................
Schedule Example...............................................................

162
162
164
166
168
171
175
189
189
194
194
197
200
202
202
203
205

GUI Description................................................................... 206


Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Encoder ................................
Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box .......................................
SDI Input Dialog Box ...........................................................
Video Encoder Dialog Box ..................................................
Audio Inputs Dialog Box .....................................................
Audio Encoder Dialog Box..................................................
Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box .............................................
VBI Encoder Dialog Box ......................................................
Output Service Dialog Box .................................................
Transport Stream Dialog Box.............................................
ASI Output Dialog Box ........................................................
IP Tx Dialog Box ..................................................................
LAN x Dialog Box ................................................................
Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Decoder................................
Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box.......................................
ASI INPUT Dialog Box.........................................................
LAN x Dialog Box ................................................................
IP Rx Dialog Box ..................................................................
Input Service Dialog Box ....................................................
6

206
206
207
209
215
217
221
223
225
226
228
229
232
234
234
235
235
236
238

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Contents

SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box............................................. 242


Audio Outputs Dialog Box .................................................. 245
Dialog Boxes Related to the Modulator ................................. 246
Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box ............................................ 246
TS Selection Dialog Box...................................................... 247
ASI Monitoring Dialog Box ................................................. 247
Modulation Dialog Box ....................................................... 248
RF Output Dialog Box.......................................................... 250
Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board
(CP6000) .................................................................................... 253
LAN 1 (Agg 1) LAN 2 (Agg 2) Dialog Box .......................... 254

Chapter 6
Servicing ....................................................... 255
Ordering and Installing Software Options......................... 256
Introduction .............................................................................. 256
Accessing the Command Line Interface................................. 256
Entering the Login and Password........................................... 256
Ordering / Installing software options.................................... 256
Ordering software options process.................................... 256
Installing software options process ................................... 257
Displaying Software Options (lsopt) .................................. 257
Displaying the Equipment Code (eqcod) ........................... 258
Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt) ............................ 258
Installing a Software Option (insopt) ................................. 259
Recovering Lost Keys .......................................................... 259

Displaying Unit information ............................................... 260


Displaying Field Replaceable Unit information (frudisp)...... 260

Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000) ....... 261


Replacing a MPEG Board .................................................... 262
Replacing a Modulator Board............................................. 264
Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill................................................... 265

Chapter 7
Troubleshooting ............................................ 267
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) .................................... 268
Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................ 269
Generating the Report ............................................................. 269
Getting the Report From the Equipment................................ 270

Chapter 8
Tools ............................................................. 271
Equipment Setup Tool ........................................................ 272
Introduction .............................................................................. 272
Description................................................................................ 272
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Contents

Overview .............................................................................. 272


Description of the Graphical User Interface ...................... 273
PC Setup ................................................................................... 276
Operation .................................................................................. 276
Launching Equipment Setup .............................................. 277
Entering the User Name and Password ............................ 277
Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the
Equipment Area................................................................... 279
Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the
Download Area .................................................................... 285
Getting Information in the Messages Area ....................... 288

Download application ........................................................ 289


Overview ...................................................................................
Operation ..................................................................................
Installing and running the application ...............................
Screen description...............................................................
Download procedure...........................................................
Other application commands .............................................
Status messages..................................................................
Error messages....................................................................

289
290
290
292
293
297
298
299

SigEditor Tool ..................................................................... 300


Overview ................................................................................... 300
Operation .................................................................................. 300

Appendix A
Technical Specifications ............................... 305
General Device Specifications ........................................... 306
Electrical Specifications ...........................................................
Power supply - ViBE CP6000 ..............................................
Power supply - ViBE CP6100 ..............................................
Power Consumption............................................................
Mechanical Features ................................................................
Dimensions ..........................................................................
Weight ..................................................................................
Miscellaneous ......................................................................
Ventilation.................................................................................
Reliability ..................................................................................
CP6000 / CP6100 Boot phase duration ...................................

306
306
309
310
311
311
314
314
315
316
316

Chassis Specifications ........................................................ 317


CP6000 Chassis ........................................................................ 317
CP6100 Chassis ........................................................................ 317

Manager Board Specifications .......................................... 318


Processing ................................................................................
Interfaces ..................................................................................
TS over IP and Control Command on Same Port .............
License management...............................................................

318
319
323
324

MPEG Encoder Specifications ........................................... 327


Encoder Block Diagram ........................................................... 327
Dual Channels MPEG Encoder Board ................................ 327
8

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Contents

Single Channel MPEG Encoder Board ............................... 328


Interface Specifications............................................................ 329
MPEG system layer .................................................................. 338
Video Processing...................................................................... 339
Input video encoding formats ............................................ 339
Horizontal Picture Rescaling ............................................... 339
Picture Filtering.................................................................... 339
Video processing ................................................................. 340
Audio processing ..................................................................... 343
VBI/ANC processing ................................................................. 346
VBI processing (SD Format)................................................ 346
ANC processing (SD and HD Format) ................................ 347
Automatic Encoding configuration......................................... 348
SDI input redundancy .............................................................. 349
Scrambling................................................................................ 350
ASI Input for external components......................................... 351
ASI to IP Gateway..................................................................... 352
Multiplexing Across Boards .................................................... 353
SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 ............................................................... 354
Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged Networks..... 355
Overview .............................................................................. 355
Licensing ............................................................................ 356
Maximum operational performances ................................ 356
Max FEC overhead & FEC block settings........................... 357

MPEG Decoder Specifications ............................................ 359


Decoder Block Diagram ........................................................... 359
Dual Channels MPEG Decoder Board ................................ 359
Single Channel MPEG Decoder Board............................... 360
Interface Specifications............................................................ 361
TS Processing ........................................................................... 367
Video Processing...................................................................... 368
Video Rescaling ........................................................................ 368
HD to SD down-conversion ................................................ 370
Audio Processing ..................................................................... 372
VBI/ANC Processing ................................................................. 373
VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode ................. 374
TS Redundancy ........................................................................ 375
Descrambling............................................................................ 376
IP to ASI Gateway..................................................................... 376
Contribution & Distribution Over UnManaged Networks..... 377

DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications ....................... 378


Modulator Block Diagram........................................................ 378
Interface Specifications............................................................ 379
Miscellaneous Specifications .................................................. 381
DVB-S Specifications ............................................................... 383
DVB-DSNG Specifications ....................................................... 383
DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Specifications........................................... 384
Signaling ................................................................................... 384
Diplexer Specifications ............................................................ 385

Standard Compliance.......................................................... 386


Certifications and Environmental Specifications .............. 388
Ordering Guide .................................................................... 392
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Contents

Base Systems ...........................................................................


Hardware Options ....................................................................
MPEG Board.........................................................................
Modulator Board .................................................................
CP6000 Front Panel .............................................................
CP6100 Adaptation Kit ........................................................
Audio Cable..........................................................................
AC Mains Cables..................................................................
Software Options .....................................................................
Product Release ...................................................................
Encoder ................................................................................
Decoder ................................................................................
Modulator.............................................................................
Bundles .....................................................................................

393
394
394
394
394
395
395
395
395
395
396
398
399
400

Appendix ............................................................................. 402


Audio Breakout Cable .............................................................. 402
Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations.......................... 403

Appendix B
Safety Instructions ....................................... 405
Safety Summary (English) ................................................
Sicherheit - berblick (Deutsch) .......................................
Consignes de scurit (Franais) ......................................
Safety Instructions for Finland, Norway, Sweden ..........

406
410
415
420

Appendix C
Regulatory Notices ....................................... 421
Appendix D
Customer Services ........................................ 423
Support Center Contacts ....................................................
Warranty ..............................................................................
Services ...............................................................................
Spare Parts ..........................................................................
Returning Equipment .........................................................
Repackaging for Shipment ................................................
Long Term Product Support ..............................................
Recycling the Product.........................................................

10

424
425
426
426
426
426
427
428

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Contents

Appendix E
Alarms ........................................................... 429

Glossary ........................................................ 431

Index ............................................................. 447

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

11

Contents

12

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Preface Standard Documentation Set

Preface
Standard Documentation Set
The standard ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 documentation set consists of:

a User Manual

a Quick Start Guide

a V04.10 Release Note

The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 User Manual contains background


information about the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms, and describes
operating procedures. This manual can be used while learning about
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100, and for enhancing your basic knowledge of the
product.
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Quick Start Guide contains information about
installing and configuring the equipment.
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 V04.10 Release Note describes the # Release
features. It presents the new features and gives the new commercial
codifications, fixed issues, known issues, Interoperability and limitations.

Software version
This manual covers the functionality of the software version 04.10 and
higher of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms.
This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent software versions
where the functionality of the equipment has not changed. When a new
software version changes the functionality of the product, a new version
of this manual is provided.

About this Manual


This manual is written for Operators of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Platforms.
This manual should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life
time of the equipment. If passing the equipment to a third party,
please ensure to pass all relevant documentation including this
manual.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

13

Preface About this Manual

The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendixes:

Chapter 1 Overview gives a general description of the equipment


and its main features.

Chapter 2 Installation and setup provides the procedures required


for device installation and initial configuration and describes how to
connect the device to other devices in your system.

Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration gives the rules to be observed


for populating the chassis with MPEG boards.

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation describes how to use the Front


Panel of the equipment.

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface details how to use the Web


Browser Graphical User Interface to configure the equipment.

Chapter 6 Servicing describes how to install software options via


the Command Line Interface and gives some recommendations for
cleaning the air inlet grill.

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting describes the procedure to follow when


you face any problem with the equipment. The procedure consists of
generating a Reportfile.bin file and sending it to Thomson Video
Networks Customer Service. This file is critical to provide efficient
support.

Chapter 8 Tools describes the Equipment Setup tool and the


Download application delivered in the CD-ROM with the product.
They are used to download new product packages to one or more
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms. The SigEditor tool used to edit
SI/PSI tables is also described in this chapter.

Appendix A Technical Specifications gives specifications of the


device, specifications of the board configured as either an MPEG
encoder, MPEG decoder or Modulator, Device compliance and an
Ordering guide to order the device and its options.

Appendix B Safety Instructions gives instructions related to risk of


fire, electric shock or injury to persons. This important section is
available in English, German and French versions.

Appendix C Regulatory Notices provides device compliances


regarding FCC emission control, Canadian EMC compliance, EN55022
Class A recommendations, VCCI Class A recommendations and Laser
compliance.

Appendix D Customer Services indicates what you should do if


you have a problem with equipment, whether you need to repair it, to
return it or to dispose of it.

Appendix E Alarms gives the list of alarms which may be visible in


the Alarm panel. For each alarm the diagnostics, action to be
performed and alarm severity are given.

A glossary can be found at the end of the manual just prior the Index.

14

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Preface Conventions Used in This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual


Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be
adhered to. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for injuries or
damages where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken
lightly.

Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this
product is operated.

Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.

Terms in this Manual


Safety-related statements appear in this manual in the following form:

Warning statements identify conditions or practices that may result


in personal injury or loss of life.

Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in


damage to equipment or other property, or which may cause
equipment crucial to your business environment to become
temporarily non-operational.

Notes provides supplementary information. They are highlighted for


emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the
relevant text.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

15

Preface Documentation Feedback

Formatting
Naming conventions for the interface elements and Windows elements
in this manual follow the Microsoft Manual of Style, Third Edition.
Naming conventions for MPEG-2, ATSC, and DVB structures follow the
conventions derived from the standards documents listed in
Appendix A Technical Specifications. In addition, the following
formatting conventions apply to this manual:

Pale blue text refers to specific interface elements that you are
instructed to select, click, press or clear.
Example: Select Settings from the Configuration menu.

Blue text refers to document names, sections, figures or tables.


Example: Refer to section Warnings, Cautions and Notes on page 13
for more information.

Mono-spaced text can indicate the following:

Text you enter from a keyboard


Example: Enter administrator
administrator for your password.

for

your

login

and

Paths to components on your hard drive


Example: The MIB is at the following location: C:\MIB.

Documentation Feedback
We are taking great care of our publications. Please help us to improve
them by sending your feedback with the reference of the manual at the
email address:
Email: techpubs@thomson-networks.com

Important notice
Thomson Video Networks reserves the right to make corrections,
modifications, enhancements, improvements and other changes to its
products or services at any time and to discontinue any product or
service without notice.

16

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Preface Copyrights

Copyrights
Copyright 2015 Thomson Video Networks. All rights reserved.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

17

Preface Copyrights

BLANK PAGE

18

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

1
Overview
Chapter

Introduction
This chapter gives a general description of the equipment and its main
features.

Content of this Chapter


Product Overview......................................................................page 20
Product Description...................................................................page 26

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

19

Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview

Product Overview
Purpose
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are the ideal codec solution for very
high-quality SD or HD transmission over telecommunications links.
A Platform can transport up to 8 (CP6000) or 4 (CP6100) SD/HD channels
across ASI or IP Gigabit Ethernet, in any kind of MPEG format from
MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0 8 bit up to MPEG-4 HD 4:2:2 10 bit format.

Description
Slot number
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are modular chassis which offer:

CP6000: 4 slots in a 1RU 19" device

CP6100: 2 slots in a 1RU 19" width device.

Each slot can be fitted with a hot swappable board. This solution allows
boards to be exchanged without disturbing the channels in use. It is a key
feature for easy setup, system expansion and maintenance.

MPEG board
Each slot can be fitted with a MPEG board. There are 2 types of MPEG
board:

The Dual channels MPEG board: It supports one or two MPEG


encoding channels or one or two MPEG decoding channels.

The Single channel MPEG board: It supports one MPEG encoding


channel or one MPEG decoding channel with audio interface.

Board configuration (encoder or decoder) and the supported MPEG


format are enabled by a software license. A single product and board for
the encoder and decoder function simplifies parts management and
training and minimizes investments.

Modulator
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms can be fitted with a
DVB-S/S2/S2X/DSNG Modulator plugged into one of the slots.

Power Supply
The ViBE CP6000 Platform can be fitted with a single AC or DC power
supply or dual AC/AC, AC/DC or DC/DC power supply. In the latter
20

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview

case, should the primary power supply fail, operations automatically


continue using the backup supply.
The ViBE CP6100 Platform is fitted with a single AC power supply.

Future Proof Contribution Platforms


ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform architecture is based on ATCA telecom
standard with high backplane throughput to address future applications.
It is 3Gbps SDI application (1080p50/59.97) ready.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

21

Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview

Main Features

CP6000: 1RU 19 device with four hot swappable boards

CP6100: 1RU 19 width device with 2 hot swappable boards

Single board for encoder or decoder enabled by software license

Automatic SD, HD detection and configuration according to the input


video format for encoder application

Video rescaling for decoder application

Dual SDI input per encoder with automatic redundancy

MPEG encoder & decoder board:

Video processing
- MPEG-2 SD/HD, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2, 8 bits resolution
- MPEG-4 SD/HD, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2, 8 or 10 bits resolution
- 2 x MPEG encoders or decoders per Dual channels MPEG
board (up to 8 HD in 1RU) or 1 x MPEG encoder or decoder
per Single channel MPEG board (up to 4 HD in 1RU).

Audio processing
- Audio source
- Dual channels MPEG board: SDI signal.
- Single channel MPEG board: SDI signal and Audio
External interfaces (Analog or Digital)
- Up to 8 stereo (2.0) or 2 surround (5.1) audios per video
channel
- MPEG-1 Layer II (2.0)
- AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1)(optional)
- HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1), HE-AAC v2 (2.0) (optional)
- Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1) (optional)
- Audio Pass-thru: Dolby E, Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1),
MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0), AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1), HE-AAC (2.0,
5.1), HE-AAC v2 (2.0)

22

SD/HD Ancillary Processing

VBI Processing

Standard delay and low delay modes

Two Gigabit Ethernet ports per board

BISS mode 1, BISS E Scrambling / Descrambling (optional)

1080p50/59.94 (3Gbps SDI) hardware ready on Dual Channels


board only

Forward Error Correction (FEC) for transmission reliability

ASI to IP / IP to ASI Gateway


ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview

Modulator board

DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG modulation

2 modulator types: IF or RF output

Contribution & Distribution over un-managed networks protection


(optional)

Genlock for decoder application (CP6000 only)

Single or dual power supply (CP6000 only)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

23

Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview

System Applications
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms are perfectly suited to

Contribution (backhaul) circuits from occasional venues such as sport


arenas.

Links from Playout Centers to Regions and Affiliates.

Figure 1-1. System applications for ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms

24

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 1 Overview Product Overview

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms support point-to-point connection or


any-to-any connection.
Figure 1-2. Example of point-to-point connection

Figure 1-3. Example of any-to-any connection

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

25

Chapter 1 Overview Product Description

Product Description
Front Panel
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 front panels feature an LCD screen, a 7-key
keypad and a set of three status LEDs.
The features of the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 front panels are described in
the Front Panel Operation chapter of this User Manual.
Figure 1-4. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform front panel

CP6000 front panel

CP6100 front panel

Rear Panel
The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panels feature:

26

ViBE CP6000

one or two power supply inlets

a Manager board

up to 4 boards

ViBE CP6100

one power supply inlet

Interfaces of the internal Manager board

up to 2 boards

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 1 Overview Product Description

Figure 1-5. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panels

CP6000 1st version rear panel

1 or 2 PSU inlets

Manager board

4 independent slots for hot swappable boards

CP6000 2nd version rear panel


LAN 1

MPEG

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO4

IO5

MPEG

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO4

IO5

LAN 2

LAN 1

LAN 1

Audio

MPEG
LAN 2

IO1

IO2

IO5

IO1

IO2

IO5

PSU2

GPIO

PSU1

STAT
LAN 1

Audio

LAN 2

LAN 2

LAN 1

LAN 2

SYNC

C&C

TER
MPEG

4 independent slots for hot swappable boards

Manager board

1 or 2 PSU inlets

CP6100 rear panel

2 independent slots for hot swappable boards

Interfaces of the Manager board


1 PSU inlet

Manager Board
The Manager board provides

Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics

Storage of configuration, log and firmware files

Storage of alarms in a database

Automatic detection of board plug in

Uploading of board specific code containing the board management


resource and application

Aggregation and distribution of IP datagrams (CP6000 only)

Refer to section Manager Board Specifications on page 318 for more


information on this board.

MPEG Board

There are 2 types of MPEG board:

The dual channels MPEG board: It supports up to two MPEG


encoding channels or up to two MPEG decoding channels,
whatever it is MPEG2/4 SD/HD 4:2:0 or 4:2:2.

The single channel MPEG board: It supports one MPEG


encoding channel or one MPEG decoding channel, whatever it is
MPEG2/4 SD/HD 4:2:0 or 4:2:2.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

27

Chapter 1 Overview Product Description

The board configuration (encoder or decoder) and the supported


formats (video & audio) are enabled by software license.

The MPEG board is hot swappable.

Refer to section MPEG Encoder Specifications on page 327 for more


information when the MPEG board is configured as a dual/single
encoder.
Refer to section MPEG Decoder Specifications on page 359 for more
information when the MPEG board is configured as a dual/single
decoder.

Modulator Board
The Modulator board supports DVB-S, DVB-S2, DVB-S2X and DVB-DSNG
standards.

There are 2 types of Modulator:

IF - Band Modulator (from 50 MHz to 180 MHz)

L- Band Modulator (from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz)

The Modulator board is hot swappable.

Refer to section DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications on


page 378 for more information.

28

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

2
Installation and startup
Chapter

Please read and follow the important safety information in


section Safety Instructions on page 405, noting especially those
instructions related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to
persons.

Introduction
This chapter provides the procedures required for device installation
and initial configuration and describes how to connect the device to
other devices in your system.

Content of this Chapter


Unpacking...................................................................................page 30
Removing the Protective Film .................................................page 31
Installing the Device (Steps)....................................................page 31
Mounting in Rack.......................................................................page 32
Powering Up...............................................................................page 50
Performing the Initial Settings ................................................page 51

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

29

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Unpacking

Unpacking
Table 2-1 lists the accessories that are always shipped with your device.
Use this list to ensure that your order is complete.
More accessories can be delivered depending on options you chose.
Table 2-1. List of accessories delivered with the device

Quantity

30

Description

ViBE CP6000 or ViBE CP6100 Platform

CD-ROM

Power cables if ordered

Quick Start Guide

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Removing the Protective Film

Removing the Protective Film


Remove the protective film from both sides before installation.

Installing the Device (Steps)


The following steps are required for device installation and initial
configuration:
1. Mounting the device in a rack.
2. Connecting the device to the other devices.
3. Powering the device.
4. Entering the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface (IP,
Date/Time). IP address can also be set via the device front panel.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

31

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Mounting in Rack
Rack mounting is not mandatory for ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platforms but the ventilation and safety requirements given in this
section must be observed in all cases.

CP6000 Platform
The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. If
you intend to install it in a rack, L-profiles are required.
CP6100 Platform
The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only.
If you intend to install 1 CP6100 in a 1/2 19 rack, L-profiles are
required.
If you intend to install 1 or 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack, the
platform(s) must be placed on a support (plate or other
device).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform Installation


Requirements
This section lists the principles to be observed and steps to be taken
when installing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platforms in a rack.

CP6000 Platform
CP6000 is supplied as standard with ears for mounting in a
19 rack.
CP6100 Platform
CP6100 is supplied as standard with ears and screws for
mounting in a 1/2 19. Refer to section Mounting CP6100
Platform(s) in a Rack on page 35.
An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platforms
in a 19 rack. Refer to section Mounting one or two CP6100
Platforms in a 19 Rack on page 36.

Restrictions must be observed:

related to ventilation (see section Ventilation on page 32)

related to the cables (see section Cabling on page 40)

related to the EMC ground (see section EMC Ground on page 40)

related to the Power supply and protective ground (see section


Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 41)

Ventilation
The air flow through the equipment is critical for maintaining the proper
temperature range. The following precautions should therefore be
observed:

32

Air circulating in the equipment:


ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

CP6000: As air circulates from right to left in the device (as seen
from front), allow at least 50 mm free air space on either side of
the device.

CP6100: As air circulates from front to rear in the device, allow


at least 50 mm free air space at the front and rear of the device.

Figure 2-1. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 - Cooling air flow

Air in

Air out

CP6000

Air out

Air in
CP6100

Prevent hot air from one device flowing into other devices.

Ensure adequate distribution of air flows to the device intakes.

Avoid the effects of natural convection between devices.

Avoid hot/cold air short-circuits.

Avoid transverse effects in coupled racks.

Prevent hot air from accumulating in the rack.

Cover empty slots with blank panels so as not to interfere with chassis
ventilation.

Check the air flows: the rack should ensure a sufficient supply of cold
air and sufficient evacuation of hot air (according to the number of
devices mounted in the rack and their corresponding air flows).

The following important requirements should be followed in addition to


the general recommendations:

The device must be installed in a room with low dust levels. The
maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100g/m3 and the
maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1m must
not exceed 1 million/m3. To prevent the power supply from
overheating, remember to regularly clean the rack filter according to
the manufacturers recommendations and clean ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Platform air inlet grills (at least twice a year).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

33

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Air circulating in the equipment:

CP6000: There must be enough room for a column of cold air to


circulate on the right of the chassis, from the bottom to the top
of the rack and a column of hot air to circulate on the left of the
chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack.

CP6100: There must be enough room for a column of cold air to


circulate at the front of the chassis, from the bottom to the top
of the rack and a column of hot air to circulate at the rear of the
chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack.

Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas


facing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform air inlets and outlets. This will
prevent any hot air from accumulating in the device.

Figure 2-2. L-profiles

Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4 mm in height in the areas facing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Platform air inlets and outlets.

CP6000 / CP6100 Platform stacking


Given its exact 1RU height, a Platform can be placed on top of another
Platform of the same type without any L-profiles or support. However,
platforms should be stacked in groups of two, with each group
separated from another by a space of 1RU. The total number of
Platforms in a rack must be limited to 10.

Failure to observe these installation requirements will directly


result in a deterioration in performance, reliability and service
life of equipment.

34

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Mounting CP6100 Platform(s) in a Rack


The CP6100 Platform is shipped with:

2 x small identical ears for mounting one CP6100 in a 1/2 19 rack (refer
to section Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19 Rack on
page 35).

6 x M3 Torx screws

6 x 1 mm shims

An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platform(s) in a 19


rack (refer to section Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19
Rack on page 36).

Mounting a CP6100 Platform in a 1/2 19 Rack


The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only,
L-profiles are required.

The horizontal center-to-center distance between the rack mounts


should be from 241 mm to 247 mm.
The shims should be mounted between the ears and the chassis to
compensate for any difference in center-to-center distance.

Procedure:

Fix the right ear on the chassis with 3 M3 Torx screws (refer to
Figure 2-3).

Fix the left ear on the chassis in the same way.

Mount the chassis in the rack.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

35

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Figure 2-3. 1 CP6100 with ears - Mounting in a 1/2 19 rack

if necessary one or more shims

3 M3 screws
241 t
o

247m
m

shim

Mounting one or two CP6100 Platforms in a 19 Rack


The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. They
must be placed on a support (plate or other device).

An optional kit is available to mount 1 or 2 CP6100 Platform(s) in a 19


rack.
Kit option reference: CP6100-MEC-KIT-A
Kit contents:
- 2 x large identical ears
- 1 mount plate
- 6 M3 Torx screws

Mounting one CP6100 Platform in a 19 Rack


Procedure:

36

Assemble the large ears on the chassis following the procedure


shown in Figure 2-3 (3 M3 Torx screws on either side).

Mount the chassis in the rack.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Figure 2-4. 1 CP6100 with large ears - Mounting in a 19 rack

Mounting two CP6100 Platform in a 19 Rack


Procedure:

Assemble a small ear on the left side of the left chassis (3 M3 Torx
screws).

Fix the mount plate on the right side of the left chassis (6 M3 Torx
screws).

Figure 2-5. Left CP6100 with ear and mount plate - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack

Ear

6 M3 screws

Mount plate

Assemble a small ear on the right side of the chassis positioned on the
right (3 M3 Torx screws).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

37

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Figure 2-6. Right CP6100 with ear - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack

Ear

Unscrew the ground strap fixing screw at the rear of the right chassis.

Figure 2-7. Ground strap fixing screw - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack

Unscrew the ground screw

Assemble the chassis by sliding the left chassis along the mount plate
as shown in the figure below:

Figure 2-8. Assembling the chassis - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack

38

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Retighten the screw at the rear of the right chassis. The ground strap
is fixed with the screw on the left chassis.

Figure 2-9. Ground strap fixing screw - Mounting of 2 CP6100 in a 19 rack

Retighten the screw

Screw to use to fix the ground strap

Mount the chassis in the rack.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

39

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Cabling
It is essential to separate the power supply cables from the signal cables.
When facing the rear of the rack (as the device is connected via the rear
panel), the power supply cables must be guided to the right of the chassis
and the signal cables to the left.

EMC Ground
The EMC connection is required to ensure ground equipotentiality
between the different devices in the technical center (only one
connection is required per device).
Each chassis features a tapped hole to connect a bonding strip (on the
CP6000 left side or CP6100 rear panel). This bonding strip has to be fixed
using the M4 screw supplied with the device. The bonding strip must
have a 6 mm cross-section and be shorter than 500 mm.
When mounting a chassis in the rack you are advised to observe the
following points:

Screw the bonding strip onto the chassis before mounting the chassis
in the rack. Then, screw the bonding strip onto the EMC DC bus.

Unscrew the bonding strip from the EMC DC bus before moving the
chassis. Then unscrew the bonding strip from the chassis.

The rack EMC DC bus (to which the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform EMC
strip is connected) must be connected to the rack ground pin. This pin is
also connected to the safety ground.

40

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Power Supply and Protective Ground


Power Inlet
The power outlet comprises a connector without an On/Off switch.

CP6000 Chassis
There are five kinds of power inlet according to the chassis model.

chassis with one AC Power Supply.

chassis with two AC Power Supplies for redundancy.

chassis with one DC Power Supply.

chassis with two DC Power Supplies for redundancy.

chassis with one AC Power Supply and one DC Power Supply for
redundancy.

CP6100 Chassis
There is one AC Power Supply.
Figure 2-10. CP6000 / CP6100 - Chassis models and their associated power supply inlets

CP6000

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

CP6100

41

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Power Supply Cord(s)


Cord(s) for AC mains power supply (CP6000 or CP6100)
The ViBE CP6100 Platform is always fitted with a single AC power

supply.

Specifications

The AC mains power cords are only shipped with the device if ordered.
Otherwise, it is advisable to use mains cables with the following features:

Device end of cable: IEC 60320 C13-compliant connector.

Flexible wire: 3 x 1 mm2 cross-section or 18 AWG, 10 A minimum,


250 V compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country
where the device is installed.

Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard
or rules of the country where the device is installed.

Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord(s) to the Power Supply End

The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the
country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the
rack in such a way that the plug and power cord(s) are within easy reach
for switching off purposes.
For (each) mains inlet, the wiring system must feature overload and earth
fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit
breaker. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician.
Connecting AC Mains Power Supply Cord(s) to the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform End

Plug the power cord(s) into the mains inlet.

42

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Mounting in Rack

Cord(s) for DC power supply (CP6000)


Specifications

The DC power cord(s) are shipped with the device.


The DC power supply cord wires are coloured in accordance with the
following codes:
Table 2-2. List of accessories delivered with the device

Pin layout

Terminals

Wire colour
INTERNATIONAL
(Cable Ref. 46131742)

A1: -

Blue

A2: protective earth

Green/Yellow

A3: +

Brown

The earthing standard is DC/I with DC return isolated.

- must be linked to a cut-off device.


+ must be linked to the protective earth (safety ground) outside
the device.

The DC power source must be of SELV type (Secundary Electrical Low


Voltage). It must be located in the same building as the device and the
entire source circuit must be kept within the building.
Connecting DC Power Supply Cord(s) to the Power Supply End

The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the
country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the
rack in such a way that the plug and power cords are within easy reach
for switching off purposes.
The wiring system must feature protection against overcurrents which
accepts voltages of 48 VDC + 20% - 15% and supports inrush current
when the device is plugged in. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician.
Connecting DC Power Supply Cord(s) to the Platform End

Connect the (two) power cord(s) to the DC power inlet(s).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

43

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Connecting the Signal Cables

Connecting the Signal Cables


On the Manager Board
Figure 2-11. Manager board LEDs and connectors

CP6000 1st version

CP6100
C&C

TER
SYN

PPS

LAN 1

LAN 2

GPIO

CP6000 2nd version


GPIO

STAT
LAN 1

LAN 2

SYNC

C&C

TER

CP6000 chassis version 1 & 2 offer the same functionalities except the PPS input that is not implemented on
the version 2

44

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Connecting the Signal Cables

CP6000 Platform
a. Check the LEDs:

Table 2-3. CP6000 1st version Manager board LEDs

LED

Meaning

Green LED on

There is no chassis alarm.

Red LED on

There is at least one critical or major alarm.

Green LED off


and Red LED off

The chassis is not powered.

Blue LED on

The chassis is rebooting.

Table 2-4. CP6000 2nd version Manager board LED

LED

Meaning

STAT (status)

Green: There is no chassis alarm.


Red: There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Orange: The chassis is rebooting.

b. Connect the Ethernet cable for Configuration, Monitoring and


Diagnostics to the C&C connector.
c. If necessary, connect the IP upstream/downstream equipment to
the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).

CP6100 Platform
Connect the Ethernet cable for Configuration, Monitoring and
Diagnostics to the C&C connector.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

45

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Connecting the Signal Cables

On each MPEG Board used as Encoder


Dual Channels MPEG Board
Figure 2-12. Dual channels MPEG Encoder board connectors

1. Connect the main and optionally SDI/SD-SDI/HD upstream pieces of


equipment to the SDI In connectors (IO1 for encoding channel 1, IO3
for encoding channel 2).
IO2 and IO4 connectors can be used as SDI Input connectors in
redundancy mode or as ASI Out connectors.
2. Connect the ASI downstream equipment to the ASI Out connector
(IO5) and the IP downstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the
LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP downstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
connector(s) on the Manager board.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Encoder board
and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI input.
Refer to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352.

Single Channel MPEG Board


Figure 2-13. Single channel MPEG Encoder board connectors

LAN 1

Audio

MPEG

IO1
Audio inputs

SDI input
main

IO2

SDI input
backup or
ASI output

LAN 2

IO5
ASI input
or
ASI output

Ethernet 1
output

Ethernet 2
output

1. Connect the main and optionally SDI/SD-SDI/HD upstream pieces of


equipment to the SDI In connector (IO1).
IO2 connector can be used as SDI Input connector in redundancy
mode or as ASI Out connector.
46

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Connecting the Signal Cables

2. If necessary, connect the audio upstream pieces of equipment to the


Audio connector.
3. Connect the ASI downstream equipment to the ASI Out connector
(IO5) and the IP downstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet switch) to the
LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP downstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
connector(s) on the Manager board.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Encoder board
and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI input.
Refer to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352.

On each MPEG board used as Decoder


Dual Channels MPEG Board
Figure 2-14. Dual channels MPEG Decoder board connectors

LAN 1

MPEG

IO1

IO2

SDI output SDI output


or
ASI input
Decoder 1

IO3

SDI output SDI output


or
ASI input

IO4

LAN 2

IO5

ASI output
or
ASI input

Ethernet 1
input

Ethernet 2
input

Decoder 2

1. Connect the ASI upstream equipment to a connector configured as


ASI In (IO1 or IO3 or IO5) and the IP upstream equipment (e.g.
Ethernet switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP upstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
connector(s) on the Manager board.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Decoder board
and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

47

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Connecting the Signal Cables

2. Connect the SDI/HD-SDI/SD downstream pieces of equipment (e.g.


Production Switcher or intermediate protection Switch) to the SDI
Out connectors (IO2 for decoding channel 1, IO4 for decoding
channel 2). IO1 and IO3 connectors can be configured as mirrors of
IO2 and IO4 connectors or as ASI In connectors.
3. If necessary connect a monitor on IO5 configured as an ASI Out
connector (in this case IO5 monitors the MPTS present at the input of
the decoder in TS redundancy mode only).
If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI output.
Refer to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376.

Single Channel MPEG Board


Figure 2-15. Single channel MPEG Decoder board connectors

Audio

MPEG

IO1
Audio outputs

IO2

SDI output SDI output ASI output


or
or
ASI input
ASI input

LAN 1

LAN 2

Ethernet 1
input

Ethernet 2
input

IO5

1. Connect the ASI upstream equipment to a connector configured as


ASI In (IO1 or IO5) and the IP upstream equipment (e.g. Ethernet
switch) to the LAN connector(s) (LAN 1/LAN 2).
The IP upstream equipment can also be connected to the LAN
connector(s) on the Manager board.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG Decoder board
and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
2. If necessary, connect the audio downstream pieces of equipment to
the Audio connector.
3. Connect the SDI/HD-SDI/SD downstream pieces of equipment (e.g.
Production Switcher or intermediate protection Switch) to the SDI
Out connector (IO2). IO1 connector can be configured as mirrors of
IO2 or as ASI In connector.
4. If necessary connect a monitor on IO5 configured as an ASI Out
connector (in this case IO5 monitors the MPTS present at the input of
the decoder in TS redundancy mode only).
If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used, IO5 is the ASI output.
Refer to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376.

48

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Connecting the Signal Cables

On a Modulator board
Figure 2-16. Modulator board connectors

1. Connect the RF Out connector to the downstream equipment.


2. If necessary connect monitoring equipment to the MON Out
connector (in this case MON Out monitors the RF Output with a
decreased level of 20dB).
3. If necessary connect monitoring equipment to the ASI Out connector
(in this case ASI Out monitors the stream after the internal bitrate
adaptation process).
4. If necessary connect a 10 MHz reference source to the REF In
connector. The internal 10 MHZ reference is used by default.
5. If necessary connect an external ASI source on the ASI In1 connector.
6. If necessary connect an external ASI source on the ASI In2 connector.
Diplexer connexion
If a diplexer is used with the L - Band Modulator then connect it as follow:
Figure 2-17. Diplexer connexions

High pass (L Band)


from RF Out connector
Common
To Up converter

Low pass (Ref 10 MHz)


from REF Out connector

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

49

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Powering Up

Powering Up
Check that the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform is not yet connected to
the LAN as factory-set IP addresses may cause disturbance on the
LAN when the device is switched on (address conflict).

Connect the power cords. The green POWER LED(s) will come on.
After a start-up phase, the device will become operational. When the
device is switched on, the last stored configuration will be active.

50

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Performing the Initial Settings


Accessing the Command Line Interface
In this section and those that follow, the Command Line Interface will
be abbreviated by CLI.

CLI is accessed via an Ethernet link using the C&C connector at the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 rear panel and the PC Telnet application.
Figure 2-18. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 rear panel

C&C

CP6000 1st version

CP6000 2nd version


LAN 1

MPEG

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO4

IO5

MPEG

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO4

IO5

LAN 2

LAN 1

Audio

MPEG
LAN 1

LAN 2

IO1

IO2

IO5

IO1

IO2

IO5

PSU2

GPIO

PSU1

STAT
LAN 1

Audio

LAN 2

LAN 1

LAN 2

LAN 2

SYNC

C&C

TER
MPEG

C&C
CP6100
RF

ASI

ASI

REF

IN

MON

OUT

OUT

IN1
LAN 1

MPEG

IO1

IO2

IO3

IO4

IO5

IN2
LAN 2

C&C

TER

C&C

The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform IP address, which is


required for the first Telnet connection, is given on the Acceptance
Test Report shipped with the device.
The factory set IP address and Netmask for the Control,
Commands and Diagnostics port are 192.168.1.1 and
255.255.255.0

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

51

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

The IP address will be changed during the installation setup. This will
be the new customer set IP address that will be required for the next
Telnet connections.
IP address can be changed:

via the CLI, see section Editing IP Parameters (ipset) on page 56


or
via the Front Panel, see Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation on
page 67.

As the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform C&C Ethernet


interface hosts an autocrossover mechanism, you can use direct or
crossed cable connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform.
Set up the Telnet connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform.
Figure 2-19. Telnet connection between the PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform

A welcome page will be displayed. Go to section Entering the Login


and Password on page 52 to continue.

Entering the Login and Password


The welcome page displayed after connection will request the user login
and password.
CLI has two predefined user groups: Service group and Operator group.

52

The Service group is for Technicians who are responsible for


installation. The Login and password are respectively service and
service.

The Operator group is for Users who are in charge of operation. The
Login and password are respectively operator and operator.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

In the current release, you must proceed as follows to log in as


service:
Log in as operator with operator and operator for login
and password.
Type user.
Answer service and service for login and password.
Be aware that CLI is case sensitive (service is correct, Service
is not correct)
To quit the CLI, type quit.

Figure 2-20. Login and password

Getting Help
To get the list of all available CLI commands (related to user rights) type
help after the prompt. Two types of help are available: one for service
and one for operator.
Example:
CLI.Operator> help

The CLI provides many commands. Some of these commands are


not, however, intended for the device user but reserved for Thomson
Video Networks use only. It is therefore important to only use the
commands described in this manual so as not to disrupt device
operation or jam the device, as this would require assistance from
Thomson Video Networks Customer Services.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

53

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Setting Initial Parameters


The commands used to set the initial parameters are listed below.
reboot ........................................................................................... page 55
ipdisp ........................................................................................... page 55
ipset ............................................................................................. page 56
ddate ............................................................................................. page 57
sdate ............................................................................................. page 57
dntp ............................................................................................... page 58
sntp ............................................................................................... page 59
rinfo ............................................................................................. page 60
winfo ............................................................................................. page 60
clist ............................................................................................. page 61
cset ............................................................................................... page 61

54

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Commands to Reboot the Equipment


The following procedure must be used to reboot the equipment:
1. Type reboot after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
Figure 2-21. Rebooting the device

2. Type y to confirm twice the reboot (or n if you want to cancel it).
Figure 2-22. Rebooting the device

Commands Relating to IP Parameters


The following procedure is used to set the IP parameters of the
Commands, Monitoring & Diagnostics C&C port located on the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform rear panel.

Displaying IP Parameters (ipdisp)


(Login: service or operator)
To display the IP address, type ipdisp after the prompt then press
ENTER on the keyboard.
Figure 2-23. Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

55

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Editing IP Parameters (ipset)


(Login: service)
To set the IP address, proceed as follows:
1. Type ipset after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Type the new IP address, gateway, netmask and MTU values
successively or press the ENTER key on the keyboard for each of them
if you wish to keep the previous values.
Set MTU parameter to the required MTU size (in bytes) if, and only if,
your control and command link is carried over a link with reduced
MTU, and which not properly handles MTU discovery. Otherwise, set
MTU parameter to 0 to use the MTU discovery mechanism.
3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters
[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you
wish to keep the previous values.
Figure 2-24. Editing CMD1 IP parameters (ipset1) - Example.

4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the
new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).

56

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Commands Relating to the Date and Time


Displaying the Current Date and Time (ddate)
(Login: service or operator)
To display the current date and time, type ddate after the prompt then
press ENTER on the keyboard.
The UTC date and time will be displayed.
Figure 2-25. Displaying the current date and time (ddate) - Example.

Changing the Date and Time (sdate)


(Login: service)
To change the date and time, proceed as follows:
1. Type sdate after the CLI.Service prompt.
2. Type the new date and time values in year (YYYY), month (MM), day
(DD), hour (hh) and minute (mm) format without spaces after UTC
time ?
3. Type y after Apply date&time now? if you wish to confirm the new
values or n if you wish to keep the previous values.
Figure 2-26. Changing the current date and time (sdate) - Example.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

57

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Commands Relating to the NTP Server


The purpose of NTP (Network Time Protocol) is to synchronize the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform system clock with the clocks of
other devices via a shared network.
The NTP service can synchronize two clocks provided that the initial
offset between these two clocks is slight. You are advised to
manually set the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 system clock as close as
possible to the NTP server clock. Several minutes are required to
achieve perfect synchronization between the two platforms.

The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 is set to operate as an NTP client. The external
NTP server can be backed up so that two NTP server IP addresses can be
set through the CLI: the first one for the primary NTP server (server 1),
the second one for the backup NTP server (server 2).

Displaying the Current NTP Server IP Addresses (dntp)


(Login: service or operator)
To display whether the NTP feature is enabled or not and to know the
current NTP server IP addresses, type dntp after the prompt then press
ENTER on the keyboard.
The NTP server IP addresses will be displayed.
Figure 2-27. Displaying the NTP mode and the NTP server IP addresses (dntp) - Example:

58

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Setting the NTP Server IP Addresses (sntp)


(Login: service)
To enable or disable the NTP feature and set the NTP server IP addresses,
proceed as follows:
1. Type sntp after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Type y after NTP Time synchronization [1 = Enable]/[0 =
Disable] (x) if you wish to enable the NTP feature, or n if you wish
to disable the NTP feature.
3. Type the IP address of the primary NTP server after NTP server 1 IP
address (current IP address): if you wish to set a new address or
press the ENTER key on the keyboard if you wish to keep the previous
value.
4. Type the IP address of the backup NTP server after NTP server 2
IP address (current IP address): if you wish to set a new
address or press the ENTER key on the keyboard if you wish to keep
the previous value.
5. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters
[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you
wish to keep the previous values.
6. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the
new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

59

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Commands Relating to SysName, SysContact and


SysLocation
SysName, SysContact and SysLocation can be read and edited when
installing the product using the CLI rinfo and winfo commands
respectively. These parameters are accessed in the MIB2 system.

Displaying SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (rinfo)


(Login: service or operator)
To display SysName, SysContact and SysLocation, type rinfo after the
prompt then press ENTER on the keyboard.
Figure 2-28. Displaying SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (rinfo)

Editing SysName, SysContact and SysLocation (winfo)


(Login: service)
To set the SysName, SysContact and SysLocation, proceed as follows:
1. Type winfo after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Type the new SysName, SysContact and SysLocation strings
successively or press the ENTER key on the keyboard for each of them
if you wish to keep the previous values (Only characters compliant
with ASCII code are accepted).
3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters
[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you
wish to keep the previous values.
4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the
new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).

60

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

Commands Relating to Community Strings


Displaying Community Strings (clist)
(Login: service or operator)
To display Community Strings, type clist after the prompt then press
ENTER on the keyboard.
Figure 2-29. Displaying Community Strings (clist)

The Community Strings are displayed.

Editing Community Strings (cset)


(Login: service)
To edit the Community Strings, proceed as follows:
1. Type cset after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
Figure 2-30. Editing Community Strings (cset)

2. Type the Community String or press the ENTER key on the keyboard
for each of them if you wish to keep the previous values.
3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters
[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new Community
String or n if you wish to keep the previous Community String.
As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device for the
new values to be acknowledged (type reboot after the prompt).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

61

Chapter 2 Installation and startup Performing the Initial Settings

BLANK PAGE

62

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

3
Chassis Configuration
Chapter

Introduction
This chapter gives the rules to be observed for populating the chassis
with MPEG boards.

Content of this Chapter


Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards..page 64

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

63

Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards

Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards


The following rules must be observed to ensure proper cooling of the
boards inside the device.

Modulator board location:


In CP6000 Platform the Modulator board must be located in slot 3
In CP6100 Platform the Modulator board must be located in slot 1

Figure 3-1. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms with one board

CP6000
Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version

CP6100

Figure 3-2. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms with two boards

CP6000
Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version

CP6100

Figure 3-3. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform with three boards

Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version

64

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards

Figure 3-4. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform with four boards

Manager board
Depends on the
CP6000 version

In all cases, it is mandatory to cover empty slots with blank panels so


as not to interfere with chassis ventilation.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

65

Chapter 3 Chassis Configuration Populating the Chassis with MPEG or Modulator Boards

BLANK PAGE

66

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

4
Front Panel Operation
Chapter

Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the Front Panel to configure the
equipment.

In this Chapter
Front Panel Description ............................................................page 68
Screen Description ....................................................................page 71

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

67

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Description

Front Panel Description


Foreword
The aim of the front panel is not to replace the Management System but
to provide a control/command interface for the main settings.
Device operation via its front panel generally involves:

changing basic settings (IP settings, etc.).

displaying device codes and serial numbers.

displaying installed software releases.

displaying raised alarms.

recalling predefined configurations. These configurations are defined


via the Web Interface.

setting certain parameters of the active configuration.


A configuration cannot be defined via the front panel.

displaying device internal temperature.

rebooting the device.

Description and overview


The CP6000 / CP6100 front panel features an LCD screen, a 7-key keypad
(Home, ESC, OK (Return) and 4 arrow keys) and a set of three status
LEDs.
Figure 4-1. ViBE CP6000 / 6100 - Front Panel
Running

Alarm

Warning

68

UP

HOME

LEFT ESC

OK

RIGHT

DOWN

Device status LEDs

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Description

They indicate the following:


Table 4-1. Device status LED specifications

LED

Color

RUNNING

green

ALARM

red

At least one major alarm has been raised

WARNING

orange

At least one minor alarm has been raised

Description
The Device is On

Keypad

The keypad features 7 keys used to display and select a menu or a


setting:
Table 4-2. Keypad specifications

Key

Function

Move the cursor right

Move the cursor left

Move the cursor up or select a numeric value

Move the cursor down or select a numeric value

OK

Access the main menu, a sub-menu or confirm a setting value

ESC

Go back to the menu above

HOME

Go back to the main menu

LCD screen

The LCD screen features a graphic display. It provides up to 5 lines:

Line 1: menu context

Lines 2, 3, 4 and 5: menu

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

69

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Front Panel Description

Figure 4-2. LCD menu overview

MENU CONT

MENU

Symbols (or markers) help to locate and/or select displayed items:


Table 4-3. Meaning of CP6000 / CP6100 front panel LCD symbols

Symbol

Meaning

Animated symbol in the top right of the status screen indicating


that the device is operational.

> xxxx <

Text preselection marker. The selected text can then be


confirmed by pressing the OK key on the keypad. Move this
marker using one of the 4 arrow keys.
These symbols indicate indicate the up/down keys are active
and depend on the displayed menu.

Setting LCD screen brightness and contrast


For optimum readability of texts displayed on the LCD screen, it may be
necessary to adjust the Brightness and Contrast according to the lighting
conditions. Refer to section LCD CAL screen on page 79.

70

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Screen Description
Screen menu tree
Figure 4-3. Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 1/2

Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 72

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

71

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Figure 4-4. Menu tree of screens displayed on the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2

72

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Summary of screen functions


List summarizing the functions available via the screens:
Table 4-4. Functions available via the CP6000 / CP6100 front panel screens

Screen

Function

section Device booting screen on page 73 Indicates that the device is starting
up.
section Status screen on page 74

Indicates the device name and IP


address.

section Main menu screen on page 75

Displays available sub-menus.

section Alarms screen on page 75

Displays alarms raised on the


device.

section Setup screen on page 76

Displays available sub-menus.

section IP Setting screen on page 76

Displays and used to edit device IP


settings.

section Recall screen on page 77

Used to recall a predefined


configuration.

section Reboot screen on page 79

Used to reboot the device.

section LCD CAL screen on page 79

Used to adjust the LCD brightness


and contrast.

section Info screen on page 80

Displays available sub-menus.

section Main Board Information


screen on page 80

Displays Main board information.

section Temperature Information


screen on page 80

Displays Temperature information.

section Configuration screen on page 81

Displays available sub-menus.


Used to edit and save certain
parameters
of
the
current
configuration.

Device booting screen


When the device is powered on, after a few seconds the LCD lights up
and the following message is displayed during the boot process:

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

73

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Figure 4-5. Booting screen

ViBE Launching ...

The Status screen will be displayed once the boot process is complete:
Figure 4-6. Status screen

ViBE CP6000 STATUS


CP6000 XXXXXXXX
IP Address: 10.12.54.24

The Status screen is described below.

Status screen
Figure 4-7. Status screen

ViBE CP6000 STATUS


CP6000 XXXXXXXX
IP Address: 10.12.54.24

74

Animated symbol indicating that the device is


operational.

CP6000

Indicates the name of the device. This name is assigned


via the Management System (Web Browser or
MediaFlexSUITE).

IP Address

Indicates the device IP address.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Main menu screen


To display the Main menu screen:

From the Status screen, press the OK key.

From a sub-menu, press the ESC key once or more depending on the
sub-menu displayed.

Figure 4-8. Main menu screen


MAIN
<ALARMS>

SETUP

INFO

CONFIG

To select a sub-menu, use the , , and keys and then confirm your
choice by pressing the OK key.
Available sub-menus:
Alarms

Used to display alarms raised on the device.

Setup

Used to:
Set device IP settings
Recall a predefined configuration
Reboot the device
Make LCD adjustments (Contrast and Brightness)

Info

Used to get information about device board references,


chassis references, serial numbers, release numbers
and temperatures.

Config

Used to edit and save certain parameters of the current


configuration.

Alarms screen
The Alarms screen is used to view alarms raised on the device. To display
this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select ALARMS using the arrow
keys and press OK.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

75

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Figure 4-9. Alarms screen


ALARMS

Severity

Name

XX/YY

Alarm Wording (first line)


Alarm Wording (last line)

Severity

Used to indicate alarm severity. The alarm can be


Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.

Name

Used to indicate the name of the function with the


alarm(s): MAIN, DEC x or ENC x.

XX/YY

XX indicates the number of the alarm in the YY list,


where YY represents the total number of alarms raised.

Alarm Wording

Used to provide the alarm description, which is


identical to the description displayed on the
Management System.

If necessary, the and keys can be used to display the next or


previous alarm.
The list of alarms is created when the Alarms screen is selected. To
update the list of alarms, you will need to exit the Alarms screen.

Setup screen
The Setup screen is used to access the IP Settings, Recall, Reboot and
LCD CALibration sub-menus. To display this screen, go to the Main menu
screen, select SETUP using the arrow keys and press OK.
Figure 4-10. Setup screen
SETUP
<IP SETTING>

RECALL

REBOOT

LCD CAL

IP Setting screen
The IP Setting screen is used to view and set the Control & Command IP
Settings. To display this screen, go to the Setup screen, select IP
SETTING using the and keys and press OK.
The IP Address, Netmask and Gateway will be displayed:

76

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Figure 4-11. IP Setting screen


IP SETTING
<IP Address> : 10.141.127.40

IP Netmask

: 255.255.255.0

IP Gateway

: 10.141.127.49

Example: Procedure for editing the IP Address (the procedure for


editing the IP Netmask and IP Gateway values is the same)

Use the and keys to select the Address, Netmask or


Gateway setting and press OK. The first digit is blinking.

Use the and keys to select the field to be modified and then
use the and keys to adjust the value. Refer to the figure
below:

Figure 4-12. IP Address, Settings screen


IP Address
0 1 0 1 4 1 . 1 2 7. 0 4 0
0 1 1 1 4 1 . 1 2 7. 0 4 0

Confirm the new value by pressing OK. The Confirm screen will
be displayed:

Figure 4-13. IP Address settings, Confirm screen


IP Address

:11.141.127.40
Do you Confirm update
No=ESC

Yes=OK

Press OK to enable the new IP address or press ESC/HOME to


exit this screen.

Consistency between the IP address and Gateway address is


checked.
The changes will be acknowledged after the device has been
rebooted.

Recall screen
The Recall screen is used to recall a predefined configuration.
Configurations are predefined via the Web Interface. To display the Recall
screen, go to the Setup screen, select RECALL using the and keys
and press OK.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

77

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Figure 4-14. Recall screen


RECALL

XX/YY

ZZ EQU: -----------------> ZZ EQU: -----------------ZZ EQU: -----------------ZZ EQU: ------------------

XX/YY

XX indicates the number of the currently selected


predefined configuration. YY indicates the total number
of predefined configurations.

ZZ EQU: ........

ZZ: Used to indicate the ID of the configuration.


EQU:
Used
to
indicate
the
type
configuration (EQU = Equipment).
-------: Name of the configuration as set on creation.

of

Procedure for recalling a configuration

Select the configuration to be recalled on the Recall screen using


the or keys.

Confirm your choice by pressing OK. The Confirm screen will be


displayed:

Figure 4-15. Recall, Confirm screen


RECALL

Preset ZZ
Do you Confirm Recall?
No=ESC Yes=OK

Press OK to enable the recall or ESC/HOME to exit this screen.


At the end of the operation, if the recall was successful the
following screen will be displayed:

Figure 4-16. Recall, recall successful screen


RECALL

Preset ZZ
Recall Done, Press OK

An error message will be displayed in the event of failure.

78

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Reboot screen
The Reboot screen is used to reboot the device. To display this screen, go
to the Setup screen, select REBOOT using the and keys and press
OK.
Figure 4-17. Reboot screen
REBOOT
Reboot Equipment?
No=ESC Yes=OK

Procedure for rebooting the device

Press OK to reboot the device. If you do not wish to reboot the device,
press ESC/HOME to exit this screen.

LCD CAL screen


The LCD Calibration screen is used to adjust the LCD Brightness and
Contrast. To display this screen, go to the Setup screen, select LCD CAL
using the and keys and press OK.
Figure 4-18. LCD CAL screen
LCD CAL.
<BRIGHTNESS>

CONTRAST

Procedure for adjusting LCD Brightness or Contrast


Use the and keys to select the Brightness or Contrast setting and
press OK.
Figure 4-19. Brightness CAL screen
BRIGHTNESS

Adjust Brightness

= Up/Down

Save=OK

Exit=Esc/Home

Use the and keys to adjust the setting according to the lighting
conditions.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

79

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Press OK to confirm and save the setting(s) or ESC/HOME to exit this


screen without saving the setting(s). If OK is pressed the new settings
will be restored on next device power up, otherwise the previous
settings will be recalled.

Info screen
The Info screen is used to display the Software Package and Hardware
versions of the Main Board. To display this screen, go to the Main menu
screen, select Info using the and keys and press OK.
Figure 4-20. Info screen
INFO
<MAIN>

TEMPER.

Main Board Information screen


The Main Board Information screen is used to get CPU Board and device
information. To display this screen, go to the Info screen, select MAIN
using the and keys and press OK.

The following information will be displayed:

Figure 4-21. Main Board Info screen


MAIN BOARD INFO
Active SW

:CP6000 XX.XXXX

P/N

:XXXXXXXX

S/N

:sn XXXXXXXX

EQCODE

: XXXX

Active SW

Used to indicate the device active Software release


number.

P/N

Used to indicate the device reference.

S/N

Used to indicate the device serial number.

EQCODE

Used to indicate the CPU board equipment code. The


equipment code is used to order a software option.

Temperature Information screen


The Temperature Information screen is used to display the Ambient
Temperature. To display this screen, go to the Info screen, select
TEMPER. using the and keys and press OK.
80

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

The following information will be displayed:

Figure 4-22. Temperature Info screen


TEMPER. BOARD INFO
T Ambient

T Ambient

:XXC / YYF

Used to indicate the internal device temperature. The


temperature is displayed in degrees Centigrade and
Fahrenheit.

Configuration screen
To display this screen, go to the Main menu screen, select CONFIG using
the arrow keys and press OK.
The Configuration screen is used to edit certain parameters of the current
configuration. Refer to Figure 4-4 Menu tree of screens displayed on
the CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2 on page 72.

Parameters that can be edited from the device front panel


Any parameters not provided below have to be edited via the devices
Web Browser interface.
The parameters are described in detail in Chapter 5 Web Browser
Interface.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

81

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Parameters that can be edited on an Encoder


Figure 4-23. Menu tree of Encoder configuration

Table 4-5. List of parameters that can be edited on an encoder

Functions
Input Settings

Parameters
SDI
ASI
(ASI to IP Gateway
or External
Component input)

Activity (Yes/No)

Audio settings
(Single channel
board: Audio from
board front panel)

82

Analog audio:
XLR Input (In1(L1)/In2(R1),
(In3(L2)/In4(R2))
Alignment (value)
Headroom (value)
Digital audio:
XLR Input (In1(AES1), In2(AES2),
In3(AES3), In4(AES4))
Sample Rate Converter (On/Off)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Table 4-5. List of parameters that can be edited on an encoder

Functions
Component Settings *

Parameters
Video

PID (value)
No Source Mod (Black Pattern ....)
Input Standard (1280x720p@50Hz, .....)
Picture Resolution (1280x720, ....)
Encoding Format (H264, ...)
Chroma profil (4:2:0 - 8 bits, ....)
Picture Format (4:3, ....)
Encode Delay (Standard, ....)
Auto bitrate (On/Off)
Bitrate (value)
Entropy coding (CABAC, ....)
Automatic GOP size (Yes/No)
GOP size (value)

Audio

PID (value)
Input Format (PCM, ....)
Standard (MPEG1 Layer II, ....)
Source (Analog 1, Stereo 1 (Grp1/ Ch1-2,
....)
Signaling mode (Stereo, ....)
Audio Mode (Stereo, ....)
Frame per PES (One audio frame, ....)
Bitrate (value)
No source mode (Silence, ....)
AAC Syntax (Mpeg-2, ....)
AAC Encapsulation (ADTS, ....)

Ancillary

PID (value)

External Component
Settings *

Input PID (value)

Service Settings *

Service Id (value)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Output PID (value)

83

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Table 4-5. List of parameters that can be edited on an encoder

Functions

Parameters

TS Settings *

Bitrate automatic computing (Yes/No)


Bitrate (value)
If a TS to
Modulator is
instantiated

ASI Settings

TS (Enabled/Disabled)
Modulator Slot number (value)
Activity (Yes/No)
Output Selection (value)

IP Tx Settings

Destination IP Address (value)


Destination UDP Port (value)
Tx Encapsulation (MPEG/UDP/IP, ....)

LAN Settings

Enable interface (Yes/No)


Port number (value)
IP Address (value)
Netmask (value)
Default Gateway (value)

Gateway Settings

* These parameters can also be edited in an Encoding Profile

84

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Parameters that can be edited on a Decoder


Figure 4-24. Menu tree of decoder configuration

Table 4-6. List of parameters that can be edited on a decoder

Functions

Parameters

ASI Settings

Activity (Yes/No)

LAN Settings

Enable interface (Yes/No)


Port number (value)
IP Address (value)
Netmask (value)
Default Gateway (value)

IP Rx Settings

Multicast Address (value)


Destination UDP Port (value)
Encapsulation (MPEG/UDP/IP, ....)

Service Settings

Service Selection Mode By Id (only


if By PID or By Service name has
been previously selected via the
Web Browser).
Selection modes By PID or By
Service name can not be selected
via the front panel.
Service Id (value).
Service PID or Service name can
not be edited via the front panel.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

85

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Table 4-6. List of parameters that can be edited on a decoder

Functions
Output Settings

Parameters
SDI

Activity (Yes/No)

ASI
(IP to ASI Gateway)

Activity (Yes/No)

Audio settings
(Single channel
board: Audio to
board front panel)

Analog audio:
Activity (Yes/No)
XLR Output
(Out1(L1)/Out2(R1),
(Out3(L2)/Out4(R2))
Source (Audio 1 to Audio 8)
Level (value)
Digital audio:
Activity (Yes/No)
XLR Input (Out1(AES1),
Out2(AES2), Out3(AES3),
Out4(AES4))
Source (Audio 1 to Audio 8)

Gateway Settings

Parameters that can be edited on a Modulator


Figure 4-25. Menu tree of Modulator configuration

Table 4-7. List of parameters that can be edited on a modulator

Functions

Parameters

TS Selection

TS Selection (Internal, ....)

Modulation Settings

Standard (DVB-S2, ....)


ModCod (8PSK 5/6, ....)
Symbol Rate (45,000,000 Baud, ....)
Roll-Off (0.35, ....)

86

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

Table 4-7. List of parameters that can be edited on a modulator

Functions
RF Output Settings

Parameters
Activity (Yes/No)
Output Level (value)
Modulator Frequency (value)
Carried Modulated (Yes/No)
Stream Input Loss (Yes/No)

Parameters that can be edited in the Aggregation function


Figure 4-26. Menu tree of Aggregation function

Table 4-8. List of parameters that can be edited in the Aggregation function

Functions
LAN Settings

Parameters
Enable interface (Yes/No)
IP Address (value)
Netmask (value)
Default Gateway (value)

Procedure for changing parameter values


Please refer to Figure 4-4 Menu tree of screens displayed on the
CP6000 / CP6100 front paneI 2/2 on page 72 and the editable
parameter tables above:
1. Use the , , , and OK keys to select the parameter and press
OK to edit it.
2. Set the parameter value

To change a numeric value:


- Select the value to change using the or key until the
marker indicates the value to change.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

87

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation Screen Description

- Set the value with the or key.


- Press OK to confirm the new value.
Figure 4-27. Change a numeric value

VIDEO
> Bitrate
20, 000

Kbit

To change a non-numeric value:

Figure 4-28. Change a non-numeric value

VIDEO
> End to End delay
Low Delay

- Set the value with the or key.


- Press OK to confirm the new value.
3. Press HOME (once) or ESC (several times) to display the confirmation
screen.
Figure 4-29. Confirmation screen
XXXXXXXX
Apply the configuration?
No=ESC

Yes=OK

Press OK to apply the new value(s) to the current configuration or


ESC/HOME to exit this screen without saving the new value(s).
Consistency between the values is checked.

88

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

5
Web Browser Interface
Chapter

Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the Web Browser Graphical User
Interface to configure the equipment.

Content of this Chapter


Reaching the GUI.......................................................................page 90
Screen Layout ............................................................................page 93
Basic Settings.............................................................................page 121
Advanced Settings.....................................................................page 162
GUI Description .........................................................................page 206

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

89

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Reaching the GUI

Reaching the GUI


Compatible Web Browsers
The Web Interface has been tested with a Web Browser installed on a
Windows system. You can run the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform GUI provided you observe the following requirements for your
personal computer:

Web Browser must be Internet Explorer 7.0 (or higher), Mozilla Firefox
3.0 (or higher) or Google Chrome.

Java must be enabled.

Java Runtime Environment 7 update 51 is recommended.

Definition of Users
To operate the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 via a Web Browser connected to its
Web Interface, 2 User logins are set on device shipment.
They have the following names, passwords and profiles:
Table 5-1. Users set on device shipment

User login

Passworda

Profile

admin

admin

administrator

operator

No password

operator

To change the User name or edit the password, refer to section Login Name and Password on
page 96.

The different profiles provide the following rights:


Table 5-2. User profiles and corresponding rights

90

administrator

operator

Product Monitoring

Alarm Monitoring

View Entire Configuration

Configuration Management

Reboot Menu

Password Change

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Reaching the GUI

.
Multiple administrator sessions can be active. The administrator
session during which the last configuration change occurred has
precedence.

Setting up the link between the PC and the Device


To set up the link between the operating PC and ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Web Interface and reach the GUI:
1. Connect the PC Ethernet link to the C&C connector on the device rear
panel, or to the network connected to this connector.
2. Enter the equipment IP address in the address bar.
Figure 5-1. Reaching the GUI

The Graphical User Interface (GUI) Java applet is launched.


Following connection, the Web Interface Login page will be displayed:

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

91

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Reaching the GUI

Figure 5-2. Login page

3. Select your Login Name and enter your Password if admin name is
selected. See section Definition of Users on page 90.
Check Saving connection settings if you wish your Login Name and
Password to be saved on the current PC.
Default Users are set on device shipment (e.g. Login Name = admin
and Password = admin).

The Monitoring, Configuration and Alarm panels are displayed.


See section Panels on page 93.

92

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Screen Layout
Panels
When the applet is launched, three panels are automatically displayed on
the screen:

the Monitoring panel

the Configuration panel

the Alarm panel

They will be described in detail later in this section.


Figure 5-3. The Monitoring panel, Configuration panel and Alarm panel

Configuration panel
Monitoring panel

Alarm panel

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

93

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Customizing Configuration Tab Layout


By default, each tab is displayed as shown in Figure 5-3 on page 93. You
can choose either to keep such a layout, to display several tabs at a time,
or to display a single tab at a time.
To display several tabs at a time:
1. Click a tabs name and hold the mouse button down.
2. Drag and drop the tab to where you want to display it in the view.
A white-outlined rectangle will appear to show you the new possible
position. An example is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-4. Possible tabs layout

1. Click the tab and hold down the mouse

2. Drag the tab

3. Drop the tab

New tabs layout

94

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

The tab is then moved to its new position. In our example, the tab is
displayed under the previous tab in the list of configurations.
You can modify the order of tabs in the list of configurations by
dragging & dropping them from a position to another.

To move the tab back to its original position, proceed the same
way: click the tabs name and hold the mouse button, and then drag and
drop the tab next to the other tabs in the list of configurations.
To display a single tab in the whole view, double-click the tab.
Double-click it again to display your previous tabs layout.

Status Bar
Figure 5-5. The status bar

Information
The status bar gives the following information:

CPU gives a graphical indication of the CPU load (usage ratio).

Status gives the general status of the device internal processing.

if there are one or more critical alarms

if there is no error and one or more major alarms

if there is no error and no alarm

Name of the user connected and name and IP address of the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform.

Date and Time give the local time and date.

Time zone gives the time zone which can be the equipment time zone,
the Local time zone, or a GMT time zone.

About displays software and hardware information about the


equipment:

Part number

Serial number

Version number

Options

MIBs (click on a MIB to save it)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

95

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Figure 5-6. About page

Login Name and Password


The status bar can be used to change your Login Name (admin or
operator) and edit the admin password.

To change your Login name:

1. Click

,the Login page will be displayed:

Figure 5-7. Login page

2. Select your new Login Name and enter the Password if admin Login
name is selected.

96

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

To edit the admin password (current Login Name must be admin):

1. Click

,the Password edit page will be displayed:

Figure 5-8. Password edit page

2. Enter the Old password (current password).


Enter the New Password.
Confirm the New Password.
3. Click Change.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

97

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Monitoring Panel
Purpose
The Monitoring panel lets you see all content received by the ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in real time. Its content is
periodically refreshed.

Main Window
Figure 5-9. Monitoring panel

Aggregation ports: CP6000 only

Slot 3 and Slot 4: CP6000 only

The following information is displayed:

Aggregation (CP6000 only): Ethernet IP address information and


Ethernet link speed.

Depending on the slot content:

For an MPEG Encoder


- SDI input level: Video standard and audio format.
- Ethernet port level: IP address and link speed.
- ASI Out level: TS connected to the port and TS bitrate.

98

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

For an MPEG Decoder


- Ethernet port level: Port IP address, port link speed, TS
connected to the port, TS destination address and VLAN Id
value (if VLAN tagging is enabled).
- ASI In level: TS connected to the input.
- TS level: SI/PSI table information (PAT, CAT, SDT).
- Service level: Name, ID, PMT PID, PCR PID.
- Component level: Type and PID.

For an MPEG RF Modulator


- ASI input with TS bitrate information.
- Internal TS input with TS bitrate information.
- RF output with frequency information.

Empty

The following icons can be displayed:


Table 5-3. Monitoring icons specifications

SLOT
Slot 1: Empty

Slot 3: Empty

Slot 1: Active

Slot 3: Active

Slot 1: Disabled

Slot 3: Disabled

Slot 1: Error

Slot 3: Error

Slot 2: Empty

Slot 4: Empty

Slot 2: Active

Slot 4: Active

Slot 2: Disabled

Slot 4: Disabled

Slot 2: Error

Slot 4: Error
ASI

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Input ASI enabled

Output ASI enabled

Input ASI enabled


unlocked

Output ASI enabled error

Input ASI disabled

Output ASI disabled

99

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Table 5-3. Monitoring icons specifications

Giga Ethernet
Aggregation

Giga Ethernet enabled


unlocked

Giga Ethernet enabled

Giga Ethernet disabled


RF

Output RF enabled

Output RF disabled

Output RF enabled error


SDI
Input SDI Active Locked

Input SDI Backup Active


Locked

Input SDI Active


Unlocked

Input SDI Backup Active


Unlocked

Input SDI Inactive

Input SDI Backup Inactive

Input SDI Nominal Active


Locked

Input SDI Backup Active


Standby

Input SDI Nominal Active


Unlocked

Input SDI Backup Active


Standby Unlocked

Input SDI Nominal


Inactive

Input SDI Backup Inactive

Input SDI Nominal Active


Standby

Output SDI

Input SDI Nominal Active


Standby Unlocked
Input SDI Nominal
Inactive
TS

100

Input TS enabled

Input TS Backup Active

Input TS disabled

Input TS Backup Standby

Input TS Nominal Active

Output TS enabled

Input TS Nominal
Standby

Output TS disabled

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Table 5-3. Monitoring icons specifications

Service
Digital television

Radio

Nvod

Teletext

Mosaic

Data / Private
Component

Video

Subtitle

Audio

Data / Private

Teletext
Ghost Component
Container

Ghost
Overlay

PCR support

Warning

Scrambling

Error
Scrambling

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Scrambling root

EMM

ECM

Scrambling group

101

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Configuration Panel
Management Tab
Purpose
The Management tab is used to reboot the chassis or any board (MPEG
or Modulator board) or enable LED flashing on any board front panel for
identification purposes (which can be very useful for preventing one
board being mistaken for another when an operation is required, such as
moving a board, for example).

Description
Figure 5-10. Management tab

CP6000 only

The Reboot Shelf button reboots the entire chassis.


The Reboot Slot x button reboots board # x.
The Blink Slot x button enables LED flashing on board # x.

102

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Statistics Tab
Purpose
The Statistics tab displays:

Device temperature

Bitrate at the Decoder

Ethernet or ASI inputs (TS level)

TS input (Services level)

Service input (Components level)

Main Window
Figure 5-11. Statistics tab

Chart sub-panel
Monitoring panel

Caption sub-panel

Description
The Statistics tab consists of 2 sub-panels and a toolbar:

The Chart sub-panel displays the charts.

Figure 5-12. Chart sub-panel

The Caption sub-panel is used to select the content of the displayed


charts and indicates the Last value, Minimum value and Maximum
value for each parameter during the display time.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

103

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Figure 5-13. Caption sub-panel

The toolbar is used to configure the charts.

Figure 5-14. Toolbar

Toolbar description

Click

to display the chart settings box.

The available settings are as follows:


Figure 5-15. Settings for line charts

104

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Table 5-4. Available settings

First
parameter
Antialiasing

Second
parameter
-

Value scale
color

Values

Time

Display points

Enable/Disable the antialiasing filter for


display enhancement.
A double-click on this icon opens a Color
picker menu allowing the Operator to select
the color which will be used in the chart for
drawing the lines and displaying the text.

R, G, B

RGB component decimal values for the color.

Display grid

Enable/Disable the value display grid.

Auto vertical
size

Enable/Disable the auto vertical size feature.


When the box is unchecked, the vertical scale
is automatically adjusted (Min. and Max.
values are extracted from the data).
When the box is unchecked, two fields are
added to set the Min. and Max. values
manually.

Division count

Adjust the number of value display grid lines.

Display grid

Enable/Disable the time display grid.

Division count

Adjust the number of time display grid lines.

Window
duration

Adjust the time scale.

Enable/Disable the measurement point


display.

Click
and click
displayed chart.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Definition

in the Confirmation box to reset the

105

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Figure 5-16. Confirmation box

Click

to display or hide the Caption sub-panel.

Figure 5-17. Chart sub-panel with or without Caption sub-panel

Click

and select the type of chart to display.

is not displayed if Temperature chart is


selected.

106

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Figure 5-18. Type of chart to display

Temperature Chart

Double-click
in the Monitoring panel to display the
temperature charts. In the Caption sub-panel, select the slot temperature
to display:
Figure 5-19. Temperature charts

Slot 3 temperature chart

Slot 1 temperature chart

Select the slot temperature to display

The Temperature charts give the chipset temperature per slot. The
maximum permitted temperature is 85C. The product is fully reliable up

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

107

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

to this temperature. A temperature in the 60-85C range is normal during


operation.
On the CP6000 Platform, as cold air enters side slots 1 and 2, it is
normal that the temperature of these slots is lower than the
temperature of slots 3 and 4.
It is important to note that there is no ventilation until the
temperature has reached about 50C. This ventilation strategy is
designed to minimize noise and maximize product service life. This
is also why there is a large temperature difference between slots 1
and 2 and slots 3 and 4. When the ventilation increases the
temperature difference between the slots decreases.
Decoder/ASI or Ethernet Charts

Double-click ETH x (
) or ASI IN - IO x
(
) in the Monitoring panel to display the TS bitrate charts.
In the caption sub-panel, select the TS charts to display:
Figure 5-20. TS bitrate charts

TS bitrate charts

Select TS to display

108

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Decoder/TS Chart

Double-click TS x(
) in the Monitoring panel
to display the components of the TS with their bitrate chart. In the
Caption sub-panel, select the component charts to display:
Figure 5-21. TS components, bitrate charts

TS components bitrate charts

Select the components of the TS to display

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

109

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Decoder/Service Chart

Double-click Service (
) in the Monitoring panel
to display the components of the service with their bitrate chart. In the
Caption sub-panel, select the component charts to display:
Figure 5-22. Service components, bitrate charts

Service components bitrate charts

Select the components of the service to display

110

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Ip Counters Tab
Purpose
The IP Counters tab displays the quality of the IP RX streams on the
Decoder.

Main Window
Figure 5-23. IpCounters tab

Toolbar

Panel
Monitoring panel

Description
The IP Counters tab consists of 1 panel and a toolbar:

The panel displays the IP counter values slot by slot.

Figure 5-24. Ip Counter panel

Panel description
Port

Stream
IP@:
VLAN)

Active Port(s) on the MPEG Decoder board. One port


is displayed per IP Rx: If the same port receives n IP
Rx it is displayed n times.
(Rx
port

Uptime

IP Rx destination address and port.


The VLAN Id value is indicated if VLAN tagging is
used.
Time during which the IP Counter is in operation.

Received
Packets

IP

Number of IP packets received during the counter


uptime.

Missing
Packets

IP

Number of IP packets lost during the counter uptime.


The measurement is performed before FEC.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

111

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Missing
Packets
FEC

IP
after

Number of IP packets lost during the counter uptime.


The measurement is performed after FEC.
Click

to reset the counters of this IP Rx.

The toolbar is used to configure the slot display (simultaneous or tab


by tab display).

Figure 5-25. Slot display configuration

112

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Automation Tab
Purpose
The Automation tab is used to define the activation time of
configurations stored in the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
memory.

Description
Figure 5-26. Automation tab

Schedule

The Select button selects the type of automation.


Figure 5-27. Type of automation

No automation: the configurations will be activated manually.

Schedule: the configurations will be activated using a schedule.

When the Schedule type is selected, basic tools are available in the
toolbar for schedule editing.
Figure 5-28. Basic tools

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

113

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Table 5-5. Basic tools in the editing toolbar

Display

Definition
Insert a new schedule after the current selection.
Insert a new schedule before the current selection.
Duplicate the current selection.
Move up the current selection.
Move down the current selection.
Remove the current selection.
Remove all

Refer to section Setting Automation on page 202 for further


information on automation.

114

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Configuration Tabs
Purpose
The Configuration tabs are used to edit one or more configurations for
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Once edited, the
configurations are sent to the equipment for storage or application.

Description
Configurations are listed in tabs.
Figure 5-29. The list of configurations
Configuration tabs

In the list of configurations, the way the name of the configuration


appears in the tab indicates its status.
Table 5-6. List of configurations

Display

Type of
configuration

Definition

Green mark prior the


configurations name

Active configuration

Configuration that is
currently being used by the
equipment.

Configurations name
written between
brackets

New configuration

Configuration that has not


been sent to the equipment.

Normal text

Configuration sent to
the equipment

Configuration that has been


sent to the equipment but is
not currently being used.

Color of the tab in a


slightly lighter grey
than the other tabs

Displayed
configuration

Configuration that is
currently being displayed in
the working area.

Small star next to the


configurations name

Configuration being
edited

Configuration that is
currently being modified.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

115

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

The buttons displayed on the configuration toolbar vary according to the


actions that you are allowed to perform.
Figure 5-30. The Configuration toolbar

List of configurations

Opening / Creating configurations

LAN 1 / LAN 2 of the Manager board settings (CP6000 only)


Scrambling shared by the Encoder & Decoder modules

The toolbar buttons are spread out on two lines:

The first line contains buttons dedicated to opening or creating a


configuration.

The right part of the second line applies to the configuration that is
selected in the list of configurations.
Possible actions depend on the configuration status (Active
configuration, New configuration, Configuration sent to the
equipment, Displayed configuration, Configuration being edited).
They are described in the following table:

Table 5-7. Toolbar buttons (right part of the second line)

Click

116

Comments

Open

Open a configuration from a file.

New

Create a new configuration manually.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Table 5-8. Toolbar buttons (second line)

Click

Comments

Rename

Rename the configuration.

Remove

Remove the configuration from the list of


configurations. It is not possible to remove the
active configuration.

Send

Send the
memory.

Apply

Make the selected configuration active on the


equipment. This button is not available if
automation is running.

Save

Save the configuration to a file.

Copy

Duplicate the configuration.

Check

Check the configurations coherence.

Edit/Unedit

Switch between Edit mode and Read-only mode.


When clicking Unedit, all modifications in the
configuration that is currently modified are lost.

configuration

to

the

equipments

The center part is used to display the Product configuration panel or


the settings shared by the Encoder/Decoder modules.
Scrambling parameters are shared by the Encoder/Decoder modules.
Possible actions are described in the following table:

Table 5-9. Toolbar buttons (center part of the second line)

Click

Comments
Display the Configuration panel.
Display the Scrambling parameters. These
parameters are shared by the Encoder/Decoder
modules.
Display the LAN 1 / LAN 2 parameters of the
Manager board (CP6000 only).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

117

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Alarms Panel
Purpose
The Alarm panel displays an active alarms list and a closed alarms list.
The list of active alarms shows all alarms that are active at the current
time. The list of closed alarms shows all past alarms. Alarms (active and
closed) are saved in the flash memory, and are restored when the
equipment is rebooted.

Main Window
The Alarms panel is composed of two tabs: the Active alarms tab and
the Closed alarms tab.
To display simultaneously active and closed alarms, drag one tab.

Active Alarms Tab


Figure 5-31. Alarms panel - Active alarms tab

The Active alarms tab displays a table filled with the active alarms. This
table has 3 columns:

118

The Level column displays icons reporting alarm severity:

: Warning

: Critical alarm

: Major alarm

: Minor alarm

: Information

The Description column gives an alarm description.

The Start column gives the rising alarm time.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Closed Alarms Tab


Figure 5-32. Alarms panel - Closed alarms tab

The closed alarms tab displays a table filled with past alarms. When an
alarm disappears, it is moved from the Active alarms tab to the Closed
alarms tab. This table has 4 columns:

The Level column displays icons reporting alarm severity:

: Warning

: Critical alarm

: Major alarm

: Minor alarm

: Information

The Description column gives an alarm description.

The Start column gives the rising alarm time.

The End column gives the falling alarm time.

Clear and Save Buttons


These buttons are located at the top right of the Alarm panel.
The Clear button deletes the content of the closed alarms list.
When clicking the Clear button, all the closed alarms are removed
from the Closed alarms view. Only a clear display is applied: other
users will still be able to see them.

The Save button is used to save the alarms (active and closed) into a text
file. When you click the Save button, a dialog box will appear so that you
can choose the file name and directory for log saving. Once saved, the
log file can be opened and read with any word processor application
software.

Resizing the Columns


Each column on the alarm tables can be resized. Move your mouse
cursor between two header columns. The mouse cursor should change
to . Click and drag the column to the desired size, and then release the
mouse button.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

119

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Screen Layout

Sorting Alarms by Level, Extent, Description, Start date or End Date


The Level, Extent, Description, Start date and End date columns can be
sorted. Click the header column once. A white arrow appears in this
header. To change the sorting mode, click the header once more. When
sorted in increasing order, the arrow is displayed. In decreasing order,
the arrow is shown.

120

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Basic Settings
Foreword
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms are modular chassis which
offer 4 slots in the CP6000 Platform and 2 slots in the CP6100 Platform.
Each slot can be fitted with a hot swappable MPEG board or a hot
Modulator board. The MPEG board supports one (Single Channel MPEG
board) or two (Dual Channels MPEG boards) MPEG encoding channels or
one or two MPEG decoding channels.
This section contains a step-by-step procedure explaining how to
configure:

one MPEG encoding channel (to be done twice for a board configured
as a dual encoder)

one MPEG decoding channel (to be done twice for a board configured
as a dual decoder)

one Modulator board

Creating a New Configuration


1. Click New in the Configuration panel toolbar to create a new
configuration.
An empty configuration is added with the name (New configuration):
Figure 5-33. Empty configuration

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

121

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

2. Rename the configuration by clicking the Rename button in the


toolbar.
Figure 5-34. Renaming the configuration

122

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting an MPEG Encoder


The MPEG Encoder board can host:
Dual Channels MPEG board: Two MPEG Encoders. Only one
MPEG Encoder configuration is described in this section. The
procedure is the same for the second one.
Single Channel MPEG board: One MPEG Encoder. It hosts an
Audio connector on its front panel.
This section describes the Dual Channels MPEG board. Regarding
the Single Channel MPEG board, only the differences compared to
the Dual Channels MPEG board are indicated.

Creating the Encoder Branch


1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Encoder
Dual Module (Dual Channels MPEG board) or Add Encoder Single
Module (Single Channel MPEG board).
Figure 5-35. Adding an MPEG Encoder Module

2. Right-click Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command


Add MPEG Encoder Input interface.
Figure 5-36. Adding an MPEG Encoder Input interface

A branch is automatically created. It comprises 2 basic elements Slot x MPEG Encoder, SDI Input: Pair x which represent the first part of the
first MPEG Encoder. They contain default values. The parameters of each
element will be changed in the next steps.
Other elements such as Video Encoder, Audio Encoder, Output
Service, MPEG Transport Stream, TS over IP, TS over ASI will be added
to the branch later on at the Operators request as explained in this
section.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

123

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Figure 5-37. Encoder default branch

Slot x - MPEG Encoder


element

Input interface
element

To delete the branch, right-click first the first element Slot x Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Delete branch.

To declare the second MPEG Encoder of the same board,


right-click first the first element Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select
the shortcut command Add MPEG Encoder input Interface to
create a second branch.

A second branch
is created

124

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Selecting the Slot


1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual-Encoder for editing.
Figure 5-38. Setting the Slot x - Dual-Encoder element

a. Enter the number of the slot the Encoder is plugged to.


b. Enter the Encoder name and select the channel mode.
Refer to section Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box on page 206
for more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

Selecting the Source


1. Double-click the second element SDI Input for editing.
Figure 5-39. Setting the Input interface element

a. Edit the source parameters (Input Pair, Source selector, Input


backup mode).
Refer to section SDI Input Dialog Box on page 207 for more
details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

125

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Creating the Compressed Video Component


1. Right-click the SDI Input: Pair x element then select the shortcut
command Add / Video Encoder to add the compressed video
component.
Figure 5-40. Selecting Add Video Encoder

A Video Encoder element is automatically added.


Figure 5-41. Video Encoder element is displayed

2. Double-click Video Encoder element for editing.


Figure 5-42. Setting the Video Encoder element

a. Select the Standard parameters (Input Standard, No source


mode, ......), the compression standard (Encoding format, Video
profile, End to End Delay, ......), and the video bitrate (Bitrate).
b. Define some advanced video compression parameters (Entropy
coding and P picture period, GOP size when End to End delay is
set to Standard delay, .......).

126

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Refer to section Video Encoder Dialog Box on page 209 for


more details about these parameters.

c. Click the cross


in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

127

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service)


1. Right-click the Video Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / Output Service to add the compressed
video component to a new service.
Figure 5-43. Selecting Insert into new / Output service

The Video Pid 512 and Output Service elements are automatically
added.
Figure 5-44. Video Pid 512 element and Output service element are displayed

To add the compressed video component to an existing service (if


any), select the shortcut command Insert into / (Output service x)
then select the appropriate service.

2. Double-click the Video Pid 512 element for editing.


Figure 5-45. Setting the Video Pid element

a. Set the PID of the video component (Pid).


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

128

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

3. Double-click the Output Service element for editing.


Figure 5-46. Setting the Output service element

a. Enter the service parameters (Service name, Program number)


and the PMT PID (PMT PID).
b. Set the Scrambling (Enabled box and Profile selection).
Refer to section Output Service Dialog Box on page 225 for
more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual Channels


MPEG board
1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / Audio Encoder to add a compressed audio component.
Figure 5-47. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder

An Audio Encoder element is automatically added.


Figure 5-48. Audio Encoder element is displayed

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

129

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Repeat this step as many times as necessary if you want to add more
than one audio encoder (up to 8 audio encoders are allowed per
encoding channel).

Example of 4 Audio Encoders


in a channel

2. Double-click each Audio Encoder element for editing.


Figure 5-49. Setting the Audio Encoder element

a. Select the audio input format (Input Format).


b. Select the audio source(s) (Audio source), the audio
compression standard (Audio Standard), the mono, dual or
surround channels mode (Audio mode), the number of frame

130

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

per PES (Frame per PES), the No source mode, the AAC settings
(AAC Syntax and AAC Encapsulation) if Audio Standard is set to
AAC and the audio delay (Delay).
c. Set the bitrate (Bitrate) after compression.
Refer to section Audio Encoder Dialog Box on page 217 for
more details about these parameters.
d. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
3. Right-click the Audio Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the compressed audio
component to the service previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-50. Selecting Insert into / Output service (x)

The Audio Pid 4112 element is automatically created with a link to the
Output service.
Figure 5-51. Audio Pid element with a link to the Output service element is displayed

4. Double-click the Audio Pid 4112 element for editing.


Figure 5-52. Setting the Audio Pid element

a. Set the PID of the audio component (Pid).


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

131

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Single Channel


MPEG board
Audio extracted from SDI signal
Refer to section Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) - Dual
Channels MPEG board on page 129.

Analog/Digital Audio from Audio connector


1. Right-click the Slot x - Single-Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / Audio Input Interface to add an audio inputs element.
Figure 5-53. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder

An Audio Inputs element is automatically added.


Figure 5-54. Audio Inputs element is displayed

2. Double-click Audio Inputs element for editing.


Figure 5-55. Setting the Audio Inputs element

a. Indicate the type of audio (Digital / Analog) injected on the 4 XLR


connectors (In1 to In4).
Analog Audio: Indicate the Alignment and the Headroom levels.
Digital Audio: Indicate if the Sample Rate Converted is enabled.
Refer to section Audio Inputs Dialog Box on page 215 for more
details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

132

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

3. Right-click the Audio Inputs element then select the shortcut


command Add / Audio Encoder to add a compressed audio
component.
Figure 5-56. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Audio Encoder

An Audio Encoder element is automatically added.


Figure 5-57. Audio Encoder element is displayed

Repeat this step as many times as necessary if you want to add more
than one audio encoder (up to 8 audio encoders are allowed per
encoding channel).

Example of 2 stereo Audio Encoders in an MPEG Encoder.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

133

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

4. Double-click each Audio Encoder element for editing.


Figure 5-58. Setting the Audio Encoder element

a. Select the audio input format (Input Format).


b. Select the audio source(s) (Audio source), the audio
compression standard (Audio Standard), the mono, dual or
surround channels mode (Audio mode), the number of frame
per PES (Frame per PES), the No source mode, the AAC settings
(AAC Syntax and AAC Encapsulation) if Audio Standard is set to
AAC and the audio delay (Delay).
c. Set the bitrate (Bitrate) after compression.
Refer to section Audio Encoder Dialog Box on page 217 for
more details about these parameters.
d. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
5. Right-click the Audio Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the compressed audio
component to the service previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-59. Selecting Insert into / Output service (x)

The Audio Pid 4112 element is automatically created with a link to the
Output service.
134

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Figure 5-60. Audio Pid element with a link to the Output service element is displayed

6. Double-click the Audio Pid 4112 element for editing.


Figure 5-61. Setting the Audio Pid element

a. Set the PID of the audio component (Pid).


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

135

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting the Transport Stream


1. Right-click the Output Service element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream.
Figure 5-62. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream

The Transport Stream element is automatically added.


Figure 5-63. Transport Stream element is displayed

Dual Channels MPEG board:


To add a Service to an existing Transport Stream (if any), select
the shortcut command Insert into / Transport Stream (x) then
select the appropriate Transport Stream.

136

It is possible to build a Multi-Program TS (MPTS) by adding a


service from the other encoder of the same MPEG board.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

2. Double-click the Transport Stream element for editing.


Figure 5-64. Setting the Transport Stream element

a. Check the Activity box to enable the Transport stream.


b. Set its identification (Original Network Id, Transport stream Id).
c. Set the output TS bitrate (Bitrate) or check Automatic TS bitrate
computing.
d. If necessary, load a NIT file.
Refer to section Transport Stream Dialog Box on page 226 for
more details about these parameters.
e. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

137

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Encapsulating TS over ASI


1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS over ASI.
Figure 5-65. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI

TS over ASI element is automatically added.


Figure 5-66. TS over ASI element is displayed

2. Double-click the TS over ASI element for editing.


Figure 5-67. Setting the TS over ASI element

a. Check the Activity box to enable the ASI output.


b. Select the ASI Output connector (Output).
c. Set the size and mode for the TS packets (Packet Size, Packet
Mode).
Refer to section ASI Output Dialog Box on page 228 for more
details about these parameters.
d. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

138

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Encapsulating TS over IP
1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS over IP.
Figure 5-68. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over IP

IP Tx element is automatically added.


Figure 5-69. IP Tx element is displayed

2. Double-click the IP Tx element for editing.


Figure 5-70. Setting the IP Tx element

a. Check the Activity box to enable the IP transmission.


b. Set the Session connection parameters (Tx Encapsulation,
Destination IP address, Destination UDP port and Source UDP
port).
c. Enable or disable the virtual source IP address (Virtual source @
check box) and set its value if enabled (Virtual source IP @ field).
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

139

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

d. Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging check box)


and select the VLAN Id if enabled (VLAN Id field).Set the other IP
parameters (TOS, TTL) and the number of TS packets to
encapsulate in IP datagrams (Nber of TP per IP frame).
e. Enable or disable TS stuffing (Null packet stuffing check box).
f. Set the FEC parameters (FEC Mode).
Caution: Null packet stuffing is required for the CP6000 decoder.
This box must be left checked.

Refer to section IP Tx Dialog Box on page 229 for more details


about these parameters.
g. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

140

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Linking TS to Modulator
1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS to Modulator
Figure 5-71. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to Modulator

The TS to Modulator element is automatically added.


Figure 5-72. TS to Modulator element displayed

2. Double-click the TS to Modulator element for editing.


Figure 5-73. Setting the TS to Modulator element

a. Select the Modulator slot (Slot number).


b. Check Enabled to validate the link between the TS and
Modulator.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

141

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Linking TS to MPTS
1. Right-click the Transport Stream element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS to MPTS
Figure 5-74. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS

The TS to MPTS element is automatically added.


Figure 5-75. TS to MPTS element displayed

2. Double-click the TS to MPTS element for editing. Refer to section


Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards on page 168 for
more details about these parameters.

Setting the Ethernet Interface


1. Right-click the IP Tx element then select the shortcut command Insert
into new / Ethernet output interface.
Figure 5-76. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet output interface

LAN1 element is automatically added.


Figure 5-77. LAN1 element is displayed
Agg x = Lan x of the Manager board

142

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

2. Double-click the LAN1 element for editing.


Figure 5-78. Setting the LAN1 interface element

a. Check the Enable interface box to enable the Ethernet interface.


b. Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2 correspond to
the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the board. Agg 1 and Agg 2
correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the Manager board.
If Agg 1 or Agg 2 is selected, the parameters below are not
displayed. The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set
in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to section Dialog
Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board
(CP6000) on page 253.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing
board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is
exclusive.

c. Set the IP interface parameters (IP address, Netmask, Default


Gateway). This port and the Control & Command port must be
part of different IP subnets, without overlaps.
d. Select the interface speed (1Gbps, 100 Mbps
Autonegotiation) according to your Ethernet infrastructure.

or

e. Select the interface state when disabled (Interface state when


disabled).
f. Select the IGMP protocol (IGMP).
g. Create up to 4 static routes in the Routes text area. Each route is
defined by the following parameters: Destination IP address,
Mask, Next hop, Cost.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

143

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Figure 5-79. Adding static routes

The button removes the route from the table

Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 232 for more


details about these parameters.
h. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

144

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting an MPEG Decoder


The MPEG Decoder board can host:
Dual Channels MPEG board: Two MPEG Decoders. Only one
MPEG Decoder configuration is described in this section. The
procedure is the same for the second one.
Single Channel MPEG board: One MPEG Decoder. It hosts an
Audio connector on its front panel.
This section describes the Dual Channels MPEG board. Regarding
the Single Channel MPEG board, only the differences compared to
the Dual Channels MPEG board are indicated.

Creating the Decoder Branch


1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Decoder
Dual Module (Dual Channels MPEG board) or Add Decoder Single
Module (Single Channel MPEG board).
Figure 5-80. Adding an MPEG Decoder Module

1. Right-click Slot x - Dual-Decoder then select the shortcut command


Add Ethernet Input interface.
Figure 5-81. Adding MPEG Decoder Input interface

A branch is automatically created. It is made of 1 basic element Slot x Dual-Decoder which represents the first part of the MPEG Decoder. It is
allocated default values. The parameters of this element will be changed
in the next steps.
Other elements like ASI Input interface or IP Input Interface, Service
configuration, Output Pair will be added to the branch later on at the
Operators request as explained in this section.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

145

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Figure 5-82. Decoder default branch

Slot x - MPEG Decoder


element

Input interface
element

To delete the branch, right-click first the first element Slot x Dual-Decoder then select the shortcut command Delete branch.

To declare the second MPEG Decoder of the same board,


right-click first the first element Slot x - Dual-Decoder then select
the shortcut command Add Ethernet input Interface to create a
second branch.

A second branch
is created

Selecting the Slot


1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual- Decoder for editing.
Figure 5-83. Setting the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element

a. Enter the number of the slot the Decoder is plugged to.


b. Enter the Decoder name and the channel mode.
Refer to section Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box on page 234
for more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

146

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Selecting the ASI Input Interface


1. Right-click the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / ASI Input Interface if the TS is received on the ASI
interface.
Figure 5-84. Selecting Add / ASI Input Interface

The ASI Input element is automatically added.


Figure 5-85. ASI Input element is displayed

2. Double-click the ASI Input element for editing.


Figure 5-86. Setting the ASI Input element

a. Check the Activity box to enable the ASI Input interface.


b. Select the ASI source connector (Source selector).
Refer to section ASI INPUT Dialog Box on page 235 for more
details about this parameter.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface


1. Right-click the Slot x - Dual- Decoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / Ethernet Input Interface if the TS is received on the
Ethernet interface.
Figure 5-87. Selecting Add / Ethernet Input Interface

The LAN 1 element is automatically added.


ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

147

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Figure 5-88. LAN 1 element is displayed


Agg x = Lan x of the Manager board

2. Double-click the LAN 1 element for editing.


Figure 5-89. Setting the LAN1 element

a. Check the Enable interface box to enable the Ethernet interface.


b. Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2 correspond to
the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the board. Agg 1 and Agg 2
correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the Manager board.
If Agg 1 or Agg 2 is selected, the parametres below are not
displayed. The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set
in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to section Dialog
Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the Manager board
(CP6000) on page 253.
The use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing
board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is
exclusive.

c. Set the IP device parameters (IP address, Netmask, Default


Gateway). This port and the Control & Command port must be
part of different IP subnets, without overlaps.
d. Select the interface speed (1Gbps or 100 Mbps
Autonegotiation) according to your Ethernet infrastructure.

or

e. Select the interface state when disabled (Interface state when


disabled).

148

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

f. Select the IGMP protocol used to join multicast streams (IGMP).


g. Create up to 4 static routes In the Route text area. Each route is
defined by the following parameters: Destination IP address,
Mask, Next hop, Cost.
Figure 5-90. Adding static routes

The button removes the route from the table

Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 235 for more


details about these parameters.
h. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

Selecting the IP Rx Stream


1. Right-click the LAN x element then select the shortcut command Add
/ IP Receive if the TS is received on the Ethernet interface.
Figure 5-91. Selecting Add / IP Receive

The IP Rx element is automatically added.


Figure 5-92. IP Rx Interface element is displayed

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

149

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

2. Double-click the IP Rx element for editing.


Figure 5-93. Setting the IP Rx element

a. Check the Enabled box to enable IP Rx stream reception.


b. Set the name of the IP Rx stream (Name), its destination IP
address and destination UDP port (Multicast address and
Destination UDP port).
c. Set the IP Packet Delay Variation (Network Jitter) of the network
expressed in milliseconds (Max IPDV).
d. Set the IP Rx stream encapsulation (Encapsulation).
e. Enable or disable Forward error Correction (Forward error
Correction check box).
f. Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging check box)
and select the VLAN Identifier if enabled (VLAN Id field).
g. Enable or disable the IP address source selection (Select source
IP address check box) and set the source IP address if IP address
source selection is enabled (Source IP address field).
Refer to section IP Rx Dialog Box on page 236 for more details
about these parameters.
h. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

150

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting the Service Configuration


1. Proceed as follows:
Right-click the IP receive element then select the shortcut command
Add / Service Input if the TS is received on the Ethernet interface,
or
Right-click the ASI port element then select the shortcut command
Add / Service Input if the TS is received on the ASI interface.
Figure 5-94. Selecting Add / Service Input

if the TS is coming from an Ethernet interface

if the TS is coming from the ASI port

The Input Service element is automatically added.


Figure 5-95. Input Service element is displayed

if the TS is coming from an Ethernet interface

if the TS is coming from the ASI port

2. Double-click the Input Service element for editing.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

151

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Figure 5-96. Setting the Input Service element

a. Set the General parameters (Service selection mode). Select the


type of service selection: First Service, By Pid, By Service ID, By
service name.
If Service selection mode = By Service ID: Set the Id of the
service to be decoded (Service ID).
If Service selection mode = By Service Name: Set the name of
the service to be decoded (Service Name).
b. Set the TS redundancy (Enabled box and TS redundancy status).
c. Set the Descrambling (Enabled box and Profile selection).
d. If Service selection mode = By Pid:
- Video: Check the Enable video box to enable video
decoding. Set the video PID (Pid) and the PMT PID (PMT).
Select also the pattern to be displayed when video PID is
absent in the incoming TS (No Video Pid).
- Audio: Up to 8 audio components can be decoded. Add
audio component and check the Enable Audio x box to
enable component processing. Set the audio PID (Pid) and
the format of the audio to decode (Output Format).
- If Service selection mode = By Pid: Add Ancillary/VBI
component and check the Enable Ancillary/VBI box to
enable the component processing. Set the Ancillary/VBI PID
(Pid) and the Transport format (Transport format
(SMPTE 2038, EN 301 775, HD Teletext (OP47) or RDD-11).
e. If Service selection mode differs from By Pid:
- Video: Select the pattern to be displayed when video PID is
absent in the incoming TS (No Video Pid).

152

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

- Audio: Up to 8 audio components can be decoded. Check


the Enable Audio x box to enable component processing.
f. Refer to section Input Service Dialog Box on page 238 for
more details about these parameters.
g. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

To decode a second service from the same ASI input, right-click first
the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command Add /
Service Input to create a second Input Service element.

A second sub-branch is created

Setting the SDI Output Interface


1. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut
command Add / SDI Output Interface.
Figure 5-97. Selecting Add / SDI Output Interface

The SDI Output: Pair x element is automatically added.


Figure 5-98. SDI Output: Pair x element is displayed

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

153

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

2. Double-click the SDI Output: Pair x element for editing.


Figure 5-99. Setting the SDI Output: Pair x element

a. Check the Activity box to enable the SDI Output pair.


b. Select the SDI output pair (Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2) or Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4)).
c. Set the Decoder output: Output Standard, SD Aspect Ratio,
Scaling Mode and Scaling Type.
d. Select the HD ANC or SD ANC and VBI that will be embedded in
the SDI output.
e. Edit the Genlock parameters (Frame Synchronizer).
Refer to section SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box on page 242 for
more details about these parameters.
f. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

Setting the Audio Output Interface (Single Channel MPEG board)


1. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut
command Add / Audio Output Interface.
Figure 5-100. Selecting Add / Audio Output Interface

The Audio Outputs element is automatically added.

154

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Figure 5-101. Audio Outputs element is displayed

2. Double-click the Audio Outputs element for editing.


Figure 5-102. Setting the Audio Outputs element

a. Indicate the type of audio (Digital / Analog) on the 4 XLR


connectors (Out1 to Out4).
Analog Audio: Indicate the number of the processed component
and the output level.
Digital Audio: Indicate the number of the processed component.
Refer to section Audio Outputs Dialog Box on page 245 for
more details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

155

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting a Modulator
Creating the Modulator Branch
1. Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add /
Modulator IF - BAND Module or Add / Modulator L- BAND Module.
Figure 5-103. Adding Modulator

A branch is automatically created. It comprises 4 basic elements Slot x Modulator, TS Selection, Modulation and RF Output. They contain
default values. The parameters of each element will be changed in the
next steps.
Other elements such as ASI Monitoring will be added to the branch later
on at the Operators request as explained in this section.
Figure 5-104. Default L Band or IF Band Modulator branch

Slot x - Modulator
element

156

TS Selection
element

Modulation
element

RF/IF Output
element

To delete the branch, first right-click the first element Slot x Modulator then select the shortcut command Delete branch.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Selecting the Slot


1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Modulator for editing.
Figure 5-105. Setting the Slot x - Modulator element

a. Enter the number of the slot the Modulator is plugged to.


b. Enter the Modulator name.
Refer to section Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box on page 246 for
more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

Selecting the TS Source


1. Double-click the second element TS Selection for editing.
Figure 5-106. Setting the TS Selection element

a. Edit the TS source parameter (Internal, Auto ASI In 1-2, ASI In1,
ASI In2).
Refer to section TS Selection Dialog Box on page 247 for
more details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

157

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Creating ASI Output Monitoring


1. Right-click the TS Selection element then select the shortcut
command Add / ASI Output Monitoring to add the ASI monitoring
component.
Figure 5-107. Selecting ASI Output Monitoring

An ASI Monitoring element is automatically added.


Figure 5-108. ASI Monitoring element displayed

2. Double-click the ASI Monitoring element for editing.


Figure 5-109. Setting the ASI Monitoring element

a. Edit the ASI Monitoring Output parameter (Disable, ASI1, ASI2


Internal, Active Stream).
Refer to section ASI Monitoring Dialog Box on page 247 for
more details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

158

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting Modulation
1. Double-click the Modulation element for editing.
Figure 5-110. Setting the Modulation element
DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X Standard

DVB-S/DSNG Standard

a. Edit the Modulation parameters (General parameters).


Refer to section Modulation Dialog Box on page 248 for more
details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

159

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Setting the RF Output


1. Double-click the RF Output element for editing.
Figure 5-111. Setting the RF Output element

a. Edit the RF parameters (RF Output , Output , Auto RF Power Off


Conditions, ClockSynchro).
Refer to section RF Output Dialog Box on page 250 for more
details about these parameters.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

160

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Basic Settings

Applying or Sending the Configuration to the


Equipment
1. Click Check in the toolbar to find out whether or not the configuration
is coherent.
Figure 5-112. Check report

2. Click Apply to apply the new configuration to the equipment, or Send


to just send it to the equipment without applying it (the new
configuration is automatically checked before being applied or sent).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

161

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings, MPEG Encoder
Creating an Ancillary Component
To create an Ancillary component:
1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / Ancillary Encoder.
Figure 5-113. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Ancillary Encoder

An Ancillary Encoder element is automatically added.


Figure 5-114. Ancillary Encoder element is displayed

2. Double-click the Ancillary Encoder element for editing.


Figure 5-115. Setting the Ancillary Encoder element

a. Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the ANC.


b. Select the Ancillary mode: Transparent or HD Teletext (OP47). If
HD Teletext is selected, set the HD Teletext parameters
(Language, Teletext Type, Magazine number and Page Number).
Refer to section Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box on page 221 for
more details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

162

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

3. Right-click the Ancillary Encoder element then select the shortcut


command Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the
service previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-116. Selecting Insert into / Output service (x)

A link to the Output service is automatically created.


Figure 5-117. Ancillary element with a link to the Output service element is displayed

4. Double-click the Pid 5392 element for editing.


Figure 5-118. Setting the Ancillary Pid element

a. Set the PID of the Ancillary component (Pid).


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

163

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Creating a VBI Component


A VBI component can be created in SD mode only.
To create a VBI component:
1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / VBI Encoder.
Figure 5-119. Selecting the shortcut command Add / VBI Encoder

A VBI Encoder element is automatically added.


Figure 5-120. VBI Encoder element is displayed

2. Double-click the VBI Encoder element for editing.


Figure 5-121. Setting the VBI Encoder element

625 l
525 l

a. Check the Enable box to enable transmission of the selected VBI


lines.
b. Select the VBI selection mode and the lines which can be added
to the VBI component.
Refer to section VBI Encoder Dialog Box on page 223 for more
details about these parameters.
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

164

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

3. Right-click the VBI Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the service
previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-122. Selecting Insert into / (Output Service x)

The VBI Pid element is automatically created with a link to the Output
service.
Figure 5-123. VBI element with a link to the Output Service element is displayed

4. Double-click the Pid element for editing.


Figure 5-124. Setting the VBI Pid element

a. Set the PID of the VBI component (Pid).


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

165

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Creating an SCTE 35 Component


SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 is an optional feature used to translate SCTE-104
messages to SCTE 35 messages.
An SCTE 35 component can be created from an SMPTE 2010 DPI
message (SDI input) or SCTE 104 DPI message (C&C IP input).
To create an SCTE 35 component:
1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / Dpi Encoder.
Figure 5-125. Selecting the shortcut command Add / Dpi Encoder

A Dpi Encoder element is automatically added.


Figure 5-126. Dpi Encoder element displayed

2. Double-click the Dpi Encoder element for editing.


Figure 5-127. Setting the Dpi Encoder element

a. Check the Enable box to enable transmission of the splice


message.
b. Select the Specific Parameters message type (SMPTE 2010 or
SCTE 104 over IP and SCTE 104 IP Port).
c. Check the SCTE35 table repetition box to repeat SCTE 35 table
sending and set the Maximum number of repetition.
d. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
166

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

3. Right-click the Dpi Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert into / Output Service (x) to add the component to the service
previously created for the video component.
Figure 5-128. Selecting Insert into / (Output Service x)

The Dpi Pid element is automatically created with a link to the Output
service.
Figure 5-129. Dpi element with a link to the Output Service element displayed

4. Double-click the Pid element for editing.


Figure 5-130. Setting the Dpi Pid element

a. Set the PID of the Dpi component (Pid).


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

167

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Creating an MPTS across MPEG Encoder Boards


Multiplexing across boards is an optional feature. It allows an MPTS to
be formed from all the components generated on the different Encoder
boards of the device.
One option (1 multiplexer) can be instantiated per MPEG Encoder board.
Multiplexing runs simultaneously with encoders.
To illustrate creation of an MPTS including components encoded on
different Encoder boards, the following example is used: 2 SPTS
encoded in Encoder board slot 1 are multiplexed with 2 SPTS encoded in
Encoder board slot 2. The output multiplexer is located on Encoder board
slot 2.
Figure 5-131. Slot 1 and Slot2 Encoders

1. Right-click the Transport Stream (1) element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS to MPTS.
Figure 5-132. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS

A TS to MPTS element is automatically added.

168

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-133. TS to MPTS element displayed

2. Double-click the TS to MPTS element for editing.


Figure 5-134. Setting the TS to MPTS element

a. Check Enabled to enable connection to slot number x.


b. Set the number of the slot that hosts the output multiplexer (2 in
this example).
c. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
3. Follow the same procedure with the second TS (Transport Stream
(10)).
2 TS to MPTS elements are displayed:
Figure 5-135. TS to MPTS elements

4. Right-click the Slot 2 (xxxx) element then select the shortcut command
Add / MPTS Input Interface.
Figure 5-136. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

169

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

An MPTS Input element is automatically added.


Figure 5-137. MPTS Input element displayed

5. Double-click the MPTS Input element to check the inputs of the


element.
Figure 5-138. MPTS Input element

6. Click the cross


the box.

in the top right corner of the dialog box to close

7. Right-click the MPTS Input element then select the shortcut command
Insert into / Transport Stream (xxx).
Figure 5-139. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into / Transport Stream (xxx)

External SPTS are then multiplexed with internal SPTS and the MPTS is
available on LAN 1.

170

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-140. MPTS Input element displayed

External SPTS

Adding an External Component to a service


To add an external component to a service:
1. Right-click the Slotx - Dual-Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface.
Figure 5-141. Selecting the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface

An ASI Input element is automatically added.


Figure 5-142. ASI Input element displayed

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

171

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

2. Double-click the ASI Input element for editing.


Figure 5-143. Setting the ASI Input element

a. Check Activity to enable the IO5 input


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
3. Right-click the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / External Component. An External component element is
automatically added.
Figure 5-144. Adding an External Component element

4. Double-click the External component element for editing.


Figure 5-145. Setting the External component element

a. Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the component.


b. Set the component parameters:

172

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Parameters
Enable

Check Enable to enable carriage of the component

Input Pid

PID of the external component at the Encoder input


(value from 33 to 8190).

Stream Type

Type of stream: Private packets or Private section.

Descriptors
Descriptor

If necessary, click Add descriptor to add


(descriptor_tag 0x59) and configure the DVB subtitle
component descriptor.
Language: Used to indicate the language of the
subtitling.
Subtitling Type: Used to indicate the type of the
subtitling.
Composition page id: Used to indicate the
composition page id of the DVB teletext.
Ancillary page id: Used to indicate the ancillary page
id of the DVB teletext.

c. Click the cross


in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
5. Right-click the External component element then select the shortcut
command Insert into / Output service (x). A link via a PID element is
automatically added.
Figure 5-146. Adding an External component to a service

6. Double-click the PID element for editing.


Figure 5-147. Setting the External component output PID element

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

173

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

a. Enter the component output PID (value from 33 to 8190).


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

174

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Setting Automatic Encoding configuration


Principle
Automatic Encoding configuration Mode is used to configure an Encoder
according to the detected input video format.
According to the input video format, the Encoder is automatically
reconfigured with a pre-defined configuration defined by the User. A
pre-defined configuration is a partial configuration named "Encoding
Profile".
Automatic Encoding configuration Mode is not applicable for MPTS
configurations.
6 Encoding profiles can be supported (one per video format: 720 x 576 i
@25Hz, 720 x 480 i @29.97Hz, 1920 x 1080 i @25Hz, 1920 x 1080 i
@29.97Hz, 1280 x 720 P @ 50 Hz, 1280 x 720 P @ 59.94Hz).
An Encoding Profile defines the following configurations:

Video Encoder

Audio Encoder(s)

VBI Encoder

Ancillary Encoder

External component(s)

Output Service

Transport Stream

Figure 5-148. Encoding Profile contour

Encoding Profile

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

175

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Setting an Encoding Profile


Creating an Encoding Profile

Creating an Encoding Profiles directory


1. Right-click the Sources element then select the shortcut command
Add / Encoding Profiles to add an Encoding Profiles directory.
Figure 5-149. Selecting Add / Encoding Profiles

The Encoding Profiles directory is automatically added.


Figure 5-150. Encoding Profiles directory is displayed

Creating an Encoding Profile element


1. Right-click the Encoding Profiles directory then select the shortcut
command Add / Encoding Profile to add an Encoding Profile element.
Figure 5-151. Selecting Add / Encoding Profile

An Encoding Profile element is automatically added.


Figure 5-152. Encoding Profile element is displayed

176

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

2. If necessary, right-click the Encoding Profiles directory then select the


shortcut command Add / Encoding Profile to add another Encoding
Profile element. The 2 Encoding Profile elements are displayed.
Figure 5-153. 2 Encoding Profile elements are displayed

3. Double-click the Encoding Profile Element for editing.


Figure 5-154. Setting the Encoding Profile Element

a. Enter the name of the Encoding Profile (HD 1080i for example).
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
Adding Encoders and External component(s) to an Encoding Profile
element
Right-click the Encoding Profile element then select the shortcut
command Add / Video Encoder to add a Video Encoder, Add / Audio
Encoder to add an Audio Encoder, Add / Ancillary Encoder to add an
Ancillary Encoder, Add / VBI Encoder to add a VBI Encoder, Add / External
Component to add an External component or Add / Dpi Encoder to add a
DPI Encoder.
Figure 5-155. Add / Encoders & External component(s)

4. Refer to section Creating the Compressed Video Component on


page 126 to configure the Video Encoder.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

177

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

5. Refer to section Creating the Compressed Audio Component(s) Dual Channels MPEG board on page 129 to configure the Audio
Encoder(s) or section Creating the Compressed Audio
Component(s) - Single Channel MPEG board on page 132 to
configure the Audio Inputs and the Audio Encoder(s).
6. Refer to section Creating an Ancillary Component on page 162 to
configure the Ancillary Encoder.
7. Refer to section Creating a VBI Component on page 164 to
configure the VBI Encoder.
8. Refer to section Creating an SCTE 35 Component on page 166 to
add and configure a DPI Encoder.
9. Refer to section Adding an External Component to a service on
page 171 to add an External component and configure the External
component element.
Figure 5-156. Encoders in an Encoding Profile element

Setting the Service


1. Right-click the Video Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / Output service to add the compressed
video component to a new service.
2. Refer to section Setting the MPEG Program (DVB Service) on
page 128 to configure the service.
3. Right-click the Audio Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert / Output service to add the audio component to the
service.
4. Right-click the Ancillary Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Insert / Output service to add the Ancillary component to
the service.
5. Right-click the VBI Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert / Output service to add the VBI component to the service.

178

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

6. Right-click the Dpi Encoder element then select the shortcut command
Insert / Output service to add the SCTE 35 component to the service.
7. Right-click the External component element then select the shortcut
command Insert / Output service to add the external component to the
service.
Figure 5-157. Encoders, External component and Output service

Setting the Transport Stream


1. Right-click the Output Service element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / MPEG Transport Stream to insert the
service into a Transport Stream.
2. Refer to section Setting the Transport Stream on page 136 to
configure the Transport Stream.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

179

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-158. Encoding Profiles, Example

1 HD 1080i Encoding Profile

2 SD 625 Encoding Profile

Selecting an Encoding Profile in an MPEG Encoder


Encoding Profile selection is automatic and depends on the Video input
format.
For automatic Profile selection to apply, an Encoding Profile selector
must be inserted in the MPEG Encoder branch. The Encoding Profile
selector replaces:

180

Video Encoder

Audio Encoder(s)

VBI Encoder

Ancillary Encoder

DPI Encoder

External component(s)

Output Service

Transport Stream

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Creating the Encoder Branch with a Profile selector

Creating MPEG Encoder


Right-click Sources then select the shortcut command Add Encoder Dual
Module.
Figure 5-159. Adding MPEG Encoder

A branch is automatically created. It comprises the basic element Slot


x - Dual-Encoder.
Selecting the Encoder Slot
1. Double-click the first element Slot x - Dual- Encoder for editing.
Figure 5-160. Setting the Slot - Encoder element

2. Enter the number of the slot the Encoder is plugged to.


3. Enter the Encoder name.
Refer to section Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box on page 206 for
more details about these parameters.
4. Select Broadcast Status = On Air.
5. Click the cross
the new settings.

in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable

Selecting the SDI input interface


Right-click Slot x- Encoder then select the shortcut command Add MPEG
Encoder Input interface.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

181

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-161. Adding SDI Input interface

The SDI Input element is added.


Figure 5-162. SDI Input element

1. Double-click the SDI Input element for editing and source selection.
Figure 5-163. Setting the SDI input interface element

2. To set the SDI Input element, refer to section SDI Input Dialog Box
on page 207.
If necessary, add the ASI input interface used for external component(s)
Right-click Slot x - Dual-Encoder then select the shortcut command Add
MPEG TS ASI Input interface.
Figure 5-164. Adding ASI Input interface

The ASI Input element is added.


Figure 5-165. ASI Input element

1. Double-click the element ASI Input for editing.

182

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-166. Setting the ASI Input element

2. Check the Activity box to enable the IO5 ASI input.


Adding the Encoder Profile selector
1. Right-click the SDI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / Encoder Profile selector to add a Profile selector.
Figure 5-167. Selecting Add / Encoder Profile selector

A Profile selector element is automatically added.


Figure 5-168. Profile selector element is displayed

2. Double-click the Profile selector element to configure Auto


configuration rule(s).
Figure 5-169. Setting the Profile selector element

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

183

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Click to add an Auto configuration rule.


Input standard

Choice of video input standard to associate with the


Profile selected (Profile selection) below.

Profile
selection

Profile to be used if the video at the Encoder input is


equal to Input Standard above.

3. Click the cross


the new settings.

in the top right corner of the dialog box to enable

If necessary, connect the ASI input used for external component(s) to the
Profile selector
1. Right-click the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / Profile selector to connect the ASI element to the Profile
selector.
Figure 5-170. Selecting Add / Profile selector

The ASI Input element is connected to the Profile selector.


Figure 5-171. ASI Input element connected to Profile selector

Add TS over ASI


1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS over ASI.
Figure 5-172. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over ASI

TS over ASI element is automatically added.

184

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-173. TS over ASI element is displayed

2. To set the ASI Output element, refer to section Encapsulating TS


over IP on page 139.
Add TS over IP and set the Ethernet Interface
1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS over IP.
Figure 5-174. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS over IP

The IP Tx element is automatically added.


Figure 5-175. IP Tx element is displayed

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

185

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

2. To set the IP Tx element, refer to section Encapsulating TS over IP


on page 139.
3. Right-click the IP Tx element then select the shortcut command Insert
into new / Ethernet Output Interface.
Figure 5-176. Selecting the shortcut command Insert into new / Ethernet Output Interface

LAN 1 element is automatically added.


Figure 5-177. LAN 1 element is displayed

4. To set the LAN 1 element, refer to section Setting the Ethernet


Interface on page 142.
Add TS to Modulator
1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS to Modulator.
Figure 5-178. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS Modulator

The TS to Modulator element is automatically added.


Figure 5-179. TS to Modulator element displayed

186

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

2. To set the TS to Modulator element, refer to section Linking TS to


Modulator on page 141.
Add TS to MPTS
1. Right-click the Profile selector element then select the shortcut
command Add / TS to MPTS.
Figure 5-180. Selecting the shortcut command Add / TS to MPTS

The TS to MPTS element is automatically added.


Figure 5-181. TS to MPTS element displayed

2. To set the TS to MPTS element, refer to section Linking TS to MPTS


on page 142.
Profile selector branch
Figure 5-182. MPEG Encoder, Profile selector branch

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

187

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Encoding Profiles and Profile selector block diagram


Figure 5-183. Encoding Profiles and Profile selector, MPEG Encoder branch

188

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Advanced settings, MPEG Decoder


Setting TS Redundancy
Principle
If a TS (nominal TS) is missing in an MPEG Decoder, it will be replaced
by another TS (backup TS).
Examples:
Figure 5-184. TS redundancy with one Ethernet input

Figure 5-185. TS redundancy with two Ethernet inputs

Configuration
To create a TS redundancy
1. Set the nominal TS
Creating the branch of the nominal TS:
a. Add and configure the nominal TS Ethernet Input box. Refer to
section Selecting the Ethernet Input Interface on page 147.
b. Add and configure the nominal IP Rx Stream box. Refer to
section Selecting the IP Rx Stream on page 149.
c. Add and configure the nominal Input Service box. Refer to
section Setting the Service Configuration on page 151.
Set the TS redundancy status: Check Enabled and Input
redundancy status on NOMINAL).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

189

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-186. Setting the TS redundancy in the Input service dialog box

d. Click the cross


in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
e. Right-click the Input Service element then select the shortcut
command Insert into new / TS Redundancy on Product
configuration.
Figure 5-187. Selecting Insert into new / TS Redundancy on Product configuration

The TS redundancy element is automatically added.


Figure 5-188. TS redundancy element

The nominal TS branch is created:


Figure 5-189. Nominal TS branch

190

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

2. Set the backup TS


Creating the branch of the backup TS:
a. Add and configure the redundancy IP Rx Stream box. Refer to
section Selecting the IP Rx Stream on page 149.
b. Add and configure the redundancy Input Service box. Refer to
section Setting the Service Configuration on page 151.
Set the TS redundancy status: Check Enabled and Input
redundancy status on BACKUP.
Figure 5-190. Setting the TS redundancy in the Input service dialog box

c. Click the cross


in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
The backup TS branch is created:
Figure 5-191. Backup TS branch

d. Right-click the backup Input Service element then select the


shortcut command Insert into TS Redundancy.
Figure 5-192. Selecting Insert into / TS redundancy

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

191

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

3. Add and configure SDI output interface.


a. Right-click the TS Redundancy element then select the shortcut
command Add / SDI Output Interface.
Figure 5-193. Selecting Add / SDI Output Interface

The SDI Output element is automatically added.


Figure 5-194. SDI Output

b. Configure the SDI Output box. Refer to section Setting the SDI
Output Interface on page 153.
4. Set the TS redundancy mode.
a. Double-click the TS Redundancy element for editing.
Figure 5-195. TS redundancy Dialog Box

b. Set the TS Redundancy parameters.

192

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

General
Input backup
mode

Auto
delay

Selection of the backup mode. Choice between


Force nominal: The selected TS is always the
nominal TS
Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When no
TS Stream is received on the nominal input, an
alarm is raised and the input switches
automatically to the backup input. When the alarm
is inactive on the nominal Input, the system
switches automatically to this nominal input.
Auto Switchback on backup fault: When no TS
stream is received on the nominal input, an alarm
is raised and the input switches automatically to
the backup input. The system stays on the backup
input until a redundant fault occurs.
Force backup: The selected TS is always the
backup TS.

backup

Defines the time to switch from nominal input to


backup input in auto mode when no TS stream alarm
is raised on the nominal input.

Auto nominal
delay

Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from backup


input to nominal input in auto mode when no TS
stream alarm has fallen on the nominal input.

c. Click the cross


in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

IO5 connector can be configured as ASI Output to monitor the MPTS


at the input of the decoder:

1. Right-click the TS Redundancy element then select the shortcut


command Add / TS over ASI. The ASI Output element is
automatically added.

2. Double-click the ASI Output element for editing. Refer to section


ASI Output Dialog Box on page 228.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

193

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Creating ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateways


ASI to IP gateway is an optional feature. It allows an MPEG Transport
stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and a remote
CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported transparently and
bit-accurately.
Two ASI to IP software options must be installed (1 per MPEG Encoder
board and 1 per MPEG Decoder board).
Figure 5-196. ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateway features

IP to ASI Gateway feature

ASI to IP Gateway feature

Setting an ASI to IP Gateway, MPEG Encoder


To create an ASI to IP gateway:
1. Right-click the Slotx - Dual-Encoder element then select the shortcut
command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface.
Figure 5-197. Selecting the shortcut command Add / MPEG TS ASI Input Interface

An ASI Input element is automatically added.


Figure 5-198. ASI Input element displayed

194

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

2. Double-click the ASI Input element for editing.


Figure 5-199. Setting the ASI Input element

a. Check Activity to enable the IO5 input


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
3. Right-click the ASI Input element then select the shortcut command
Add / Gateway. A Gateway element is automatically added.
Figure 5-200. Adding a Gateway element

4. Double-click the Gateway element for editing.


Figure 5-201. Setting the Gateway element

a. Set the Gateway parameters.

Gateway Parameters
IGateway
Name

Enter the name of the gateway

Threshold
Bitrate

Defines the Max bitrate of the TS stream.


Accepted values: from 15 kbit/s to 110000 kbit/s

b. Click the cross


in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

195

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

5. Right-click the Gateway element then select the shortcut command


Add / TS over IP. An IP Tx element is automatically added.
Figure 5-202. Adding an IP Rx element

6. Double-click the IP Tx element for editing.


Figure 5-203. Setting the IP Tx element

a. Set the IP Tx parameters. Refer to section IP Tx Dialog Box on


page 229
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
7. Right-click the IP Tx element then select the shortcut command Insert
into new / Ethernet Output Interface. A LAN x element is automatically
added.
Figure 5-204. Adding a LAN x element

196

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

8. Double-click the LAN x element for editing.


Figure 5-205. Setting the LAN x element

a. Set the LAN x parameters. Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box


on page 232.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
The ASI to IP gateway is created:
Figure 5-206. ASI to IP Gateway

Setting an IP to ASI Gateway, MPEG Decoder


To create an IP to ASI gateway:
1. Right-click the LAN x element then select the shortcut command Add
/ IP Receive. An IP Rx element is automatically added.
Figure 5-207. Adding an IP Rx element

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

197

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

2. Double-click the IP Rx element for editing.


Figure 5-208. Setting the IP Rx element

a. Set the IP Rx parameters. Refer to section IP Rx Dialog Box on


page 236.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
3. Right-click the IP Rx element then select the shortcut command Add /
Gateway Dec. A Gateway Dec element is automatically added.
Figure 5-209. Adding a Gateway Dec element

4. Double-click the Gateway Dec element for editing.


Figure 5-210. Setting the Gateway Dec element

a. Enter the Gateway Name.


b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.

198

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

5. Right-click the Gateway Dec element then select the shortcut


command Add / TS over ASI. An ASI Output element is automatically
added.
Figure 5-211. Adding an ASI Output element

6. Double-click the ASI Output element for editing.


Figure 5-212. Setting the ASI Output element

a. Set the ASI Output parameters. Refer to section ASI Output


Dialog Box on page 228. The IO5 Output cannot be modified.
b. Click the cross
in the top right corner of the dialog box to
enable the new settings.
The IP to ASI gateway is created:
Figure 5-213. IP to ASI Gateway

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

199

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Setting Scrambling / Descrambling


The settings described are shared by the MPEG Encoder and MPEG
Decoder boards. They allow to define profiles which will be used to
scramble or descramble services.
To display the Scrambling configuration box, click
configuration panel:

on the

Figure 5-214. Access to scrambling box, configuration panel

Scrambling

The Scrambling box is displayed.


Figure 5-215. Scrambling box

Click Scrambling groups to display the scrambling profile(s).


Figure 5-216. Profile(s), Scrambling box

To add a new profile right-click Scrambling groups and select


Add / Scrambling group. A profile is automatically added.
Figure 5-217. Add a Scrambling profile

Click on a profile to edit it.


200

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Figure 5-218. Edit a Scrambling profile

Parameters
Activity

If checked, enables the Scrambling profile.

Name

Name of the scrambling profile.


This name is used to select the Scrambling profile in
the Encoder Output Service and Decoder Input
Service dialog boxes.

Fixed Key Parameters


Mode

Scrambling / Descrambling mode. Choice between:


BISS 1: Scrambling / Descrambling are performed
with a fixed Session Word (SW).
BISS E BURIED: Scrambling / Descrambling are
performed with an Encrypted Session Word (ESW)
and an internal Encoder / Decoder id named buried
id. This id is identical for all the MPEG boards. The
BISS E BURIED mode of encryption decryption must
be used only between CP6000.
BISS E INJECTED: Scrambling / Descrambling are
performed with an Encrypted Session Word (ESW)
and an Injected id.

Session Word
(SW)

In BISS 1 mode, Session Word value (6 bytes).

Encrypted
Session Word
(ESW)

In BISS E BURIED and BISS E INJECTED modes,


Encrypted Session Word value (8 bytes).

Injected id

In BISS E INJECTED mode, Injected id value (7 bytes).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

201

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Setting Automation
Principle
Instead of applying manually your configurations, you can choose to
activate the Schedule mode so that your configurations are applied
according to a schedule you will define.
The automation system moves from one configuration to another
according to the schedule you created.
Prerequisite: you must create your configurations in the GUI previously
to the schedule.
Figure 5-219. Automation tab overview

Display the automation panel

Apply the automation

Edit / Unedit the automation

To schedule your configurations:


1. Define a default configuration that will be the first configuration to be
activated. It is also the one that will be used when no other can be
activated.
2. Create a list of configurations and define to which conditions these
configurations can be activated.
These conditions are time conditions only. Thus a configuration can start
either:

at a precise date and time, e.g. on May, 27th, 2012 at 3:00,

every day at a precise time, e.g. every day at 9:00,

on a given day of the week at a precise time, e.g. every Tuesday at


noon (12:00),

on a given day of the month at a precise time, e.g. every first day of
the month at midnight (0:00).

A configuration can also be scheduled for a given duration or to last until


another configuration in the list is due to start (no duration).

202

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

3. Create the schedule.


Once the schedule is applied, the automation system continuously
checks your list of configurations. As soon as it finds one that meets the
schedule parameters, even if the current one has not ended, it activates
it. If it does not and all time-limited scheduled configurations have ended,
it activates the default configuration.

Creating a Schedule
1. Go to the Automation tab.
2. Click the Edit button in the toolbar to enable automation editing.
3. Select Schedule from the Select automation drop-down list.
Figure 5-220. Selecting the Schedule mode

When Schedule type is selected,

configurations will be activated using a schedule

basic tools are available in the toolbar for schedule editing.

Figure 5-221. Basic tools

For a description of these tools, refer to section Automation Tab on


page 113.
4. In the Default configuration drop-down list, select the configuration
that will be applied by default, i.e. when no configuration of the list is
due to be applied.
5. To create the first configuration of your schedule, click the Insert after
the current selection button
.
6. Where applicable, replace the stars (*) by appropriate values
according to the schedule you want to create. Different criteria are
available for the scheduled configuration:

Day of the week

Day

Month

Year

Hour

Minute

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

203

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Two types of events can be selected:

Event without duration. The scheduled configuration is applied


at the date specified and until another scheduled configuration
is applied.

Event with duration: the scheduled configuration is applied for a


certain period of time.

When more than one configuration is to be activated at the same


time, the higher configuration in the schedule table will be
applied.
When no configuration is to be activated, the default
configuration is applied.

7. Press ENTER to validate your value or simply click another field.


8. Once all the scheduled configurations are ready, you can send the
schedule to the equipment.
a. Click the Send button in the toolbar.
b. Answer Yes when you are asked for confirmation.
Figure 5-222. Confirmation request

If Schedule was selected as the automation type during the editing


process, a green clock is visible in the tab header as soon as the
automation is running.

It is therefore no longer possible to apply a configuration manually (the


Apply button is not available in the configuration toolbar for any
configuration). If you want to apply a configuration manually, you must
select No automation from the Select automation drop-down list and
re-send the configuration to the equipment.

204

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Advanced Settings

Schedule Example
Let us take an example. Suppose today is Tuesday, and it is midnight.
Our default configuration is named Default.
We have also created four configurations: Conf1, Conf2, Conf3 and
Conf4.
We want to apply these configurations as follows:

Conf1 should be applied every day at 9:00 during 2 hours.

Conf2 should be applied every day at 12:00 during 3 hours.

Conf3 should be applied every Wednesday at 13:30.

Conf4 should be applied every day at 21:00 during 1:30.

The schedule corresponding to this example is shown in Figure 5-223


below.
Figure 5-223. Schedule example

The obtained follow-up of configurations will be as represented in


Figure 5-224 below:
Figure 5-224. Schedule example

Note that Conf2 is supposed to be applied for 2 hours, but on


Wednesday, as Conf3 is due to start at 13:30, Conf2 is stopped and
Conf3 is applied.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

205

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

GUI Description
This chapter gives the details of the interface dialog boxes.

Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Encoder


Figure 5-225. Encoder configuration

SDI Input
Interface box

Video Encoder
box
Video Pid
box

Output
Service x box

Slot x - DualEncoder box


Audio Pid
box

Transport
Stream x box

ASI Output
box

Ancillary
Pid box

LAN x
box
IP Encapsulation
box
Audio Encoder
box
Ancillary
Encoder box

Slot x - Dual-Encoder Dialog Box


Figure 5-226. Dual-Encoder Dialog Box

Board Parameters

206

Slot Number

Number of the slot the board is plugged to.

Name

Name of the slot.

Channel Mode

Not use in this release. This parameter must be set to


Dual.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

SDI Input Dialog Box


Figure 5-227. SDI Input: Pair x Dialog Box

Input Interface
Input pair

Choice of the SDI input pair between:


Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2)
Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) (Dual Channels MPEG board
only)
Pair 1 and Pair 2 stand for channel 1 and channel 2
respectively.

Source selector

Select the SDI source (IO1, IO2, IO3, IO4) or a test


pattern (Bar pattern, Black pattern, Moving
pattern).
IO3, IO4 are not displayed on a Single Channel MPEG
board.
IO2 and IO4 can also be configured as ASI
outputs.

Input
mode

backup

Choice of the SDI input in backup mode


Off: SDI input is the SDI input selected above
Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When the
signal loss alarm is raised, the SDI input switches
automatically to the backup SDI input. When the
signal loss alarm is inactive on Nominal Input,
the SDI input automatically switches to this input.
Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When the
signal loss alarm is raised, the SDI input switches
automatically to the backup SDI input. The SDI
input stays on the backup SDI input until a
redundant fault occurs.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Pair 1: The backup mode cannot be used if


IO2 is configured as ASI output.
Pair 2 (Dual Channels MPEG board only):
The backup mode cannot be used if IO4 is
configured as ASI output.

207

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

208

Auto
delay

backup

Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from


nominal input to backup input in auto switch mode
when the signal loss alarm is raised on the nominal
input.

Auto
delay

nominal

Defines the time (in seconds) to switch from backup


input to nominal input in auto switch mode when
the signal loss alarm has fallen on the nominal
input.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Video Encoder Dialog Box


Figure 5-228. Video Encoder Dialog Box

Standard Parameters
No
Source
Mode

Input
Standard

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Choice between:
Bar Pattern
Black Pattern
Moving Pattern
Stop Video: Video component bitrate is null,
signaling and all other components are present.
Disable Service: Service bitrate is null, there is no
signaling and the TS bitrate for this service is null.
Default selection: Bar Pattern
Choice between:
720 x 576 I @ 25 Hz
720 x 480 I @ 29.97 Hz
1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz
1920 x 1080 I @ 29.97 Hz
1920 x 1080 I @ 30 Hz
1280 x 720 p @ 50 Hz
1280 x 720 p @ 59,94 Hz
1280 x 720 p @ 60 Hz
Default selection: 1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz

209

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Picture
Resolution

Picture
Format

Used to set the Horizontal Picture Rescaling feature.


This feature is used to manage very low encoded
rates. Choice between:
Input Standard

Horizontal Resolutions

1920 x 1080i

1920, 1440, 1280, 960

1280 x 720p

1280, 960, 640

720 x 576i

720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352

720 x 480i

720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352

In SD Input Standard, selection of the format of the


picture. Choice between:

Aspect
Ratio (4:3,
16/9)a

Active Format Description


informationb:
- Active format AFD
(Letter box...) and
- Aspect ratio (AR)

4/3

4:3

None

16/9

16:9

None

4:3 Auto
SMPTE2016

4:3

From incoming ancillary


AFD (SMPTE 2016-3)

16:9 Auto
SMPTE2016

16:9

From incoming ancillary


AFD (SMPTE 2016-3)

4:3 Auto
Video Index

4:3

From incoming Video


Index (SMPTE RP186)

16:9 Auto
Video Index

16:9

From incoming Video


Index (SMPTE RP186)

4:3 Auto UK
Video Index

4:3

From incoming specific


UK Video Index

16:9 Auto UK
Video Index

16:9

From incoming specific


UK Video Index

a
Aspect Ratio is transported in Sequence Header in MPEG-2 standard
or in SPS (Sequence Parameter Set) in VUI parameter (Video Usability
Information) in MPEG-4 standard.
b Active Format Description information are transported in USER
DATA in MPEG-2 standard or in SEI messages (Supplemental
Enhancement Information) in MPEG-4 standard.

WSS Blanking

210

If On, the WSS (1/2 line 23) signal is blanked.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Encoding
format

Choice between:
H-264 (MPEG-4)
MPEG-2
Default selection: H-264 (MPEG-4)

Chroma
Format

Choice between:
MPEG-2 Encoding format
4:2:0 / 8 bits
4:2:2 / 8 bits
H-264 (MPEG-4) Encoding format
4:2:0 / 8 bits
4:2:0 / 10 bits
4:2:2 / 8 bits
4:2:2 / 10 bits
Refer to Appendix A Video Profiles & Bitrates
recommendations on page 403.

Profile

Selection of the video profile.


The Choice depends on the Encoding Format:

High
(HP)

4:2:2
(422P)

MPEG-2 encoding format, Video Profiles


Main
(MP)

Type of frames

I, P, B

I, P, B

I, P, B

Chroma
sampling

4:2:0

4:2:0
4:2:2

4:2:0
4:2:2

Main
(MP)

High
(HiP)

High 10
(Hi10P)

High 4:2:2
(Hi422P)

MPEG-4 (H264) encoding format, Video Profiles


Constrained
Baseline (CBP)a

Type of
frames

I, P

I, P, B

I, P, B

I, P, B

I, P, B

Entropy
coding

CAVLC

CAVLC CAVLC CAVLC CAVLC


CABAC CABAC CABAC CABAC

Chroma
sampling

4:2:0

4:2:0

4:2:0

4:2:0

4:2:2

Pixel
resolution

8 bits

8 bits

8 bits

10 bits

8 bits
10 bits

a Only

on progressive video.

Note: An Automatic mode can be selected. In this


mode the Profile is automatically determined.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

211

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

212

End to End
delay

Choice between:
Low delay
Standard delay
End to End delay does not take care of the delay
added by activation of the Frame Synchronizer and
additional latency due to IPDV but includes the delay
of other modules such as the Multiplexer, Line
rephaser, etc.
End to End delay = 270 ms in Low Delay
End to End delay = 770 ms in Standard Delay
Default selection: Low delay

Bitrate

Video bitrate adjustment.


Refer to section Video Profiles & Bitrates
recommendations on page 403.
If the Video bitrate automatic computing box is
checked the Bitrate parameter is not displayed and
the necessary video bitrate is automatically
determined.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Advanced Parameters
Entropy
coding

Choice between:
CABAC
CAVLC
This parameter is relevant for H-264 only.

Picture
structure

Structure of the picture to be encoded.


Choice between:
Field
Frame
MBAFF (MacroBlock Adaptive Frame Field coding)
This parameter is relevant for Encoding format =
H-264 and End to End delay = Standard only.

P picture
Period (M)

Choice between:
I only: Only I pictures
IP: 1 P picture between 2I pictures
IBP: 1 B picture (not available in Low Delay mode).
IBBP: 2 B pictures (not available in Low Delay
mode).
IBBBP: 3 B pictures (available in Standard Delay
mode and H-264 (MPEG-4) encoding format and
50/59.94/60 Hz input standard).
Automatic
where I stands for Intra-coded picture, P for
Predictive-coded picture, B for BiPredictive-coded
picture.

GOP Size (N)

Accepted values: from 1 to 300.


If the Automatic GOP size box is checked the parameter
is not displayed and the GOP size is automatically
determined. Refer to P Picture Period parameter below.

Picture
Filtering

The Picture Filtering feature is used to manage very


low encoding rates. It consists of decreasing picture
complexity by activating a filter to reduce the high
frequency spatial texture. Choice between:
None: Filtering is disabled
Weak: Filtering is weak
Strong: Filtering is strong

Closed GOP

If this box is checked closed GOP mode is activated.


Closed GOP mode is used to break temporal
dependency between GOPs.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

213

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

214

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Audio Inputs Dialog Box


Figure 5-229. Audio Inputs Dialog Box

If a Single Channel MPEG board is used as Encoder, this box is used to


indicate the type of audio type injected on the XLR connectors of the
breakout cable. Refer to section Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.
Click
to add an Analog stereo audio input. Up to 2 analog
stereo inputs can be created.
Click
be created.
Click

to add an AES audio input. Up to 4 AES inputs can

to delete an audio input.

Analog Audio Parameters


XLR Input

Indicate the XLR used for the analog audio. Choice


between:
In1(L1)/In2(R1): XLR In1 is used to the left channel
and XLR In2 is used to the right channel of the 1st
stereo.
In3(L2)/In4(R2): XLR In3 is used to the left channel
and XLR In4 is used to the right channel of the 2nd
stereo.

Alignment

Level in dBu which corresponds to 0 VU.


Accepted values: between -6 dBu and +6 dBu in 1 dBu
steps.

Headroom

Difference in dB between Alignment level (Alignment


parameter below) and input saturation.
Accepted values: between +6 dB and +30 dB in 1 dB
steps.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

215

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Digital Audio Parameters

216

XLR Input

Indicate the XLR used for the digital audio. Choice


between:
st
In1(AES1): XLR In1 is used to the 1 stereo.
nd stereo.
In2(AES2): XLR In2 is used to the 2
rd stereo.
In3(AES3): XLR In3 is used to the 3
th stereo.
In4(AES4): XLR In4 is used to the 4

Sample Rate
Conv.

If checked, the audio Sample Rate Converter of the


AES input is enabled.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Audio Encoder Dialog Box


Figure 5-230. Audio Encoder Dialog Box
Audio Mode = Stereo / Dual Channels

Audio Mode = 5.1 Surround


(SDI / Digital sources only)

Input Format =
PCM
(Analog / Digital /
SDI sources)

Input Format = Precompressed


(SDI / Digital sources only)

Audio Mode= Stereo

Audio Mode = 5.1 Surround

Input Format =
Automatic
(SDI / Digital sources
only)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

217

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Input
Input Format

Choice between:
Audio PCM
Precompressed (SDI / Digital sources only)
Automatic (SDI / Digital sources only)
If Input Format is set to Automatic, then the audio
encoder detects the audio input format (PCM or
precompressed). The Operator sets one audio
configuration for PCM audio and another audio
configuration for precompressed audio.
When PCM audio is detected the PCM audio
encoding parameters are applied to encode the
audio.
When a precompressed audio is detected the
Pass-thru
standard
and
signaling
mode
parameters are used.

Source(s)
Audio source

218

SDI / Digital source(s)


The Audio Source(s) depend on the input format.
If Input Format is set to Audio PCM and
- Audio mode = Stereo or Dual Channels then
one Audio Source must be selected (L/R).
- Audio mode = 5.1 Surround then three Audio
Sources must be selected (L/R, C/LFE,
LS/RS).
If Input Format is set to Precompressed then
one Audio Source must be selected.
If Input Format is set to Automatic then one or
three Audio Sources must be selected.
SDI sources, choice between:
Stereo 1 (Grp 1/Ch 1-2)
Stereo 2 (Grp 1/Ch 3-4)
Stereo 3 (Grp 2/Ch 1-2)
Stereo 4 (Grp 2/Ch 3-4)
Stereo 5 (Grp 3/Ch 1-2)
Stereo 6 (Grp 3/Ch 3-4)
Stereo 7 (Grp 4/Ch 1-2)
Stereo 8 (Grp 4/Ch 3-4)
Digital sources, choice between:
Digital 1 (In1(AES1))
Digital 2 (In2(AES2))
Digital 3 (In3(AES3))
Digital 4 (In4(AES4))
Analog source(s)
Choice between:
Analog 1 (In1(L1)-In2(R1))
Analog 2 (In3(L2)-In4(R2))

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Precompressed signaling
This parameter is displayed if Input Format is set to Precompressed.
Signaling
Mode

Encoding mode of the Precompressed audio.


Choice between Stereo or 5.1 Surround

Output
Audio
Standard

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Audio encoding standard.


SDI / Digital source(s)
If Input format is set to PCM or Automatic,
choice between:
- MPEG-1 Layer II
- Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M)
- AAV-LC
- AAC-HE
- AAC-HE v2.0
- Dolby Digital (AC3)
If Input format is set to Precompressed, choice
between:
- MPEG-1 Layer II Pass-Thru
- Dolby E Pass-Thru
- AAV-LC Pass-Thru
- AAC-HE Pass-Thru
- AAC-HE v2.0 Pass-Thru
- Dolby Digital (AC3) Pass-Thru
Analog source(s)
Choice between:
- MPEG-1 Layer II
- Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M)
- AAV-LC
- AAC-HE
- AAC-HE v2.0
- Dolby Digital (AC3)

219

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Audio Mode

Choice between:
MPEG-1 Layer II standard:
Stereo
Dual channels
Mono Left
Mono Right
AAV-LC, AAC-HE or AAC-HE v2.0 standard:
Stereo
Dual channels
5.1 Surround (SDI / Digital sources only)
AAC-HE v2.0 standard:
Stereo
Dolby Digital (AC3) standard:
Stereo
5.1 Surround (SDI / Digital sources only)
Audio mode is not accessible if Uncompressed
Audio Standard (SMPTE 302M) is selected or if Input
format is set to Precompressed.

Frame per PES

Choice between:
One audio frame: One audio frame is transported
in a TS packet.
Multi Audio Frame: Multiple audio frames are
transported in a TS packet. This mode allows to
reduce the audio PES bitrate overhead.
Frame per PES is only accessible in Standard Delay
video encoding mode.

220

Bitrate

Accepted values:
MPEG-1 Layer II standard (stereo or mono): 64 to
384 kbit/s
AAC-LC standard:
Stereo: 32 to 384 kbit/s
5.1 Surround: 96 to 640 kbit/s
AAC-HE standard:
Stereo: 32 to 192 kbit/s
5.1 Surround: 96 to 640 kbit/s (SDI / Digital sources
only)
AAC-HE v2.0 standard (stereo): 32 to 96 kbit/s
Dolby Digital (AC3) standard:
Stereo: 96 to 640 kbit/s
5.1 Surround: 224 to 640 kbit/s (SDI / Digital
sources only)
Audio Bitrate is not accessible when Uncompressed
Audio Standard (SMPTE 302M) is selected.

No
Source
Mode

Choice between:
Sine Tone (400 Hz)
Sine Tone (1000 Hz)
Silence
No source mode is activated when there is no audio
at the audio encoder input.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

AAC Syntax

AAC
Encapsulation

Delay

Choice between:
AAC-LC Audio Standard: MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 AAC
Syntax can be selected.
AAC-HE v2.0 Audio Standard: AAC Syntax is set to
MPEG-4.
AAC-HE Audio Standard: AAC Syntax is set to
MPEG-2.
Choice between:
ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream)
LOAS (Low Overhead Audio Stream) if the Syntax
is set to MPEG-4.

Audio delay. The value must be set between -100 to


400 ms.

Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box


Figure 5-231. Ancillary Encoder Dialog Box

HD or SD formats

HD format

Ancillary Parameters
Enable

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Check the Enable box to enable carriage of the ANC.

221

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Ancillary
mode

222

Choice between:
SD format
Transparent (SMPTE 2038): ANC are carried
according SMPTE 2038.
HD format
Transparent
(RDD-11): ANC are carried
according RDD-11.
Transparent (SMPTE 2038): ANC are carried
according SMPTE 2038.
HD
Teletext (OP47): The OP-47 Subtitling
Distribution Packet (SDP) data is carried in a
dedicated PID via EN 301775 using a user
defined data unit ID.
OP47 and RDD-11 and SMPTE 2038 mode are
exclusive.

Language

Set the Language field of the PMT teletext descriptor.


The language can also be indicated in the ISO 639
3-letter codes field if Other is selected.

Teletext Type

Set the Teletext type field of the PMT teletext


descriptor. The type of teletext can also be indicated
in the User Teletext type field if Other is selected.

Magazine
number

Set the Magazine number field of the PMT teletext


descriptor. The value must be between 0 and 7.

Page Number
(hex value)

Set the Page number field of the PMT teletext


descriptor. The value must be between 0 and FF.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

VBI Encoder Dialog Box


Figure 5-232. VBI Encoder Dialog Box

625 l

525 l

Parameters
Enable

If checked, the selected VBI lines are carried in the VBI


component.

VBI selection
mode

Choice between:
Full Transparent: The VBI lines selected below are
carried whatever their type.
Normal: The types of VBI lines to carry are selected
below.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

223

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Even lines
6 to 23 (625 l)
10 to 25 (525 l)

Full Transparent VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI


lines to carry in the VBI component (according to
EN 301 775 standard using a user defined data unit
ID).
Normal VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI types to
carry in the VBI component:
- TXTB: Teletext Magazine
- STIB: Teletext Subtitle
- AUTO: Teletext Automatic
- MT: Monochrome Transparent
- VPS: Video Programing System
- WSS: Widescreen signaling
Choice between AUTO, TXTB (Teletext Magazine
Ceefax B), STIB (Teletext Subtitles only), VPS (Video
Program System data), WSS (Widescreen signaling
data) and MT (Monochrome Transparent).
The AUTO / TXTB / STIB types deliver the same
Teletext Ceefax B processing but use VBI stream
headers (Data Unit Id) to describe whether the
Teletext line is used to send a magazine page or a
subtitle page. TXTB imposes the "magazine header",
STIB imposes the "subtitle header" and AUTO selects
the appropriate header according to the control bit
(C6) of the Teletext subtitle sent in the first line of each
Teletext page. This header is used by some decoders
to easily find subtitle pages in the VBI stream and
display them.
During operation, there are two possible cases:
Either the Operator does not know the type of
Teletext lines transported (magazine and/or
subtitles). In this case, AUTO should be chosen and
it is the encoder which determines the appropriate
header.
Or the Operator knows the specific lines assigned
and chooses between magazine (TXTB) and
subtitle (STIB).

Odd lines
319 to 335
(625 l)
273 to 284
(525 l)

224

Full Transparent VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI


lines to carry in the VBI component (according to
EN 301 775 standard using a user defined data unit
ID).
Normal VBI selection mode: Selection of VBI types to
carry in the VBI component.
Refer to the Even lines parameter above.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Output Service Dialog Box


Figure 5-233. Output Service Dialog Box

Service Parameters
Service Name

Indicates the name of the service which will be


displayed on the Web Pages.
This field must be set to enable the configuration.
Accepted values: User Defined. E.g.: Video 1
Max 32 characters (blank and specific characters are
allowed).

Program
Number

Accepted values: from 1 to 65535


Default value: 1

PMT PID

Accepted values: from 32 to 8190


Default value: 256

Scrambling
Click the
parameters.
Enabled

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

icon to add a scrambling mode then edit its


If checked scrambling is enabled. All the components
of the service are scrambled.

225

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Profile
selection

Scrambling profile selection. The profiles are defined


in the Scrambling page. To display this page click
Scrambling on the Configuration toolbar:

Setting
Refer
to
section
Scrambling / Descrambling on page 200 for more
details about these parameters.

Transport Stream Dialog Box


Figure 5-234. Transport Stream Dialog Box

Transport Stream Parameters

226

Activity

Choice between
(unchecked).

Enable

(checked)

or

Disable

Original
Network Id

Identifies DVB network (inserted in the NIT table).


Accepted values: from 0 to 65535
Default value: 1

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Transport
Stream Id

Uniquely identifies the outgoing stream (inserted in


the signaling tables).
Accepted values: from 0 to 65535
Default value: 1

Bitrate

TS bitrate. TS bitrate must never be lower than the


sum of the component bitrates.
If the Automatic TS bitrate computing box is checked,
Bitrate is not displayed and TS bitrate computing is
displayed.

TS
bitrate
computing

Selects the computer of the TS bitrate. Choice


between:
Auto from encoder: The setting of the encoders
connected to the TS determine the TS bitrate.
Auto
from modulator: The setting of the
modulator connected to the TS determines the TS
bitrate.

NIT actual Parameters


NIT Actual

If checked, insert the NIT table in the TS stream. This


feature is mainly used with a modulator.

Load NIT file

Load a NIT file. To load a NIT file:


1. Click Load NIT file.
The following screen is displayed:

2. Indicate the path of the file in the Look In box.


3. Select the NIT file Name.
4. Click Open. The file is loaded and displayed in the
NIT Actual box.
The NIT table can be edited via the SigEditor
tool delivered in the CD-ROM with the product.
Refer to section SigEditor Tool on page 300.

Clean NIT

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Clean the NIT.

227

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

ASI Output Dialog Box


Figure 5-235. ASI Output Dialog Box

ASI output
Activity

Choice between Enable (checked) or Disable


(unchecked).

Output

Selection of the ASI output connector. Choice


between IO5, IO2 and IO4.
Default selection: IO5

TS packet size

Choice between:
188 bytes
188 + 16 bytes
Default selection: 188 bytes

Packet mode

Choice between:
Data Packet
Burst
Default selection: Data packet

228

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

IP Tx Dialog Box
Figure 5-236. IP Tx Dialog Box
RTP/UDP/IP TX Encapsulation

Zixi/UDP/IP TX Encapsulation

Session Connection Parameters


Activity

Choice between
(unchecked).

Enable

(checked)

or

Disable

TX
Encapsulation

Select the IP TX encapsulation.


Choice between MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP, MPEG/UDP/IP and
MPEG/Zixi/UDP/IP encapsulation.

Destination IP
address

The Unicast and Multicast IP range are all IP address


values except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.

Destination
UDP port

Accepted values: from 1500 to 65535


Default value: 5000

Zixi Parameters
This box is displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
Stream Id

Name of the stream. It must exactly match the stream


name defined at the Broadcaster.

Latency

End to end latency of the link.


Accepted values: from 300 to 4000 ms.

Fec overhead

Max FEC overhead.


Accepted values: from 0 to 30%.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

229

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

FEC
block
Duration

FEC block duration.


Accepted values: from 0 to 200 ms.

Session Adaptation Parameters


This box is displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP
FEC Mode

Choice between
None: FEC is disabled
Basic: FEC protection level is set below
Expert: FEC protection L & D are set below

FEC protection

Select the FEC protection level in FEC Basic mode.


Choice between
Low: FEC corrects 5 consecutive IP frames
Medium: FEC corrects 10 consecutive IP frames
High: FEC corrects 20 consecutive IP frames

L- Column
burst length
recovery

Select the FEC L Column burst length recovery


number in FEC Expert mode.
Choice from 4 to 20
Default value: 20

D - Column
depth

Select the FEC D Column depth number in FEC Expert


mode.
Choice from 4 to 20
Default value: 4

Session Advanced Parameters


This box is not displayed if TX Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP

230

VLAN tagging
and VLAN Id

Enable or disable the VLAN tagging (VLAN tagging


check box) and select the VLAN Id (VLAN Id field).

Virtual Source
@ and Virtual
Source IP @

IP masquerading used to replace the IP address of the


Ethernet interface in the IP datagrams (may be
required in some redundancy schemes).

Source UDP
port

Accepted values: from 1500 to 65535


Default value: 5000

Number of TP
per IP frame

This parameter sets the number of MPEG packets


conveyed per IP frame.
Accepted values: from 1 to 7
Default value: 7

Null
Packet
stuffing

Choice On/Off
Caution: Null packet stuffing is required for the
CP6000 / CP6100 decoder. This box must be left
checked.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

TOS
(hexadecimal
value)

DiffServ values in hexadecimal value.


Accepted values:
Best Effort (BE): 0x00,
AF11: 0x28,
AF12: 0x30,
AF13: 0x38,
AF21: 0x48,
AF22: 0x50,
AF23: 0x58,
AF31: 0x68,
AF32: 0x70,
AF33: 0x78,
AF41: 0x88,
AF42: 0x90,
AF43: 0x98,
Expedited Forwarding (EF): 0xB8
Default value: 0x00.

TTL

This parameter sets the data stream TTL (Time To


Live), expressed as a number of hops. Each time the
IP packet goes through a router, the TTL value is
decreased by one unit. When the TTL reaches zero the
packet is discarded.
Accepted values: 1 to 255
Default value: 32.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

231

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

LAN x Dialog Box


Figure 5-237. LAN x Dialog Box

Ethernet Interface

232

Enable
interface

Choice between
(unchecked).

Enable

(checked)

or

Disable

Port Number

Select the Ethernet port (Port Number). 1 and 2


correspond to the LAN 1 and LAN 2 ports of the
board. Agg 1 and Agg 2 correspond to the LAN 1 and
LAN 2 ports of the Manager board. If Agg 1 or Agg 2
is selected, the parameters below are not displayed.
The Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board are set
in the Aggregation configuration page. Refer to
section Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2
ports on the Manager board (CP6000) on page 253.
Use of the LAN 1/ LAN 2 interfaces of the processing
board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is
exclusive.

IP @

IP address of the interface.


Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255.
Default value: 192.168.0.1

Netmask

Netmask of the interface.


Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255.
Default value: 255.255.255.0

Default
Gateway

Default gateway of the interface.


In Unicast mode only one Default Gateway must
be defined for the two interfaces LAN 1 and LAN 2.
In Multicast mode Default Gateway must be set to
0.0.0.0 for the two interfaces LAN 1 and LAN 2.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Interface
Speed

Choice between:
Auto Negotiation
100 Mb/s
1 Gb/s
Default selection: Auto Negotiation

Interface state
when disable

Choice between:
Link
Down: The interface is not powered
electrically.
Link Up/No Traffic: The interface is powered
electrically but it does not support any traffic. A
"ping" sent to the interface will not get a response.
Link Up/No Multicast: The interface is powered
electrically but no stream is sent to the network.
"ping" sent to the interface will get a response.
Default selection: Link down

IGMP

Select the IGMP protocol used to multicast streams.


Choice between:
No IGMP
IGMPv2
IGMPv3
IGMPv3 with source address
When Source IP@ is enabled, IGMP v3 with source
address should be used to configure the reception
interface.
Default selection: IGMPv2

Routes
0 to 4 static routes can be recorded by the Ethernet port.
Click the

icon to add a route then edit its parameters.

Destination IP
@

Destination IP address.
Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255.
Default value: 192.168.1.0

Netmask

Destination netmask.
Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255.
Default value: 255.255.255.0

Next Hop

Next Hop router to reach the destination.


Accepted values: all values except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255.
Default value: 192.168.0.253

Cost

Cost of the static route.


Accepted values: 1 to 100
Default value: 1

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

233

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Dialog Boxes Related to MPEG Decoder


Figure 5-238. Decoder configuration

IP Rx box

LANx box

Service box

SDI Output
Interface box

Slot x -Dual
Decoder box

ASI Input box

Service box

SDI Output
Interface box

Slot x - Dual-Decoder Dialog Box


Figure 5-239. Dual-Decoder Dialog Box

Board Parameters

234

Slot Number

Number of the slot the board is plugged to.

Name

Name of the slot.

Channel Mode

Not use in this release. This parameter must be set


to Dual.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

ASI INPUT Dialog Box


Figure 5-240. ASI Input Dialog Box

ASI IN
Activity

Choice between
(unchecked).

Enable

(checked)

or

Disable

Source
selector

Selection of the ASI input connector. Choice between


IO1, IO3 and IO5 (Dual Channels MPEG board) or IO1
and IO5 (Single Channel MPEG board).
Default selection: IO5

LAN x Dialog Box


Figure 5-241. LAN x Dialog Box

Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 232.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

235

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

IP Rx Dialog Box
Figure 5-242. IP Rx Dialog Box
RTP/UDP/IP Encapsulation

Zixi/UDP/IP Encapsulation - P2P Connection

Zixi/UDP/IP Encapsulation - P2MP Connection

236

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Rx Session Connection Parameters


Enabled

Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) TS reception.

Name

Name of the Rx Stream.

Encapsulation

IP encapsulation type of the received TS. Choice


between MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP, MPEG/UDP/IP and
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.

Multicast
address

All IP address values between 224.0.0.1 and


239.255.255.255 are accepted.
Default value: 239.0.0.1
Not available if Encapsulation is set to
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.

Destination
UDP port

Accepted values: from 1500 to 65535


Default value: 5000
Not available if Encapsulation
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.

is

set

to

Max IPDV

The Max IPDV value (IP Packet Delay Variation,


Network Jitter) sets the jitter removal processing
module. Not available if Encapsulation is set to
MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.

Forward error
Correction

Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) the FEC


feature. Not available if Encapsulation is set to
MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP.

Zixi Parameters
This box is displayed if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
Stream Id

Name of the stream. It must exactly match the stream


name defined at the Broadcaster (P2MP).

Connection
Mode

Mode of connection. Choice between:


Point to Multi-Point (P2MP): This mode requires to
be connected to a ZIXI Broadcaster.
Point to Point (P2P)

Broadcaster IP
address

IP address of the Broadcaster in Point to Multi-Point


connection mode.

Broadcaster
UDP port

UDP port of the Broadcaster in Point to Multi-Point


connection mode.

Latency

Max latency for error correction.


Accepted values: from 300 to 4000 ms.

Fec overhead

Max FEC overhead.


Accepted values: from 0 to 30%.

Fec block

FEC block duration.


Accepted values: from 0 to 200 ms.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

237

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Advanced Parameters
This box is not displayed if Encapsulation is set to MPEG/ZIXI/UDP/IP
VLAN tagging

Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked) TS reception.

VLAN Id

Identifier of the VLAN.


Accepted values: from 50 to 4094

Select source
IP address
and Source IP
address

Choice Enable (checked) or Disable (unchecked).


Fill in the Source IP address field if Source IP address
selection is enabled.

Input Service Dialog Box


Figure 5-243. Input Service Dialog Box

General Parameters

238

Service
selection
mode

Selection mode for the service to be decoded. Choice


between:
First service: The decoder automatically processes
the first valid service containing a video
component declared in the PAT.
By Pid
By Service Name
By Service ID

Service Name

Selection of the service if Service selection mode is


set to By Service Name. A list of service names at the
decoder input is displayed.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Service Id

Selection of the service if Service selection mode is


set to By Service Id. A list of service Ids at the decoder
input is displayed.

TS redundancy
Enabled

If checked, enables input TS redundancy.

Input
redundancy
status

Selection of the TS status. Choice between:


Nominal
Backup
Refer to section Configuration on page 189.

Descrambling
Enabled

If checked, enables the descrambling feature.

Profile
selection

Descrambling profile selection. The profiles are


defined in the Scrambling page. To display this page
click Scrambling on the Configuration toolbar:

Setting
Refer
to
section
Scrambling / Descrambling on page 200 for more
details about these parameters.

Video
(if Service selection mode is set to By Pid)
Enable video

If checked, enables decoding of the video component.

Pid

PID of the video component to be decoded.

PMT

PID of the component which carries the PMT.

Encoding
format

Encoding format of the video component to be


decoded. Choice between:
MPEG-2
H-264 (MPEG-4)
Default selection: H-264 (MPEG-4)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

239

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

No Video Pid

Selection of the video at the decoder output if no


video to be decoded is detected. Choice between:
Bar pattern
Black pattern
Freeze on last valid frame
Default selection: Bar pattern

(if Service selection mode is set to By Service ID, Service Name or First
Service)
No Video Pid

Selection of the video at the decoder output if no


video to be decoded is detected. Choice between:
Bar pattern
Black pattern
Freeze on last valid frame
Default selection: Bar pattern

Audio
(if Service selection mode is set to By Pid)
Click
to add an audio component to be processed. Up
to 8 audio components can be processed.
Audio x:

If Enable is checked, the x audio component is


processed.

Pid

PID of the audio component to be decoded.

Output format

Encoding format of the audio component to be


processed. Choice between:
MPEG1 Layer II
Uncompressed
(SMPTE 302M) or Dolby E
Pass-Thru
AAC
Dolby Digital (AC3)

Delay

Audio delay. The value must be set between -80 to 100


ms.

Pass-Thru

If checked, audio is transmitted without decoding.

(if Service selection mode is set to By Service ID, Service Name or First
Service)

240

Audio 1 to 8

Check the box of the audio component(s) to be


processed. Audio 1 is the 1st audio in the PMT, Audio
2 is the 2nd audio in the PMT ..... .

Delay

Audio delay. The value must be set between -80 to


100 ms.

Pass-Thru

If checked, audio is transmitted without decoding.


ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Ancillary/VBI
(if Service selection mode is set to By Pid)
Click Add Ancillary/VBI to add an Ancillary/VBI component to be
decoded. In the release 04.10, 1 Ancillary/VBI component can be
selected.
Enable
Ancillary / VBI

If checked, enables decoding of the Ancillary / VBI


component.

Pid

PID of the Ancillary / VBI component to be decoded.

Transport
format

Transport format of the Ancillary / VBI component to


be decoded. Choice between:
SMPTE 2038
EN 301 775
HD Teletext (OP47)
RDD-11

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

241

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

SDI Output: Pair x Dialog Box


Figure 5-244. SDI Output Pair x Dialog Box
Output Standard = SD

Output Standard = HD

General

242

Activity

If checked, enables the SDI output.

Output Pair

Select the SDI output pair between:


Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2)
Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) (Dual Channels MPEG board
only)
Pair 1 and Pair 2 stand for channel 1 and channel 2
respectively.

Output
Standard

Selection of the output standard between:


Auto: No format conversion and no scaling.
SD: HD to SD format conversion. Scaling mode
and type are defined below.
Note: The output is disable when 1080i/30 or
720p/60 standards are decoded.
HD 1080i: SD to HD 1080i or HD 720p to HD1080i
format conversion. Scaling mode and type are
defined below.
HD 720p: SD to HD 720p or HD 1080i to HD720p
format conversion. Scaling mode and type are
defined below.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

SD
Ratio

Aspect

If Output Standard = SD, selection of the SD output


aspect ratio. Choice between:
4:3
16:9

Scaling Mode

Selection of the scaling mode. Choice between:


Manual: The scaling depends on Scaling Type
parameter below.
AFD: The scaling depends on AFD extracted from
the input signal.
AFD with Default: The scaling depends on AFD
extracted from input signal. If AFD is missing, then
the scaling depends on Scaling Type parameter
below.

Scaling Type

Selection of the scaling type if Scaling Mode above is


set to Manual or AFD with Default.
Output Standard = SD and SD Aspect Ratio = 16:9
Choice between:
Anamorphic, 4x3 Pillarbox, 14:9 Pillarbox and
Center Cut.
Output Standard = SD and SD Aspect Ratio = 4:3
Choice between:
Anamorphic, 16x9 Letterbox, 14:9 Letterbox and
Center Cut.
Output Standard = HD
Choice between:
4x3 Pillarbox, 14:9 Pillarbox and Center Cut.

Embedded SD VBI
These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to SD or Auto.
Teletext
Video Program System (VPS)
Wide Screen Signaling (WSS)
Monochrome Transparent
Full Transparent

Selection of the VBI embedded in the


SDI signal. Refer to Appendix A
VBI/ANC Processing on page 373.

Embedded SD ANC
These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to SD or Auto.
Closed Caption EIA 708-B
Time code (ATC)
Active Format Description (AFD)
Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Selection of the SD ancillary


data embedded in the SDI
signal. Refer to Appendix A
VBI/ANC
Processing on
page 373.

243

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Embedded HD ANC
These parameters are displayed if Output Standard is set to HD or Auto.
Closed Caption EIA 708-B
Time code (ATC)
Active Format Description (AFD)
Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038)
HD Teletext (OP-47)
Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11)

Selection of the HD ancillary


data embedded in the SDI
signal. Refer to Appendix A
VBI/ANC
Processing on
page 373.

Frame Synchronization

244

Frame
Synchronizer

Enables or disables the frame synchronizer. Choice


between:
Off: Frame synchronizer is disabled.
Reference: Frame synchronizer is enabled. The
reference signal is injected on the SYN connector on
the Manager board.

Pixel offset

SDI output pair phase adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Audio Outputs Dialog Box


Figure 5-245. Audio Outputs Dialog Box

If a Single Channel MPEG board is used as Decoder, this box is used to


select the audio type on the XLR connectors of the breakout cable. Refer
to section Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.
Click
to add an analog stereo audio output. Up to 2
analog stereo outputs can be created.
Click
can be created.
Click

to add an AES audio output. Up to 4 AES outputs

to delete an audio output.

Analog Audio Parameters


XLR Output

Indicate the XLR used for the analog audio. Choice


between:
Out1(L1)/Out(R1): XLR Out1 is used to the left
channel and XLR Out2 is used to the right channel
of the 1st stereo.
Out3(L2)/Out(R2): XLR Out3 is used to the left
channel and XLR Out4 is used to the right channel
of the 2nd stereo.

Source

Number of the audio component (1 to 8).

Level

Audio Level in dBu.


Accepted values: between 4 dBu and 24 dBu in 1 dBu
steps.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

245

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Digital Audio Parameters


XLR Output

Indicate the XLR used for the digital audio. Choice


between:
st
Out1(AES1): XLR Out1 is used to the 1
digital
audio.
nd digital
Out2(AES2): XLR Out2 is used to the 2
audio.
rd
Out3(AES3): XLR Out3 is used to the 3
digital
audio.
th digital
Out4(AES4): XLR Out4 is used to the 4
audio.

Source

Number of the audio component (1 to 8).

Dialog Boxes Related to the Modulator


Figure 5-246. Modulator configuration

Slot x - Modulator
box

TS Selection
box

Modulation
box

RF/IF Output
box

ASI Monitoring
box

Slot x - Modulator Dialog Box


Figure 5-247. Modulator Dialog Box

Board Parameters

246

Slot Number

Number of the slot the board is plugged to.

Name

Name of the slot.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

TS Selection Dialog Box


Figure 5-248. TS Selection Dialog Box

Service parameters
ITS Selection

Select the source of the TS to modulate (internal or


ASI IN x connectors):
Internal: TS comes from the MPEG Encoder
board.
Auto ASI In 1-2: TS comes from ASI IN 1. If the
ASI IN 1 stream is interrupted for at least 500 ms,
the switch to ASI IN 2 is automatic but if the ASI
IN 1 stream is restored, there is no switchback to
ASI IN 1.
ASI In 1: TS comes from ASI IN 1.
ASI In 2: TS comes from ASI IN 2.

ASI Monitoring Dialog Box


Figure 5-249. ASI Monitoring Dialog Box

Parameters
Output

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Select the source of the signal to monitor. The


monitored signal is available on the ASI OUT
connector. Choice between:
Disable: Monitoring is disabled.
ASI In 1: ASI IN 1 TS is monitored.
ASI In 2: ASI IN 2 TS is monitored.
Internal: The TS from the internal MPEG Encoder
is monitored.
Active stream: Current stream after Bitrate
management and before Modulation blocking is
monitored.

247

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Modulation Dialog Box


Figure 5-250. Modulation Dialog Box
DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X Standard

DVB-S/DSNG Standard

General Parameters (DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Standards)


Standard

Select the Modulation standard. Choice between:


DVB-S/DSNG
DVB-S/S2
DVB-S/S2X

Modcod

Select the modulation type and code rate.

Pilots Insertion

If checked, the Pilots Insertion feature is enabled.

Frame

Size of the FEC Frame. Choice between:


Normal: 64800 bits
Short: 16200 bits

Roll-Off

Select the Roll-Off value. Choice between: 0.35, 0.25,


0.20, 0.15, 0.10, 0.05 and Custom.

Roll-Off custom
value

Select the Roll-Off value if Roll-Off below is set to


custom. Value between: 0.35 and 0.05 in 0.01 steps.

Symbol Rate

Rate of symbol transmission


Default value: 45000000 Bauds

Test Mode

Select the test mode. Choice between:


Disabled: Test is not activated.
PRBS: Pseudo Random Signal is used.

PLS Mode

Select the PLS mode. Choice between:


Default: As defined in EN302307
PLS Sequence 1: The PLS Sequence 1 value
below is used.
PLS Sequence 2: The PLS Sequence 2 value
below is used.

248

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

PLS Sequence 1

Refer to PLS Mode parameter above. Sequence


initialization on 18 bits (0x0).

PLS Sequence 2

Refer to PLS Mode parameter above. Sequence


initialization on 18 bits (0x0).

Rate Adaptation

Select the rate adaptation mode. Choice between:


Null packet adaptation
Padding Insertion

Max modulated
Ts bitrate

Indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can be


modulated. This value can be used to set
automatically the TS bitrate in the encoder.

General Parameters (DVB-S/DSNG Standard)


Standard

Select the Modulation standard. Choice between:


DVB-S/DSNG
DVB-S2

Modcod

Select the modulation type and code rate.

Symbol Rate

Rate of symbol transmission


Default value: 45000000 Bauds

Test Mode

Select the test mode. Choice between:


Disabled: The test is not activated.
PRBS: Internal Pseudo Random Signal generator
is used.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

249

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

RF Output Dialog Box


Figure 5-251. RF Output Dialog Box

RF output Parameters.
Activity

If checked the RF output is enabled.

Reverse
Spectrum

If checked the spectrum at the modulator output is


reversed.

RF Output Tilt

Adjust the Tilt correction (in dB/MHz).


Accepted
values:
from
-0.040 dB/MHz
0.040 dB/MHz in 0.005 dB/MHz steps.

Output Level

250

to

Level of the RF Output.


Accepted values: from -30 dBm to 5 dBm in 0.1 dBm
steps.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Modulator
Frequency

RF output frequency.
Accepted values:
L- Band: From 950 MHz to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz
steps. Default value: 1550 MHz
IF - Band: From 50 MHz to 180 MHz in 1 Hz steps.
Default value: 50 MHz
Refer also to Freq. Calculator below.

Freq. Calculator
Transponder
Band
OL Translator
Transponder
Freq

Output Modulator Frequency modulator can be set


manually or via a frequency calculator to provide
help for inexperienced operators to avoid potential
fault. Calculation consists of selecting the
upconverter frequency (Transponder Band) and
entered the transponder frequency (Transponder
Freq), in KHz, given by the satellite operator.

Output Parameters
RF Power
Type

On

Carried
Modulated

Select the un-mute type. Choice between:


Direct: RF Power Off to On is abrupt
Progressive: RF Power Off to On is progressive
If checked the output signal is replaced by a simple
sine wave at the RF frequency. The level of the sinus
corresponds to the RF Output level. Among other
things, this mode enables phase noise
measurement without the need for an external
amplifier.

Auto RF Power Off Conditions


Stream
Loss

Input

If checked the RF output is muted when the TS


Stream is lost or uncorrected after the Time Out
period below.

Loss of Ref. Time


Out

If checked the RF output is muted when the external


reference is lost after the Time Out period below.

Time Out

Refer to Stream Input Loss and Loss of Ref. Time


Out parameters above.
Accepted values: From 1 min to 1440 min.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

251

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Clock Synchro
Clock Reference

Select the source of the 10MHz clock reference.


Choice between:
Internal: The internal 10MHz oscillator is used.
External: The 10 MHz reference is injected on the
REF IN connector.
The processing clocks of the modulator are always
locked to the internal or external reference signal.

Carried Id

252

Global Unique
Identifier

If checked, the GUI and information below are sent.

GPS coordinates

If checked, the Latitude and Longitude coordinates


are sent.

Phone

If checked, the Phone number is sent.

Data

If checked the User Data is sent.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

Dialog Boxes Related to LAN 1 / LAN 2 ports on the


Manager board (CP6000)
LAN 1 or LAN 2 ports can be used to control the equipment (TS over
IP and C&C on same port).

To configure the Manager boards LAN 1 and LAN 2 Ethernet interfaces


click the Aggregation button on the toolbar.
Figure 5-252. Access to Manager boards LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration

Aggregation button

The LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration page is displayed:


Figure 5-253. LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration page

Port to configure selection

Click LAN Agg 1 or LAN Agg 2 on the left of the page to select the
Ethernet port to configure.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

253

Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface GUI Description

LAN 1 (Agg 1) LAN 2 (Agg 2) Dialog Box


Figure 5-254. Ethernet Interface Dialog Box

The LAN 1/LAN 2 configuration is not global. It should be performed


in each configuration.

Ethernet Interface
Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 232.

Routes
0 to 4 static routes can be recorded by the Ethernet port.
Click the

icon to add a route then edit its parameters.

Refer to section LAN x Dialog Box on page 232.

254

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

6
Servicing
Chapter

Introduction
This chapter describes the following servicing operations:

Installing software options via the Command Line Interface.

Displaying Unit information.

Installing / Replacing an LCD Front Panel.

Replacing a MPEG Board.

Cleaning air inlet grill.

Content of this Chapter


Ordering and Installing Software Options ............................page 256
Displaying Unit information ....................................................page 260
Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000) .........page 261
Replacing a MPEG Board .........................................................page 262
Replacing a Modulator Board .................................................page 264
Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill .......................................................page 265

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

255

Chapter 6 Servicing Ordering and Installing Software Options

Ordering and Installing Software Options


Introduction
The purpose of this section is to explain the procedures for displaying
device software option status and for ordering and installing a software
option.
If the options are ordered with the product, they will be installed
in-factory and will be available to the Operator straight away.
The operations described in this section are performed using the
Command Line Interface.

Accessing the Command Line Interface


Refer to section Accessing the Command Line Interface on page 51.

Entering the Login and Password


Refer to section Entering the Login and Password on page 52.

Ordering / Installing software options


This section provides information to order software options and to install
it in the device.

Ordering software options process


To order software options from Thomson Video Networks, please
provide Thomson Video Networks:

The software options of the same type already installed in the


device.
Refer to section Displaying Software Options (lsopt) on
page 257.

The equipment code of your device. Refer to section Displaying


the Equipment Code (eqcod) on page 258.

The serial number of your device. Refer to section Status Bar


on page 95.

The software options required.

Thomson Video Networks will then supply a specific key per type of
option (which is unique and can only be used for your Platform).

256

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 6 Servicing Ordering and Installing Software Options

Installing software options process


To install software options:

Uninstall software options of the same type as those to be


installed (change in number of options of the same type).
Refer to section Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt) on
page 258.

Install software options using the key supplied by


Thomson Video Networks. Refer to section Installing a
Software Option (insopt) on page 259.

Displaying Software Options (lsopt)


To display software options:
1. Type lsopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
Figure 6-1. Displaying software option status - lsopt command

The following information is displayed:


Id

Software option ID.

Ref.

Software option sales reference.

Status

Option status, installed indicates that the


option has been installed. "-----" indicates
that the option has not been installed.

Key

Key used to install the option.

Number

Number of options.

Comment

Option label.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

257

Chapter 6 Servicing Ordering and Installing Software Options

Displaying the Equipment Code (eqcod)


1. Type eqcod after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Enter the slot number 0 then press ENTER.
Figure 6-2. Reading the equipment code with the CLI - eqcod command

The following information is displayed:


EQCOD

eqcod (xxxx) of the device

Uninstalling a Software Option (rmopt)


To uninstall a software option:
1. Type rmopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER.
2. Enter the Option id of the software option to be uninstalled (see
section Displaying Software Options (lsopt) on page 257 to know
the option IDs) then press ENTER.
Figure 6-3. Uninstalling a software option via the CLI - rmopt command

3. Type y after Do you really want to remove this option


[Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm option removal or n if you
wish to keep the option, then press ENTER.
4. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device
(reboot command).

258

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 6 Servicing Ordering and Installing Software Options

Installing a Software Option (insopt)


To install a software option using the code supplied by Thomson Video
Networks:
1. Type insopt after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER on the
keyboard.
2. Enter the software option Option Key then press ENTER.
Figure 6-4. Enabling a software option via the CLI - insopt command

3. To finish installing the option reboot the device (reboot command).


4. Ensure that the option has been validated using the lsopt command
(see section Displaying Software Options (lsopt) on page 257).
When an installed option is edited (i.e. if the number of AAC audios
must be increased), this option will need to be uninstalled before
being reinstalled with the new key (see section below).

Recovering Lost Keys


If you have lost a software option key, please contact Thomson Video
Networks Customer Services with:

Option purchase order

Equipment code

Sales reference of the option relating to the lost key

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

259

Chapter 6 Servicing Displaying Unit information

Displaying Unit information


The purpose of this section is to explain the procedures for displaying the
Field Replaceable Unit information (FRU).

Displaying Field Replaceable Unit information


(frudisp)
To display the Field Replaceable Unit information (FRU):
1. Type frudisp after the CLI.Service prompt then press ENTER.
2. Enter the FRU slot number (1 to 4 for CP6000 or 1 to 2 for CP6100)
then press ENTER.
Figure 6-5. Displaying the FRU information- frudisp command

260

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 6 Servicing Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000)

Installing or Replacing an LCD Front Panel (CP6000)


The ViBE CP6000 Front panel without LCD can be replaced by a Front
panel with LCD and keypad. The aim of the LCD front panel is to provide
a basic control/command interface for the main settings. Its operation is
described in the Front Panel Operation Chapter.
Front panel with LCD and keypad reference: CP6x00-OPT-FAV-LCD
Procedure for installing/replacing an LCD front panel
1. Remove the front panel by unscrewing the knurled knobs on the front
face.
Figure 6-6. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 fixing front panel fixing
Knurled knobs

Front panel without LCD

Front panel with LCD and Keypad

2. Install the new front panel by screwing the knurled knobs on both
sides of the front face, taking care of the correct insertion of the SubD
connectors.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

261

Chapter 6 Servicing Replacing a MPEG Board

Replacing a MPEG Board


Terminology
Hot Plug boards can be removed/installed when the device is switched
on. There is no risk of damage but all services provided by the chassis
will be disrupted.
Hot Swap boards can be removed/installed when the device is switched
on. There is no risk of damage and services which are not concerned by
the function are not disrupted.
MPEG boards are Hot swap.
MPEG board reference: CP6000-HW-MPEG-B or CP6000-HW-MPEG-C.
The CP6000-HW-MPEG-C MPEG board requires a software release of
3.0 or higher to run.
To display MPEG board version refer to section Displaying Field
Replaceable Unit information (frudisp) on page 260.

CP6HWMEDAA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-A
CP6HWMEDBA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-B
CP6HWMEDCA: CP6000-HW-MPEG-C

Procedure for replacing a MPEG board


1. Disconnect the cables on the MPEG board front panel

262

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 6 Servicing Replacing a MPEG Board

2. CP6100 only:
Unscrew the screws holding the boards retaining bracket and remove
the bracket.

Bracket

3. Pull the extractor lever to release the board contacts from the
backplane board connector

Extractor lever
LAN 1

Audio

MPEG

IO1

IO2

LAN 2

IO5

4. Remove the board


5. Wait 10 seconds
6. Insert the spare MPEG board into its slot
7. CP6100 only:
Fix the boards retaining bracket (refer to step 2)
8. Connect the cables on the MPEG board front panel
The MPEG board is automatically started and configured via the
Manager board.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

263

Chapter 6 Servicing Replacing a Modulator Board

Replacing a Modulator Board


Modulator boards are hot swap enabled.
Procedure for replacing a Modulator board
1. Disconnect the cables on the Modulator board front panel
2. CP6100 only:
Unscrew the screws holding the boards retaining bracket and remove
the bracket.

Bracket

3. Pull the extractor lever to release the board contacts from the
backplane board connector
Extractor lever

4. Remove the board


5. Wait 10 seconds
6. Insert the spare Modulator board into its slot
7. CP6100 only:
Fix the boards retaining bracket (refer to step 2 above)
8. Connect the cables on the Modulator board front panel
The Modulator board is automatically started and configured via the
Manager board.

264

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 6 Servicing Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill

Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill


To prevent the power supply from overheating, you must regularly:

Clean the rack


recommendations,

Clean ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform air inlet grills.

filter

according

to

the

manufacturers

These operations must be performed at least twice a year.


The device must be installed in a room with low dust levels. The
maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100 g/m3 and
the maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1 m
must not exceed 1 million/m3.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

265

Chapter 6 Servicing Cleaning the Air Inlet Grill

BLANK PAGE

266

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

7
Troubleshooting
Chapter

Introduction
If you face any problem with the equipment, consult the FAQ section first.
If the problem is not resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Procedure
section where it is explained how to generate a ReportFile.bin file to be
sent to Thomson Video Customer Service. This file is critical to provide
efficient support.

Content of this Chapter


Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ........................................page 268
Troubleshooting Procedure .....................................................page 269

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

267

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)


I have lost the equipment IP address so that I cannot connect to
the equipment. What should I do?
The factory set ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform IP address
and Netmask for the Control and Command port are 192.168.1.1 and
255.255.255.0.
These were changed during the installation setup and the new customer
set IP settings (address, netmask, default gateway) are the ones that will
be required for subsequent connections.
If you have lost (or do not know) the last stored customer set IP address,
use the front panel to read the Control/Command IP address. See
Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation on page 67.

I cannot download a new package via the Equipment Setup tool.


What should I do?
Pack invalid is displayed when I download a new package via the
Equipment Setup tool.

268

Restart the download because an error occurred during the transfer of


data between the server of the Equipment Setup and CP6000.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure

Troubleshooting Procedure
The procedure is composed of two steps: Generating the report and
Getting the report from the equipment. They are described in the
following sections.

Generating the Report


1. Click the About button in the bottom right corner of the Graphical User
Interface screen to open the About screen.
2. Click the Report tab in the About screen to display the Dump report
button.
Figure 7-1. Opening the About screen

3. Click Dump report button to launch the report generation.


Figure 7-2. Generating the report screen

Wait a while until report generation. A new button (Open report) will
be displayed next to the Dump report button.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

269

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure

Figure 7-3. Open report button

Getting the Report From the Equipment


1. Click the Open report button.
2. Save the ReportFile on your local PC.
3. Send this file to Thomson Video Customer Service. This file is critical
for providing efficient support.

270

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

8
Tools

Chapter

Introduction
This chapter describes the Equipment Setup, Download application
and SigEditor tools delivered in the CD-ROM with the product.
The Equipment Setup tool is used to download new product packages
to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms.
The Download application is used to download new product packages
to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms. It can be
used to download new product packages from the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
3.0 software release and above.
The SigEditor tool is used to edit SI/PSI tables. In the ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platforms, it is used to edit NIT tables.

Content of this Chapter


Equipment Setup Tool ..............................................................page 272
Download application...............................................................page 289
SigEditor Tool.............................................................................page 300

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

271

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Equipment Setup Tool


Introduction
This section describes the Equipment Setup tool delivered in the
CD-ROM with the product.
It is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms. It is built upon the Command
Line Interface (CLI) module.
Figure 8-1. Interfaces with several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms

Description
Overview
Equipment Setup provides 3 interfaces:

272

a Graphical User Interface (GUI), which presents available commands


and the current state in a comprehensive way to Operators.

a Telnet client interface, to send CLI commands to ViBE CP6000 /


CP6100 Contribution Platform and receive data and status.

an FTP server interface, to enable ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution


Platform to be downloaded with a new product package.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

In addition, Equipment Setup can store its persistent state (list of


recently managed ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, etc.) to
file on a local drive.
Internally to Equipment Setup, an action on the GUI results in the
sending of one or more CLI commands via the Telnet client, and each CLI
response is reflected by the GUI and available information from the
embedded FTP server.

Description of the Graphical User Interface


Figure 8-2. Description of the Graphical User Interface

Download Area
Equipment Area

Messages /Log Area

The application interface is divided into 4 areas.


1. The toolbar which displays the application logo and the connected
Operator. It also contains:

a button to set some advanced settings

a button to set the username and password of another Operator


wishing to connect to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform

a button to display all useful information about the application


software

2. Equipment area: This area displays information about all ViBE CP6000
/ CP6100 Contribution Platforms that the Operator can deal with.
Figure 8-3. Information available in the Equipment area

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

273

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

The following commands are available for the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform present in the Equipment area:

for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform

Figure 8-4. Commands available in the Equipment area for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform

or Connect

for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform:

Figure 8-5. Commands available in the Equipment area for more than one ViBE CP6000
/ CP6100 Contribution Platform

or Connect

Using these commands, the Operator can:

274

add or remove an equipment item to/from this list (Remove and


Add equipment commands)

connect to or disconnect from one or more ViBE CP6000 /


CP6100
Contribution
Platforms
(Connect/Disconnect
commands)

add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the


Download list (Add to download list command). This list is
displayed in the Download area

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

3. Download area: This area contains the connected ViBE CP6000 /


CP6100 Contribution Platform(s) which have been moved to the
Download list (via the Add to download list shortcut command in the
Equipment area) with all the commands and information required for
the download process.
The following commands are available for one or more ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platforms present in the Download area:
Figure 8-6. Commands available in the Download area for one or more ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platforms

Using these commands, the Operator can:

Select product packages via a file browser to choose the


software to download to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform (Select product package command).

Launch download operation (Launch download command).

Trigger the toggle to enable the newly downloaded software


(Toggle command). A toogle leads to an automatic ViBE CP6000
/ CP6100 Contribution Platform reboot (following Operator
confirmation).

Remove ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform from the


Download area.

4. Messages area: This area displays messages for the Operator


(success or failure of an operation, etc.).
Figure 8-7. Example of messages

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

275

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

PC Setup
The default value of the Local IP address is the default IP address of the
first network interface (OS-dependent value). The Operator can edit it in
the Advanced settings dialog box accessible via the toolbar.
Figure 8-8. Command to change the local IP address for the FTP server

Advanced settings button in the toolbar

Local IP address for FTP server text field

Here are some recommendations:

If the PC running Equipment Setup has several network interfaces


(e.g.: WiFi and Ethernet, or public and private networks, etc.) and the
Operator wants to use a particular interface (e.g.: faster by Ethernet
than WiFi) for the download, s/he must indicate the IP address
corresponding to this interface as the FTP server IP address.

If the PC has a private IP address (on the LAN) and a public IP address
(on a broader network), and the device is to connect to the PC via its
public address (e.g.: firewall or router preventing connection via the
private address), the Operator must indicate the public IP address of
the PC as the FTP server IP address.

In the case of a dynamic IP address (DHCP), it is better not to set the IP


address of the FTP server, as the next time Equipment Setup is run,
the PC IP address may be different, and it will then need to be reset for
the download to work.

Operation
This section explains:

276

how to launch Equipment Setup

how to enter the Operator Login and Password

how to add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the


Equipment area and to connect to one or more of them

how to download software on to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100


Contribution Platform
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

which type of information is available in the Messages area

Launching Equipment Setup


1. Unzip the .zip file in a dedicated directory (or in any directory).
2. Run the application.
The application can be run by simply double-clicking on
"EquipmentSetup.jar" but it is advisable to create a shortcut command by
double-clicking on "create-shortcuts.vbs" which launches a script. The
script creates two shortcut commands: "EquipmentSetup" and
"EquipmentSetup-debug".
Move or copy the shortcut commands to the Desktop, the Start menu, the
Quick Launch Bar, etc.
When Equipment Setup is run via the "EquipmentSetup-debug"
shortcut command, the logs are written in the "EquipmentSetup-log.txt"
file (this file is reset each time the application is launched).

Entering the User Name and Password


Before connecting to any ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform,
the Operator must provide a username and a password for
authentication.

If authentication with one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution


Platforms fails, the connection(s) to the concerned ViBE CP6000 /
CP6100 Contribution Platform(s) is (are) closed.

If authentication with one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution


Platforms is successful, the username used for authentication is
displayed in the main window of Equipment Setup.

Figure 8-9. Username displayed in the toolbar

Username used for authentication

Entering the Log In


At startup, a dialog window appears to enter the username and the
corresponding password to log on.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

277

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Figure 8-10. Startup dialog box

User
and
Password

The default username is the last username used.


The default password is the password associated with
this username if password storage is enabled in the
Advanced settings dialog box accessible via the toolbar,
or an empty string otherwise.

Figure 8-11. Command to store user passwords

Advanced settings button in the toolbar

Store user passwords option boxes

Connect
equipments

278

In the current release, you can use the following login/password


couples: operator/operator or service/service.
For download and reboot operations, service/service is
required as login/password.

This command enables the Operator to directly connect


to ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform(s)
already added to the Equipment area in a previous
session and programmed to be connected after login
(one C checkbox is available per ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform for this purpose, as shown in the
following figure).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Figure 8-12. "C (Connection at logon)" checkbox in the Equipment area

C (Connection at logon) checkbox

After login to an equipment item or a change in the current user,


Equipment Setup gets the list of available CLI commands.

Changing User Name and Password


After connecting to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platforms, the Operator can authenticate with another username at any
time (when no operation is ongoing) using the Change user button in the
toolbar.
Figure 8-13. Change User

Change user

Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the


Equipment Area
This area displays information about all ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platforms that the Operator can deal with.
Figure 8-14. Information available in the Equipment area

From this area, the Operator can perform the following operations:

Add or remove an equipment item to/from this list (Remove and Add
equipment commands).

Connect to or disconnect from one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100


Contribution Platforms (Connect/Disconnect commands).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

279

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Add ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Download list


(Add to download list command). This list is displayed in the
Download area.

These operations are described hereafter.

Adding/Removing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform to/from the


Equipment Area
Adding ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform

Select the Add Equipment command.


This command is available via a floating menu in the Equipment area, a
shortcut menu attached to an already declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform, or the Add Equipment button at the bottom of the
Equipment area.
Figure 8-15. Adding Equipment command locations

Three ways of accessing the same


Add equipment command

A dialog box is displayed to set the IP address of the ViBE CP6000 /


CP6100 Contribution Platform to be added to the Equipment area.
Figure 8-16. Adding a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform

Address

280

The ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 IP address or hostname


which is used to identify a declared ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Platform.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Connect

This command is used to launch an automatic


connection to a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Platform just after
it has been declared.

The IP address (or the hostname) and device name of the declared ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform are displayed in the Equipment
area.
Figure 8-17. Declared ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform displayed in the
Equipment area

Removing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform

To remove one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select the


Remove shortcut command.
Figure 8-18. Remove shortcut command

To remove several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms in one


step, select the relevant ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard for multiple
discontinuous selection or the SHIFT key for multiple continuous
selection then select the Remove shortcut command.
A message is displayed asking the Operator for confirmation.
Figure 8-19. Confirmation request before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
removal

Connecting/Disconnecting to/from ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution


Platform
Once declared, a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform can be
connected.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

281

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

The connection state of a ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform


can be: "Connected", "Not connected", "Connecting", "Error" and also
"Downloading", "Stopping Download", "Installing options" and
"Rebooting".
Figure 8-20. Example of connection state (Connected)

A connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform is eligible for


download, reboot, etc.
The declared equipment list contains one flag per ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform to indicate whether this ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform must be automatically connected when the
application is launched (and whether the Operator confirms the
connection at startup, see section Automatic Connection at Startup
After Login on page 282).
Figure 8-21. C flag in the Equipment area

C flag

Connection

Connection can be:

automatic at startup after login

automatic after ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform


declaration

manual

Automatic Connection at Startup After Login

For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that have already been
installed and programmed to start up automatically after Login, the Yes
button just needs to be selected in the Login/Password dialog box. ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms programmed to start up
automatically after Login are indicated by the C box, which is checked
next to each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform. Refer to
section Entering the Log In on page 277.

282

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Automatic Connection After ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution


Platform Declaration

Automatic connection can be requested when adding a ViBE CP6000 /


CP6100 Contribution Platform to the Equipment area. Just authorize the
Connect command (button set to Yes). Refer to section Adding ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform on page 280.
Manual Connection

Prerequisites: Manual connection is only possible if the


following two conditions are met:

For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms that have


already been installed and programmed to be automatically
connected after login, the (Connect equipment) No button must
be selected in the Login/Password dialog box when the login
details are entered. Refer to section Entering the Log In on
page 277.
For ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms to be installed,
the (Connect) No button must be selected in the Adding an
equipment dialog box when the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform is declared. Refer to section Adding ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform on page 280.

To connect to one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select the


Connect shortcut command.
Figure 8-22. Connect shortcut command for one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform

To connect to several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms


in one step, select the relevant ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard for
multiple discontinuous selection or the SHIFT key for multiple
continuous selection then select the Connect shortcut command.
Figure 8-23. Connect shortcut command for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

283

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

If the connection is successful, the status is Connected and the software


version is displayed beside the connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform.
Figure 8-24. "Connected" status with indication of the software version

Software version

If the connection fails, the status is Error and the software version is not
displayed.
Figure 8-25. "Error" status

Disconnection

To disconnect one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform, select


the Disconnect shortcut command.
Figure 8-26. Disconnect shortcut command

As in the case of connection, it is possible to disconnect several ViBE


CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms in one step. Select the relevant
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform while holding down the
CTRL key on the keyboard for multiple discontinuous selection or the
SHIFT key for multiple continuous selection then select the Disconnect
shortcut command.
Figure 8-27. Disconnect shortcut command for more than one ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform

A message is displayed asking the Operator for confirmation.


284

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Figure 8-28. Message before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform disconnection

Once ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform has been


disconnected, the status becomes Disconnected.
Figure 8-29. "Disconnected" status

Managing ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform in the


Download Area
The Download area contains the connected ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platforms which have been moved to the Download list (via
the Add to download list shortcut command in the Equipment area)
with all the commands and information required for the download
process, i.e.:
Select product package to select a product package to be downloaded
to one or more ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms (whether
they are connected or not), by browsing the local file system. Once one
product package is selected, the file name of the selected package is
displayed in the table for each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution
Platform (as well as the actual firmware/board packages stored in the two
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform memory banks) and the
download operation is available.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

285

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Figure 8-30. Select product package command

Figure 8-31. Active software, Inactive software, Software to be downloaded

Active software

Inactive software

Software to be downloaded

Launch download command to launch the download operation. This


command is available only if a product package has been selected
beforehand. A progress bar is displayed for each ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
Contribution Platform during the download operation.
Figure 8-32. Download in progress

Download progress bar

286

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

The download can be stopped at any time by using the Stop download
shortcut command.
Figure 8-33. Stop download shortcut command

Toggle command to enable the newly downloaded software. A toogle


leads to an automatic ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
reboot (following Operator confirmation). The "Toggle" operation cannot
be performed on several equipment items in one step.
Figure 8-34. Toggle shortcut command

Figure 8-35. Confirmation request before ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform
reboot

Remove command to remove ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution


Platform from the Download list (no confirmation is required from the
Operator).
Figure 8-36. Remove shortcut command

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

287

Chapter 8 Tools Equipment Setup Tool

Getting Information in the Messages Area


Equipment Setup displays messages for the Operator (success or
failure of an operation, etc.).
Figure 8-37. Example of messages

288

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Download application
Overview
This section describes the Download application delivered in the
CD-ROM with the product.
It is used to download new product packages to one or more ViBE
CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms from the 3.0 software release
and above. The procedure is described below.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 feature two program banks. When downloading is
complete, the inactive bank will contain the software release that has just
been downloaded but which is inactive, and the active bank will contain
the active software release. The toggle function can be used to toggle
one software release from the inactive bank so that it becomes the active
software release in the active bank.
The {Download} application provides the following features:

Simultaneous upgrade of several ViBE CP6000 / CP6100

For an ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 or a group of ViBE CP6000 / CP6100

Full upgrade (downloading + toggling)

Downloading only
Device firmware upgrades can also be performed via the
MediaFlexSUITE. Refer to the MediaFlexSUITE User Manual.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

289

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Operation
Installing and running the application
Installing the application
To install the {Download} application:
1. Copy the DownloadSetup.exe file on the PCs hard drive.
2. Launch DownloadSetup.exe to install the {Download} application. The
following window will be displayed:
Figure 8-38. Installation, {Download} application 1/4

3. Click Next. The following window will be displayed:


Figure 8-39. Installation, {Download} application 2/4

290

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

4. Select the destination directory for the files of the {Download}


application and click Next. The following window will be displayed:
Figure 8-40. Installation, {Download} application 3/4

5. Click Next. The {Download} application is installed. On installation


completion the following window will be displayed:
Figure 8-41. Installation, {Download} application 4/4

6. Click Finish.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

291

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Running the application


To run the {Download} application:
1. Open the {Download} application folder.
Figure 8-42. {Download} application folder

1. Click the Download.exe file. The applications main window will be


displayed:
Figure 8-43. Main window, {Download} application

Screen description
The main window features two pages:

Devices

Software Release

The {Download} application release number is displayed in the title bar


of the main window.

292

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Devices page
Figure 8-44. Devices page, {Download} application

This page displays the list of installed devices and their status. Click a
column header to sort its content.
Software Release page
Figure 8-45. Software Release page, {Download} application

This page is used to select (Browse) the directory containing the


software release to download.

Download procedure
The download procedure is as follows:

Declare the devices to be upgraded

Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded

Select the devices to be upgraded

Select the operation to be performed (upgrade, download or toggle)


The term software release also refers to a package.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

293

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Step 1: Declaring the devices to be upgraded


Method 1:
1. Click Add on the Devices page. The following dialog box is displayed:
Figure 8-46. Name, IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded,
{Download} application

2. Enter the device name, IP address and device family of the device to
be upgraded.
3. Click OK.
This information will be displayed in the main window.
Method 2:
1. Position the mouse cursor on the Devices page and then right-click to
display the following shortcut menu:
Figure 8-47. Devices page {Download} application

294

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

2. Click Add... . The following dialog box is displayed:


Figure 8-48. Name, IP address and Device family of the device to be upgraded,
{Download} application

3. Enter the device name, IP address and device family of the device to
be upgraded.
4. Click OK.
5. This information will be displayed in the main window.
Step 2: Selecting the directory containing the file to be
downloaded
1. Click the Software Release tab.
2. Click the Browse... button.
3. Select the directory containing the file to be downloaded.
Figure 8-49. Directory containing the file to be downloaded, {Download} application

4. Click OK.
The contents of the selected directory will be displayed:

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

295

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Figure 8-50. Files displayed on the Software Release page, {Download} application

5. If necessary, select the file to be downloaded.


Step 3: Selecting devices to upgrade
1. Click the Devices tab.
2. Select the devices to upgrade.
To upgrade specific devices, use the standard shortcut operations (Shift
+ left click) or (Ctrl + right click).
To select all devices, use the Select All command in the shortcut menu.
Step 4: Selecting the operation to be performed
Select the operation to be performed on the selected devices via the
shortcut menu: Full Update... , Download only, View or Toggle...

Full Update... command

This command downloads and toggles the file chosen on the Software
Release page in each selected device.
If the file is already in the device active bank, no operation will be
performed. If it is in the inactive bank, this command will toggle it into
the active bank. If this file is neither the active bank nor the inactive bank,
the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank and then toggled into
the active bank.

Download only command

For each selected device this command checks whether the file selected
on the Software Release page is in the active or inactive bank. If it cannot
be found, the file will be downloaded into the inactive bank.

View or Toggle ... command

The View or Toggle... command will be grayed out (unavailable) if


several devices have been selected.
This command displays the software releases of the active and inactive
banks for the selected device and is used to toggle between these active
and inactive banks.
296

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Figure 8-51. View or Toggle command, {Download} application

Check the box

Inactive software release to active


Active software release

To toggle between the active and inactive banks:


1. Check the box to select the device.
2. Click OK.
On a Windows 7 platform, if the OK button is not displayed go to
Control Panel \ All Control Panel Items \ Display and switch to 100%.
Then click Apply and log off/log on.

Other application commands

Edit command
This command is used to edit the name and IP address of the device
selected in the main window.

Remove command
This command is used to delete the selected device from the main
window.

Update All... command


This button on the Devices page is a shortcut command that is
equivalent to Select All + Full Update.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

297

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Status messages
The following status messages may be displayed in the Status column
on the Devices page.
Table 8-1. Status messages, {Download} application

Status messages

Indications

Connecting...

A socket has been opened to set up a


session with the device.

Logging...

The session is open. The connection


name has been sent. The application is
waiting for a reply from the device.

Read topology...

The device topology read command


has been sent. The application is
waiting for a reply.

Get SW versions...

The bank content identification


command has been sent. The
application is waiting for a reply.

Get SW versions (2nd attempt)...

The first attempt at reading the


software release has failed. The
application is trying again.

OK. SW status read

Reply
to
the
bank
content
identification command: all the
required information is present.

Setup download...

The application is checking whether


the download is necessary.

No need to download...

The download is not necessary as the


software release is already in the
active or inactive bank.

Package already downloaded and The download is not necessary as the


is active
software release is already in the
active bank.
Download started for X board(s). The command for file downloading
Please wait...
has been sent.

298

Downloading... (X %)

The FTP download is complete, the file


has been transferred to the device and
saving has begun in the flash memory.

Downloading...

The FTP download is complete, the file


has been transferred to the device and
saving has begun in the flash memory.
No information is available about the
progress of the operation.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools Download application

Table 8-1. Status messages, {Download} application

Status messages

Indications

Download successful

The file has been transferred to the


inactive bank and the identification
command has confirmed that the
inactive bank contains the appropriate
software release.

Toggle done

The toggle command has been sent.

No need to update

The device does not require an


upgrade.

Error messages
The following error messages may be displayed in the Status column on
the Devices page.
Table 8-2. Error messages, {Download} application

Error messages
Failed. Connection error

Indications
Impossible to set up the session. The
device is unavailable or in the process
of rebooting.

Failed. Login rejected: Too many Too many applications are open.
connections
Failed. No answer from some Impossible to execute the command
boards
as some installed boards are not
responding.
Aborted. Already downloading!

Impossible to execute the command


as downloading is in progress.

Failed. Software error.

Software error in the {ViBE Download}


application.

Failed. Impossible to connect.

The connection has been lost.

Failed. SW not found in inactive Impossible to toggle banks as inactive


bank for X function(s)
bank does not contain the required
software.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

299

Chapter 8 Tools SigEditor Tool

SigEditor Tool
Overview
This section describes the SigEditor tool delivered in the CD-ROM with
the product. This user-friendly tool is used to edit all SI/PSI tables.
In the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms, the SigEditor tool
is used to generate and edit NIT tables. Once the table is ready, it can be
saved in a file to be downloaded to the device.

Operation
To launch the editor, double-click the SigEditor icon

Select the Signaling standard and click Ok.


Figure 8-52. SigEditor tool - Selecting the Signaling Standard

The Sigeditor tool main page is displayed


Figure 8-53. SigEditor tool - Main page

To edit a table, proceed as follows:


1. Click the Blank page button in the tool bar.
A list will be displayed enabling you to choose the table to edit.
300

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools SigEditor Tool

2. Select the table type in the list.


3. Click OK.
Figure 8-54. SigEditor tool - Selecting a table to edit it

1. Click the blank page to edit a table.

2. Select the table to edit.

3. Click OK.

4. Edit the fields of section 0 which is displayed in compliance with


MPEG-2 ISO 13818-1: Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and
Associated Audio: Systems standard and ETSI EN 300 468: Service
Information (SI) in DVB Systems.
5. Add descriptors to each descriptor loop via the Add Descriptor
shortcut command.
6. Choose the descriptor type in the list then click OK.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

301

Chapter 8 Tools SigEditor Tool

Figure 8-55. SigEditor tool - Adding a descriptor

8. Save

4. Select each field and edit the corresponding .

5. Right click Descriptor to select the Add Descriptor command.

6. Select the descriptor.

302

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Chapter 8 Tools SigEditor Tool

7. Edit the field(s) of the descriptor.


Figure 8-56. SigEditor tool - Editing the descriptor fields

7. Edit the descriptor.

8. Add other sections if needed via the Add Section shortcut command
attached to the root.
9. Save the table by clicking on the Save button

in the tool bar.

Figure 8-57. SigEditor tool - Adding a section

9. Save

8. Right click Table to select the Add Section command.

A file browser enables you to name the file and choose the target
directory.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

303

Chapter 8 Tools SigEditor Tool

Figure 8-58. SigEditor tool - File browser

10. Click Save command.

10. Click Save.

304

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

A
Technical Specifications
Appendix

Introduction
This chapter gives:

specifications of the device

specifications of the MPEG Encoder, MPEG Decoder and Modulator


boards

device compliance

certifications and environmental specifications

ordering guide to order the device and its options

Content of this Chapter


General Device Specifications ................................................page 306
Chassis Specifications ..............................................................page 317
Manager Board Specifications................................................page 318
MPEG Encoder Specifications.................................................page 327
MPEG Decoder Specifications.................................................page 359
DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications ..........................page 378
Standard Compliance ...............................................................page 386
Certifications and Environmental Specifications .................page 388
Ordering Guide ..........................................................................page 392

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

305

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

General Device Specifications


Electrical Specifications
Power supply - ViBE CP6000
AC Power Supply

for Base system with single AC PSU

Table A-1. AC Power Supply specifications for Base system with single AC PSU - CP6000

Standards

306

Title

Mains voltage

100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching).

Mains type

50 - 60 Hz

Max. input current

3.4A - 1.5A

Inrush current

< 14A cold start up @ 230V per unit, < 5ms

Network
connection

Type A device connected with a non-industrial IEC 60320


C14 compliant plug.

Earthing
arrangement

TN/TT
For Norway and only for this country, this device can be
connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a
voltage of 230V between phases.

Isolation class

Installation
category

II

Overcurrent
protection

Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or AC/AC PSU

Table A-2. AC Power Supply specifications (per unit) for Base system with dual AC/DC
PSU or AC/AC PSU - CP6000

Standards

Title

Mains voltage

100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching).

Mains type

50 - 60 Hz

Max. input
current.
(in normal mode)

1.75A - 0.75A (with two PSUs operating in the same


chassis).

Max. input
current.
(in default mode)

3.4A - 1.5A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is


faulty)

Inrush current

< 14A cold start up @ 230V per unit, < 5ms

Network
connection

Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320


compliant plug.

Earthing
arrangement

TN/TT
For Norway and only for this country, this device can be
connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a
voltage of 230V between phases.

Isolation class

Installation
category

II

Overcurrent
protection

Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

307

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

DC Power Supply

for Base system with single DC PSU

Table A-3. DC Power Supply specifications for Base system with single DC PSU - CP6000

Standards

Title

Input voltage

48 VDC + 20% - 15%

Current type

DC supply

Max. input current

9A - 5.6A

Network
connection

Male/female 3-pin SubD connector.

Earthing
arrangement

DCI system (DC return isolated).

Isolation class

DC network

ETS 300132-2, September 1996

Overcurrent
protection

Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset

for Base system with dual AC/DC PSU or DC/DC PSU

Table A-4. DC Power Supply specifications (per unit) for Base system with dual AC/DC
PSU or DC/DC PSU - CP6000

Standards

308

Title

Input voltage

48 VDC + 20% - 15%

Current type

DC supply

Max. input current


(in normal mode)

3.75A - 2.6A per PSU


(with two PSUs operating in the same chassis)

Max. input current


(in default mode)

9A - 5.6A for a single PSU in operation


(if one PSU is faulty)

Network
connection

Male/female 3-pin SubD connector.

Earthing
arrangement

DCI system (DC return isolated).

Isolation class

DC network

ETS 300132-2, September 1996

Overcurrent
protection

Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

Power supply - ViBE CP6100


AC Power Supply)
Table A-5. AC Power Supply specifications - CP6100

Standards

Title

Mains voltage

100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching).

Mains type

50 - 60 Hz

Max. input current

1.5A - 0.9A

Inrush current

< 14A cold start up @ 230V per unit, < 5ms

Network
connection

Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320


compliant plug.

Earthing
arrangement

TN/TT
For Norway and only for this country, this device can be
connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a
voltage of 230V between phases.

Isolation class

Installation
category

II

Overcurrent
protection

Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

309

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

Power Consumption

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 chassis are designed to operate at high power


to account for future upgrades. The maximum power required is:

CP6000 chassis: 340 W (primary at 240VAC) or 325 W (primary at


48VDC)

CP6100 chassis: 150 W (primary at 240VAC)

The maximum power required (primary) for the ViBE CP6000 / CP6100
depends on the chassis configuration:

Table A-6. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Power Consumption

Power Consumption
(at 240VAC and 20C)

Power Consumption
(at 48VDC and 20C)

CP6000 without MPEG or


Modulator board

50 W
(170 BTU/hour)

30 W
(102 BTU/hour)

CP6100 without MPEG or


Modulator board

50 W
(170 BTU/hour)

One MPEG board

50 W
(170 BTU/hour)

50W
(170 BTU/hour)

One Modulator board

25 W
(85 BTU/hour)

25W
(85 BTU/hour)

CP6000 fully equipped with


4 MPEG boards

250 W
(852 BTU/hour)

230 W
(784 BTU/hour)

CP6000 fully equipped with


2 MPEG boards

150 W
(852 BTU/hour)

Item

If a ViBE CP6000 is equipped with 2 power supplies, the required power


is divided between the 2 power supplies.

310

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

Mechanical Features
Dimensions
ViBE CP6000
ViBE CP6000 1st version

The first version of the ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform is a 1RU/19


device with the following specific Height/Width/Depth dimensions:

44.2 mm/440.4 mm/501.6 mm (+ 38.6 mm for front panel)

1.74/17.34/19.74 (+ 1.52 for front panel)

Figure A-1. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform dimensions, 1st version

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

311

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

ViBE CP6000 2nd version

The second version of the ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform is a


1RU/19 device with the following specific Height/Width/Depth
dimensions:

44 mm/440.4 mm/492 mm (+ 38.6 mm for front panel)

1.74/17.34/19.74 (+ 1.52 for front panel)

Figure A-2. ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform dimensions, 2nd version

440,4

Thread M4
depht 6mm max.

134

44,1

32,9

44

34

38,6

224
35,2

303,5

492

36

483

312

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

ViBE CP6100
The ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform is a 1RU/ 19 width device with
the following specific Height/Width/Depth dimensions:

44 mm/223 mm/416 mm

1.73/8.77/16.38

Figure A-3. ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform dimensions

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

313

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

Weight
Table A-7. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform weight

Weight (Kg)
per unit

Item
CP6000 Base system (with no MPEG or Modulator board)
CP6000-1U-AC (single PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-2AC (dual PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-1DC (single PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-2DC (dual PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-ACDC (dual PS 110-220 VAC/48 VDC)

6.4 kg (14.10 lbs)


6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
6.4 kg (14.10 lbs)
6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)
6.9 kg (15.22 lbs)

CP6100 Base system (with no MPEG or Modulator board)


CP6100-HU-AC

3.35 kg (7.4 lbs)

MPEG board

0.35 kg (0.77 lbs)

Modulator board

0.4 kg (1.10 lbs)

Blank panel (mask plate)

0.1 kg (0.22 lbs)

List of accessories delivered with the device


Cardboard packing box + CD-ROM + Quick Start guide
One Power cable if any

2.97 kg (6.55 lbs)


0.15 kg (0.33 lbs)

Example: the weight of a fully equipped platform CP6000-1U-2AC + 4


MPEG boards in its cartoon packing box + accessories + 2 cables is 11.6 kg
(25.6 lbs).

Miscellaneous
MPEG and Modulator boards are hot pluggable.

314

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

Ventilation
CP6000
Table A-8. ViBE CP6000 Platform ventilation

Built-in ventilation
system

Description and Value

Ventilation

Air circulated from right to left (as seen from front)

Ventilated air flow

80 to 160 m3/h according to the ambient


temperature (and also the number of boards)

Figure A-4. ViBE CP6000 - Cooling air flow

Air in

Air out

CP6100
Table A-9. ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform ventilation

Built-in ventilation
system

Description and Value

Ventilation

Air circulated from front to rear

Ventilated air flow

36 m3/h max according to the ambient


temperature (and also the number of boards)

Figure A-5. ViBE CP6100 - Cooling air flow

Air out

Air in

Certain precautions should be observed when mounting the device


in a rack. Refer to section Mounting in Rack on page 32.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

315

Appendix A Technical Specifications General Device Specifications

Reliability
FIT and MTBF stand for "Failures In Time" and "Mean Time Between
Failures" respectively.
Table A-10. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform FIT and MTBF

30C (86F)
Item

MTBF
(hours)

FIT
CP6000 Base system fully
equipped with 4 MPEG boards
CP6000-1U-AC
(single PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-2AC
(dual PS 110-220 VAC)
CP6000-1U-DC
(single PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-2DC
(dual PS 48 VDC)
CP6000-1U-ACDC
(dual PS 110-220 VAC/48 VDC)

40C (104F)
MTBF
(hours)

FIT

13753

72714

16285

61370

13236

75551

15778

63379

17203

58129

19745

50646

15536

64365

18078

55315

13647

73278

16189

61772

CP6100 Base system fully


equipped with 2 MPEG boards
CP6100-HU-AC
(single PS 110-220 VAC)

8053

124185

9507

105191

MPEG board

2471

404694

2985

335008

Modulator board

4000

250000

CP6000 / CP6100 Boot phase duration


After Power ON or Reboot via the Web Browser, the duration of the
CP6000 / CP6100 boot phase is 2 min. 40 s.
After Reboot via the Web Browser, the duration of an MPEG board boot
phase is 1 min. 10 s.

316

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Chassis Specifications

Chassis Specifications
CP6000 Chassis
The ViBE CP6000 chassis is composed of:

1 fixed PSU or 2 fixed PSU mounted for 1 + 1 redundancy, with diodes,


not hot swappable.
Each PSU has an attached fan and an attached power inlet.
When two PSUs are present, they share the overall chassis
consumption in normal mode. If one PSU fails, the other will supply
the whole chassis.

4 slots that can contain MPEG or Modulator boards.

1 backplane compatible with AMC standard.

A front panel with LCD and keypad.

A not extractable Manager board equipped with 2 Ethernet Ports, 1


Control Command port, 1 Sync interface, 1 GPIO interface and 1
terminal interface.

A fan unit.

CP6100 Chassis
The ViBE CP6100 chassis is composed of:

1 fixed, non-hot swap PSU.

2 slots that can contain MPEG or Modulator boards (1 Modulator


board max per chassis).

1 backplane compatible with AMC standard.

A front panel with LCD and keypad.

A not extractable Manager board equipped with 1 Control Command


port and 1 terminal interface.

A fan unit.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

317

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

Manager Board Specifications


Processing

The Manager board provides Configuration, Monitoring and


Diagnostics through:

Web GUI for configuration management and current state


browsing (ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platforms host a
Web server)

MediaFlexSUITE management

SNMP agent for alarm, statistics & monitoring collection, and


alarm traps. SNMP supported protocol version is V2c

Command Line Interface (CLI) accessible via a terminal port or


Telnet for configuration and current state browsing and
debugging

The Manager board manages the MPEG and Modulator boards:

It detects occupied slots.

It detects MPEG or Modulator board plug in. Board plug in is


dynamically managed: detection does not require a product
reboot.

It enables board power up then loads the board specific code


containing the board management resource and Encoder or
Decoder application.

The Manager board manages the IP datagrams (ViBE CP6000 only):

It aggregates the IP datagrams coming from each processing


modules.

It distributes the IP datagrams requested by each processing


modules.
Use of the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of an MPEG board and the
Ethernet interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
LAN1/LAN2 interfaces can also be used to process TS over IP and to
Control & Command the device from the same port.

318

The Manager board stores Configuration, log and firmware files.


Up to 16 configurations can be stored in the Manager board.

The Manager board stores alarms in a database.


Up to 2000 alarms can be stored in the Manager board.
The alarms can be Active alarms or Closed alarms.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

Interfaces
Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs

Connector

Description

CP6000 Manager board Interfaces (1st version)


SYN

PPS

TERM

CP6100 Manager board Interfaces

C&C

LEDs

LED

C&C
TER
SYN

PPS

LAN 1

LAN 1

LAN 2

GPIO

GPIO

LAN 2

C&C

Term

CP6000 Manager board Interfaces (2nd version)


GPIO

SYNC

GPIO

STAT
LAN 1

LAN 2

SYNC

STAT

C&C

TER

LAN 1

LAN 2

TERM

C&C

Chassis LEDs
(CP6000 1st version)

Green LED on: There is no chassis alarm.


Red LED on: There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Green LED off and Red LED off: The chassis is not powered.
Blue LED on: The chassis is rebooting.

Chassis STAT (status)


(CP6000 2nd version)

Green: There is no chassis alarm.


Red: There is at least one critical or major alarm.
Orange: The chassis is rebooting.

SYN

Reference input for synchronization (Genlock). The signal is


common to the device.
Genlock signal could be:
SD: NTSC or PAL black burst as per ITU-R BT1700.
HD Tri-Level Sync as per SMPTE-274M for 1080 and as per
SMPTE-296M for 720.

(CP6000, 1st version)

SYNC
(CP6000, 2nd version)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Reference input/output for synchronization (Genlock). The


signal is common to the device. A 75 ohms termination must be
connected at the end of the Genlock signal distribution chain.
Genlock signal could be:
SD: NTSC or PAL black burst as per ITU-R BT1700.
HD Tri-Level Sync as per SMPTE-274M for 1080 and as per
SMPTE-296M for 720.

319

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs

Connector

Description

PPS
(CP6000, 1st version)

Pulse Per Second input for connecting a GPS receiver. This


feature is not supported in the current release (v04.10).

TER
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions & CP6100)

Maintenance port (for qualified service personnel only).

C&C
(Control & Command)
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions & CP6100)

Purpose:
Ethernet link for device Configuration, Monitoring and
Diagnostics.
Features:
Type: IEEE 802.3 1000-BaseT
Connector: RJ45
Pinout:

Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Name
TDP (Transmitted Data +)
TDN (Transmitted Data -)
RDP (Received Data +)
Not connected
Not connected
RDN (Received Data -)
Not connected
Not connected

Transmit LED (Yellow)


Yellow solid
Link/Activity LED
(Green/Orange)

Status
Transmit (Tx) on
Status

Off
No link
Green solid
1000Mbps - No Activity
Green blinking
1000Mbps - Activity
Orange solid
100Mbps - No Activity
Orange blinking
100Mbps - Activity
Mixed Green/Orange solid 10Mbps - No Activity
Mixed Green/Orange
10Mbps - Activity
blinking

320

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs

Connector
LAN 1 and LAN 2
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Description
Purpose:
Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG compressed
stream input / output over IP.
Pinout and LEDs:
Refer to Table A-11 Manager board connectors and LEDs
on page 319.
Characteristics:
Standard: 1 Gbps
Operating mode: Half/Full (autonegotiation)
Auto-crossover mechanism
Input Impedance: 110
Cabling: 2 twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5, AWG
gauge 24, shielded cable
EMC and security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
IP Adaptation
MAC Layer: Compliant with IEEE 802.3-2002
Unicast and Multicast transfer modes
Protocol: IPv4
Destination IP @ can be statically set by the User
Routing: One default gateway and four static routes can
be set
Encapsulation
- MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP
- From 1 to 7 MPEG packets per IP frame
- Compliant with SMPTE 2022-2
VLAN tagging management
- VLAN tag compliant with IEEE 802.1q
- VLAN Id value: 50 to 4094
- Up to 16 VLANs per board
FEC
Forward Error Correction for transmission reliability
(FEC compliant with SMPTE 2022-1, FEC type Annex B).
2 FEC configuration modes are available:
- Basic mode with 3 protection profiles:
- Low: correction of 5 consecutive lost IP frames.
1D column FEC L = 5, D = 20, interleaving = 20.
Overhead = 1/D = 5%
- Medium: correction of 10 consecutive lost IP frames.
1D column FEC L = 10, D = 10, interleaving = 10.
Overhead = 1/D = 10%
- High: correction of 20 consecutive lost IP frames. 1D
1D column FEC L = 20, D = 5, interleaving = 5.
Overhead = 1/D = 20%
- Expert mode: The User can set the L and D
Latency: Refer to section IP Network Adaptation
Latency on page 336.

321

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

Table A-11. Manager board connectors and LEDs

Connector

GPIO
(CP6000 1st and 2nd
versions)

Description
Purpose:
GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) connector.
Connector: MICROFIT MOLEX RIGHT ANGLE 43045-1200
Pinout:

9 10 11 12

Refer to Figure Interfaces on page 319.


Pin
Name
Characteristics
number
1
BS Common
2
BS Relay Inactive Switched:
24 VDC or 24 VAC (110 VDC,
125 VAC max)
0.5 A (1 A max)
3
GPOUT_1
Output High voltage: 3.3 V
Output Low voltage: 0.1 V
4
GPIN_2
Input Low voltage: 1.1 V
Input High voltage: 5 V
Max input voltage: 12 V
5
GPIN_0
Refer to GPIN_2
6
GND
7
BS Relay Active Switched:
24VDC or 24VAC (110VDC,
125VAC max)
0.5 A (1A max)
8
GPOUT_0
Refer to GPOUT_1
9
GPIN_3
Refer to GPIN_2
10
GPIN_1
Refer to GPIN_2
11
P3V3_Out or
Max: 500mA
P12V Out
Max: 200mA
12
GND

322

Alarm signaling:
BS Relay Active activated indicates Critical alarms
GPOUT_0 activated indicates Major alarms
GPOUT_1 activated indicates Minor alarms or a warning

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

Figure A-6. CP6000 - GPIO Interface diagram

GPO_ALIM 3V3_12V
Software CDE

4
7

GPIO
Connector

P3V3

0.5A

3V

P3V3

REVISION=A

SOP6-600-1

P3V3

P12V

REVISION=A

P3V3

CDE_GP_OUT1

REVISION=A

332

REVISION=A

220

12
REVISION=A

0.2A

REVISION=A

SOIC8

REVISION=A

F720

1
REVISION=A

OPTO1

220

REVISION=A

P3V3

CDE_GP_OUT0

REVISION=A

332

SOIC8

6
5

F725

3
REVISION=A

220

REVISION=A

BS_RELAY_INACTIVE
BS_RELAY_ACTIVE

P3V3
REVISION=A

470

4.7K

BS_COMMON

REVISION=A

P3V3

+
3V

3
1K
1%

ILD223

REVISION=A

SOIC8

F730

1
REVISION=A

220

REVISION=A

1%

5
10
4
9
3
8
2
7

8
2
4
7

0.5A

OUT

GP_OUT0

GP_IN1

REVISION=A

GP_IN3
GP_OUT1

0.2A

REVISION=A

400PF
14V

GPIO_GP_IN2

0.2A

GP_IN2

11

REVISION=A

OPTO1

REVISION=A

REVISION=A

OUT

220

REVISION=A

ILD223

REVISION=A

REVISION=A

GP_IN1

REVISION=A

GPIO_GP_IN1

CDE_BS

GP_IN0
P3V3

SOP6-600-1

P3V3

GP_IN0

0.2A

REVISION=A

400PF
14V

1K
1%

4
REVISION=A

OUT

0.2A

ILD223

REVISION=A

GPIO_GP_IN0

1K
1%

GPO_ALIM

REVISION=A

GP_IN2

0.2A
400PF
14V

REVISION=A

REVISION=A

P3V3

GPIO_GP_IN3
OUT

1K
1%

ILD223

SOIC8

REVISION=A

6
5

F735

3
REVISION=A

220

REVISION=A

GP_IN3

0.2A
400PF
14V

REVISION=A

REVISION=A

TS over IP and Control Command on Same Port


LAN 1 and LAN 2 interfaces can be used to carry the TS signal and
control the equipment at the same time. In this case TS over IP and C&C
share the same link but C&C is not included in the TS.
Figure A-7. CP6000 - TS Over IP and Control Command on Same Port configuration

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

323

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

License management
Licensing is based on the codec used.

If an application focuses on MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0, it will require the


corresponding license (at least CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2SD-420 license
for the encoder and CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2SD-420 license for the
decoder)

If an application focuses on MPEG-4 SD 4:2:2, it will require the


corresponding license (at least CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4SD-422 license
for the encoder and CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4SD-422 license for the
decoder)

A license can include several Formats / Standards / Video profiles as


indicated in the table below:
Table A-12. Profiles inclusion where xxx= ENC for encoder and DEC for decoder
Formats, Standards & Video Profiles

Code

MPEG-2
SD
4:2:0

MPEG-4 AVC
HD

4:2:2

4:2:0

SD
4:2:2

4:2:0
8 bits

HD
4:2:2
8 bits

4:2:0
8 bits

4:2:2
8 bits

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2SD-420

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2SD-422

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2HD-420

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP2HD-422

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4SD-420

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4SD-422

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-420

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-8b

CP6x00-LIC-xxx-MP4HD-10b

4:2:2
10 bits

X
X
X

X
X

X
X

This means that if an application focuses on MPEG-4 SD 4:2:2 8 bits


at a given time and MPEG-4 HD 4:2:2 8 bits at another time, only
CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-8b license for the encoder and
CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-8b license for the decoder will be required
to satisfy both needs (at different times).

324

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

Licenses are managed as a collection attached to the rack. License is


dynamically allocated to a particular channel when an MPEG board is
configured.
This license management method allows having a low spare cost,
because of licenses are not attached to the spare boards. Coupled with
the unique type of board, it allows to have a very flexible equipment.
Each MPEG board can be configured as an encoder or a decoder at
runtime. The requested licenses are allocated according to the
configuration. They are attached to the slots the MPEG boards are
attached to and not to the MPEG boards themselves.
Figure A-8. License management - Licenses are managed as a collection attached to the
rack.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

325

Appendix A Technical Specifications Manager Board Specifications

The diagram below shows a ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform used for
3 encoding channels and 1 decoding channel. The rack includes 3 MPEG
boards without audio interface.

Each of the two first encoders (in the first MPEG board) encodes two
MPEG-1 Layer II stereo channels. Two MPEG-1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC
stereo audios licenses are included in each video license.

The third encoder in the second MPEG board encodes 4 audio MPEG-1
Layer II stereo channels. It requires two additional audio stereo
licenses.

The decoder in the third MPEG board is using the MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0
decoding license so the MPEG-4 SD/HD decoding license is not used
in this example.

Figure A-9. License management - Example


.

326

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

MPEG Encoder Specifications


An MPEG Encoder is the combination of one MPEG board and one
encoding software. There are 2 types of MPEG board:

The Dual Channels MPEG board:


This MPEG board can encode up to 2 channels SD or HD.

The Single Channel MPEG board:


This MPEG board can encode 1 channel SD or HD. It is fitted with an
audio connector.

Encoder Block Diagram


Dual Channels MPEG Encoder Board
A Dual Channels MPEG Encoder board is fitted with 5 IO interfaces (IO1
to IO5) and 2 LAN interfaces.
The IO1 and IO3 interfaces are the nominal inputs of the encoding
channel 1 and channel 2.
The IO2 and IO4 interfaces can be configured as SDI backup inputs of the
encoding channel 1 and channel 2 or as ASI outputs.
The IO5 interface can be configured as ASI output or as ASI input (ASI to
IP gateway feature).
ASI outputs are not assigned to a dedicated encoding channel. SPTS or
MPTS can be delivered on those outputs.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP outputs of the encoding channel
1 and channel 2.
Figure A-10. Dual Channels MPEG Encoder board block diagram

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

327

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Single Channel MPEG Encoder Board


A Single Channel MPEG Encoder board is fitted with 3 IO interfaces (IO1,
IO2 and IO5), 1 audio interface and 2 LAN interfaces.
The IO1 interface is the nominal input of the encoding channel.
The IO2 interface can be configured as SDI backup input of the encoding
channel or as ASI output.
The IO5 interface is can be configured as ASI output or ASI input (ASI to
IP gateway feature).
The audio interface can be configured as analog or digital audio inputs.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP outputs of the encoding
channel.
Figure A-11. Single Channel MPEG Encoder board block diagram

328

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Interface Specifications
Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications

Connector

Description
Dual channels MPEG board
LAN 1

MPEG

IO1
SDI input
main

IO2

SDI input
backup or
ASI output

Encoder 1

IO3
SDI input
main

IO4

SDI input
backup or
ASI output

LAN 2

IO5
Ethernet 1
output

ASI input
or
ASI output

Ethernet 2
output

Encoder 2

Single channel MPEG board


LAN 1

Audio

MPEG

IO1
Audio inputs

LED

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

SDI input
main

IO2

SDI input
backup or
ASI output

LAN 2

IO5
ASI input
or
ASI output

Ethernet 1
output

Ethernet 2
output

Red LED on: The board is powered up and there is at least one
board alarm.
Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board
alarm.

329

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications

Connector
Single channel MPEG board:
Audio

Description

Purpose:
Analog or digital audio inputs
Connector: SUBD-HD26 female
Pinout:

Digital mode
Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Clock GND

10 Clock Out

AES4 Out -

11 AES4 Out +

AES3 Out GND 12 AES3 Out -

AES2 Out -

AES1 Out GND 14 AES1 Out -

AES4 In -

15 AES4 In +

23 AES4 In GND

AES3 In GND

16 AES3 In -

24 AES3 In +

AES2 In -

17 AES2 In +

25 AES2 In GND

AES1 In GND

18 AES1 In -

26 AES1 In +

13 AES2 Out +

19 AES4 Out GND


20 AES3 Out +
21 AES2 Out GND
22 AES1 Out +

Note: The shaded pins are not used in encoder mode.


Analog mode
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Signal
Clock GND
Right Ch2
Out Left Ch2
Out GND
Right Ch1
Out Left Ch1
Out GND
Right Ch2
In Left Ch2
In GND
Right Ch1
In Left Ch1
In GND

Pin

Signal

10 Clock Out
Right Ch2
11
Out +
Left Ch2
12
Out Right Ch1
13
Out +
Left Ch1
14
Out Right Ch2
15
In +
Left Ch2
16
In Right Ch1
17
In +
Left Ch1
18
In -

Pin

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Signal
Right Ch2
Out GND
Left Ch2
Out +
Right Ch1
Out GND
Left Ch1
Out +
Right Ch2
In GND
Left Ch2
In +
Right Ch1
In GND
Left Ch1
In +

Note: The shaded pins are not used in encoder mode.


A breakout cable can be fitted as an option. Refer to section
Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.

330

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications

Connector
Single channel MPEG board:
Audio
(continued)

Description

Specifications:

In Digital mode

4 balanced AES inputs:


Digital audio input signal: AES-2003, Tech 3250-E
Input impedance: 110 20%
Input return loss: > 20 dB (100 kHz-128FS)
Differential voltage range: 200 mV to 10 V p to p
Commons mode range: 10 V, 50 to 20 kHz
Supported frequency: 32, 44.1, 48, 96 kHz
Supported sample width: 16, 20, 24 bits
1 AES/EBU (48 kHz) output for synchronizing an external
audio encoder

In Analog mode

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

2 balanced analog stereo inputs:


Analog Audio input
- Input impedance: > 22 k 20%
- Level for full-scale output: 0 to + 24 dBu adjustable in 1
dBu step
- Common mode input voltage: 20 V max
- Differential DC: 0.25 V max
- Common mode rejection ratio: > 72 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Analog Audio input conversion performance
- Sampling rate: 48 kHz synchronized with the video
clock
- Signal to noise ratio: > 102 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz, > 105 dB
A weighted @ 24 dBu
- THD + noise: < -75 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel crosstalk: < -95 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel gain mismatch: < 0.2 dB
- Inter channel phase mismatch: < 1
- Inter modulation distortion: < -100 dB CCIF two-tone
test, 19 & 20 kHz tones
- Frequency response: 0.1 dB relative to 1 kHz, 20 Hz
to 20 kHz
- DC offset: 1 mV
- Emphasis: No pre-emphasis or de-emphasis
- Output resolution: 20 bits
- Effective number of bits: 17 bits

331

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications

Connector
Dual channels MPEG board:
IO1 - IO3
Single channel MPEG board:
IO1 only

Description

332

Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD main inputs for each encoding channel:
IO1 : Nominal input for encoding channel 1
IO3 : Nominal input for encoding channel 2
Characteristics:
Connector: BNC 75
Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
Input signal level: 800 mVp-p 10% max
Return loss: -17 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz and -13 dB
from 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz
Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 292M and DVB ASI
The SDI input interface supports the following cable length
depending of the input format
380 m of Belden 1694A cable for SD-SDI (270Mb/s)
180 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s)
120 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (3.0 Gb/s)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications

Connector
Dual channels MPEG board:
IO2 - IO4

Description

Single channel MPEG board:


IO2 only

IO connectors configured as SDI inputs:


Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD backup inputs for each encoding channel:
- IO2 : Backup input for encoding channel 1
- IO4 : Backup input for encoding channel 2
Characteristics:
- Connector: BNC 75
- Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
- Input signal level: 800 mVp-p 10% max
- Return loss: -17 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz and -13 dB
from 1.5 GHz to 3.0 GHz
- Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 292M and DVB ASI
The SDI input interface supports the following cable
length depending of the input format
- 380 m of Belden 1694A cable for SD-SDI (270 Mb/s)
- 180 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (1.5 Gb/s)
- 120 m of Belden 1694A cable for HD-SDI (3.0 Gb/s)
IO connectors configured as ASI outputs:
Purpose:
IO2 and IO4 provide the encoded TS from channels 1 and
2.
Characteristics:
- Connector : Female 75BNC
- TS output compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI)
- ASI Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max
- MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
- TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes
- Mode: Data burst or Data packet
IO2 and IO4 can not be configured as ASI outputs
if the SDI Input Redundancy feature is used. Refer
to section SDI input redundancy on page 349.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

333

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications

Connector
Dual channels MPEG board
and Single channel MPEG
board:
IO5

Description
Purpose:
IO5 provides the encoded TS.
Characteristics:
Connector: Female 75BNC
TS output compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI)
ASI bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max
MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes
Mode: Data burst or Data packet

- IO5 can be used as ASI input to add an external


component to a service. Refer to section ASI Input
for external components on page 351.
- If the ASI to IP gateway optional feature is used,
IO5 is the ASI input. Refer to section ASI to IP
Gateway on page 352.

334

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-13. MPEG Encoder board interface specifications

Connector
LAN 1 and LAN 2

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Description
Purpose:
Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG compressed
stream output over IP which can be an SPTS or MPTS. Both
LAN are active simultaneously.
The IP streams of the MPEG board can be routed to the
LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the Manager board. The use of the
LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the MPEG board and the LAN
interfaces of the Manager board is exclusive.
Pinout and LEDs: Refer to Table A-11 Manager board
connectors and LEDs on page 319.
Characteristics:
Standard: 100/1000 Mbps (autosensing)
Operating mode: Half/Full (autonegotiation)
Auto-crossover mechanism
Input Impedance: 110
Cabling: 2 twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5, AWG
gauge 24, shielded cable
EMC and security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
IP Adaptation
MAC Layer: Compliant with IEEE 802.3-2002
Unicast and Multicast transfer modes
Protocol: IPv4
Destination IP @ can be statically set by the User
Routing: One default gateway and four static routes can
be set
Encapsulation
- MPEG/UDP/IP or MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP.
- From 1 to 7 MPEG packets per IP frame
- Compliant with SMPTE 2022-2
VLAN tagging management
- VLAN tag compliant with IEEE 802.1q
- VLAN Id value: 50 to 4094
- Up to 4 VLANs (1 per IP Tx) per board
FEC
Forward Error Correction for transmission reliability (FEC
compliant with SMPTE 2022-1, FEC type Annex B).
2 FEC configuration modes are available:
- Basic mode with 3 protection profiles:
- Low: Correction of 5 consecutive lost IP frames.
1D column FEC L = 5, D = 20, interleaving = 20.
Overhead = 1/D = 5%
- Medium: Correction of 10 consecutive lost IP frames.
1D column FEC L = 10, D = 10, interleaving = 10.
Overhead = 1/D = 10%
- High: Correction of 20 consecutive lost IP frames. FEC
1D column FEC L = 20, D = 5, interleaving = 5.
Overhead = 1/D = 20%
- Expert mode: The User can set the L and D values
Latency: Refer to section IP Network Adaptation
Latency on page 336.

335

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

IP Network Adaptation Latency


Sources of latency are:

FEC calculation delay in transmitter

Reordering

FEC packet loss recovery

Jitter absorption delay

End-to-end delay introduced by FEC processing


The end-to-end delay introduced by FEC processing (including
reordering) varies with TS rate. When the frame size is set to n
packets/frame, the time delay (expressed in milliseconds) is:

32 + 2LD n 188 8
EndtoEndDelayForFEC = --------------------------------------------------------------------- TSRateInKbitPerSecond
L is the number of columns and D is the number of rows of the FEC
matrix.
Delay introduced by reordering
The equivalent delay when not using FEC processing only includes
reordering: R frames (where R = 10 in the CP6000). When the frame size
is set to n packets/frame, this produces a time delay (expressed in
milliseconds) of:

R n 188 8
DelayForReordering = --------------------------------------------------------------------- TSRateInKbitPerSecond
Delay introduced by jitter absorption
The delay introduced by jitter absorption does not change with TS rate.
IPDVInMilliseconds is the IP absorption buffer. Delay introduced by jitter
absorption (expressed in milliseconds) is:

8 IPDVInMilliseconds
DelayForJitterAbsorption = ---------------------------------------------------------------- + 3milli sec onds
7
Total end-to-end delay
The total end-to-end delay is equal to

336

EndtoEndDelayForFEC
processing is enabled.

DelayForReordering + DelayForJitterAbsorption when FEC processing


is disabled.

DelayForJitterAbsorption

when

FEC

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

1st Example: End-to-End Delay with FEC processing Tx + Rx


where

Number of packets per IP Packet is n = 7

Number of rows in the FEC matrix is D = 10

Number of columns in the FEC matrix is L = 10

Transport Stream Bitrate is TSRateInKbitPerSecond = 40 000 kbps

IP absorption buffer is IPDVInMilliseconds = 20 ms

Reordering buffer size is R = 10 IP frames

32 + 2 10 10 7 188 8
EndtoEndDelayForFEC = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = 61milli sec onds
40000
8 20
DelayForJitterAbsorption = --------------- + 3 = 26milli sec onds
7
The total end-to-end delay is equal to 61 ms + 26 ms = 87 ms
2nd Example: End-to-End Delay without FEC processing
where

Number of packets per IP Packet is n = 7

Transport Stream Bitrate is TSRateInKbitPerSecond = 40 000 kbps

IP absorption buffer is IPDVInMilliseconds = 20 ms

Reordering buffer size is R = 10 IP frames

10 7 188 8
DelayForReordering = --------------------------------------- = 3milli sec onds
40000

8 20
DelayForJitterAbsorption = --------------- + 3 = 26milli sec onds
7

The total end-to-end delay is equal to 3 ms + 26 ms = 29 ms

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

337

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

MPEG system layer


Table A-14. MPEG system layer specifications

Parameter
System layer

Description

Additional service component


formats
(VBI, ANC data)

DVB compliant ETSI TS 101 154 v1.8.1

Signaling

DVB Signaling

MPEG TS number

Per MPEG encoder board


Dual channels MPEG board:
1 MPTS (Channel 1 and Channel 2) and 2 SPTS
(Channel 1 / Channel 2)
Single channel MPEG board:
1 SPTS

MPEG TS bitrate

256 kbit/s to 400 Mbit/s per TS in 1 kbit/s


increments. The bitrate can be set manually or
computing automatically by the Encoder (s) or the
Modulator connected to the TS.

Multiplexing

The following components are multiplexed:


Video
Audio
VBI
Signaling

Component PID allocation

PSI/SI rule compliant


In compliance with WBU_ISOG recommendation,
a PID is automatically allocated to a component by
the encoder but it can be set manually.

Number of services and


components generated

338

MPEG-4: ISO/IEC 13818-1 & Amendment 3:


Transport of AVC video data over ITU-T Rec
H.222.0 compliant
MPEG-2: ISO/IEC 13818-1

Services: Up to 2 per encoding channel


Video component: 1 per encoding channel
Audio components: Up to 8 per encoding
channel
Ancillary component: Up to 2 per encoding
channel
VBI component (SD Video Encoding): Up to 4
per encoding channel

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Video Processing
Input video encoding formats
Table A-15. Input video encoding formats

Frame Rate (Fps)

Vertical Resolution

Horizontal Resolution

25 / 29.97 / 30

1080i

1920

50 / 59.94 / 60

720p

1280

25

576i

720

29.97

480i

720

Horizontal Picture Rescaling


The Horizontal Picture Rescaling feature is used to manage very low
encoding rates. It consists of activating a low pass filter to reduce the
number of active pixels per line according to the input format.
Horizontal Picture Rescaling can be set by the User.
Table A-16. Horizontal Picture Rescaling

Input Formats

Available Horizontal Resolutions

1920 x 1080i

1920, 1440, 1280, 960

1280 x 720p

1280, 960, 640

720 x 576i

720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352

720 x 480i

720, 704, 640, 544, 528, 480, 352

Picture Filtering
The Picture Filtering feature is used to manage very low encoding rates.
It consists of decreasing picture complexity by activating a filter to
reduce the high frequency spatial texture.
Picture Filtering can be set to None, Weak or Strong by the User.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

339

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Video processing
Table A-17. MPEG-2, Video Encoding Profiles /Levels

Video Format
MPEG- 2 Profile

MPEG-2 SD

MPEG-2 HD

4:2:0, 8 bits, MP

MP@ML

MP@HL

4:2:0, 8 bits, HP

HP@ML

HP@HL

4:2:0, 8 bits, 422P

422P@ML

422P@HL

4:2:2, 8 bits, 422P

422P@ML

422P@HL

Table A-18. MPEG-4 (H264), Video Encoding Profiles /Levels

Video Format
MPEG-4
(H264) Profile

340

MPEG-4 (H264)
SD

MPEG-4 (H264)
720P

MPEG-4 (H264)
1080i

4:2:0, 8 bits,
CBP

CBP@L3.0 (< 10 Mbit/s)


CBP@L3.1 (> 10 Mbit/s,
< 14 Mbit/s)
CBP@L3.2 (> 14 Mbit/s,
< 20 Mbit/s)

CBP@L3.2 (< 20 Mbit/s)


CBP@L4.1 (> 20 Mbit/s,
< 50 Mbits)

4:2:0, 8 bits,
MP

MP@L3.0 (< 10 Mbit/s)


MP@L3.1 (> 10 Mbit/s,
< 14 Mbit/s)
MP@L3.2 (> 14 Mbit/s,
< 20 Mbit/s)

MP@L3.2 (< 20Mbit/s)


MP@L4.1 (> 20 Mbit/s,
< 50 Mbits)

MP@L4.0 ( <20 Mbits)


MP@L4.1 (>20 Mbits,
< 50 Mbits)

4:2:0, 8 bits,
HiP

HIP@L3.0 (< 12.5 Mbit/s)


HIP@L3.1 (> 12.5 Mbit/s,
< 17.5 Mbit/s)
HIP@L3.2 (> 17.5 Mbit/s,
< 25 Mbit/s)

HIP@L3.2 (< 25Mbit/s)


HIP@L4.1 (> 25 Mbit/s,
< 62.5 Mbits)

HiP@L4.0 ( <25 Mbits)


HiP@L4.1 ( >25 Mbits,
< 62.5 Mbits)

4:2:0, 10 bits,
Hi10P

HI10P@L3.0 (< 30 Mbit/s)


HI10P@L3.1 (> 30 Mbit/s,
<42 Mbit/s)
HI10P@L3.2 (> 42 Mbit/s,
<60 Mbit/s)

HI10P@L3.2 (< 60 Mbit/s)


HI10P@L4.1 (> 60 Mbit/s,
< 80 Mbits)

Hi10P@L4.0 ( <60
Mbits)
Hi10P@L4.1 ( >60
Mbits, < 80 Mbits)

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-18. MPEG-4 (H264), Video Encoding Profiles /Levels

Video Format
MPEG-4
(H264) Profile

MPEG-4 (H264)
SD

MPEG-4 (H264)
720P

MPEG-4 (H264)
1080i

4:2:2, 8 bits,
Hi422P

HI422P@L3.0 (<40 M/bit/s) HI422P@L3.2 (< 80 Mbit/s)


HI422P@L3.1 (> 40 Mbit/s,
< 56 Mbit/s)
HI422P@L3.2 (> 56 Mbit/s,
<80 Mbit/s)

Hi422P@L4.0 ( <80
Mbits)

4:2:2, 10 bits,
Hi422P

HI422P@L3.0 (<40 M/bit/s) HI422P@L3.2 (< 80 Mbit/s)


HI422P@L3.1 (> 40 Mbit/s,
< 56 Mbit/s)
HI422P@L3.2 (> 56 Mbit/s,
< 80 Mbit/s)

Hi422P@L4.0 ( <80
Mbits)

Refer to section Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations on page 403.


Table A-19. MPEG Encoder board, Video processing specifications

Parameter

Description

Video Bitrates
SD

HD

Min
Max
Min
(kbit/s) (kbit/s) (kbit/s)

Max
(kbit/s)

MPEG-4 4:2:0 8 bits

650

25000

650

62500

MPEG-4 4:2:0 10 bits

650

60000

650

80000

MPEG-4 4:2:2 8 bits

650

80000

650

80000

MPEG-4 4:2:2 10 bits

650

80000

650

80000

MPEG-2 4:2:0 8 bits

650

15000

650

80000

MPEG-2 4:2:2 8 bits

650

20000

650

80000

In 1 kbit/s steps. Refer to section Video Profiles & Bitrates


recommendations on page 403.
Video bitrate change is done without rebooting the encoder.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

341

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-19. MPEG Encoder board, Video processing specifications

Parameter
GOP

Description

GOP size: 1 N 300.


An automatic GOP size mode is available.
P picture period: 1 M 3.
An automatic P picture period mode is available.
Low Delay

Standard Delay

Auto

P (Continuous Decoder
Refresh) / Infinite

Auto I, B, P
frame / Infinite

I-Only

IP / lenght up to 300

IP / lenght up to 300

IBP

N/A

IBP / lenght up to 300

IBBP

N/A

IBBP / lenght up to 300

IBBBP

N/A

IBBBP / lenght up to 300

IP

Notes:
- I frame is systematically inserted on scene cut to optimize
video quality.
- Closed GOP mode is available: This mode is used to break
temporal dependency between GOPs.
Picture Structure

Standard Delay
Interlaced input standard: MBAFF (MPEG-4 only) / Field
Progressive input standard: Frame
Low Delay: Field

Entropy Coding
(MPEG-4)

CABAC, CAVLC

Miscellaneous
features

End to End Delay

Scene cut detection


Fade detection
If there is no input signal, the Encoder can automatically:
Generate a Black Pattern, Bar Pattern or Moving Color
Pattern or
Disable the service (service bitrate is null, there is no
signaling and the TS bitrate for this service is null) or
stop the video (video component bitrate is null,
signaling and all other components are present)

Two compression delays are available:


Standard Delay: 770ms (encoding delay: about 670 ms)
Low Delay: 270ms (encoding delay: about 170 ms)
Delays are fixed whatever codec or bitrate used.
* Encoding processing is always dual-pass whatever the
compression delay selected.

342

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Audio processing
Table A-20. MPEG Encoder board, Audio processing specifications

Parameter
Source

Description

Capabilities

A Video channel encodes:


Dual channels MPEG board
(audio input = SDI):
Stereo (2.0) components: Up to 8 or
Surround (5.1) components: Up to 2 or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1)
components: Up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)
1 Dolby E / Uncompressed stream can be
transmitted instead of a stereo stream.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Dual channels MPEG board:


Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M
is extracted from the SDI signal.
Single channel MPEG board:
Audio
embedded in accordance with
SMPTE 272M is extracted from the SDI signal.
Analog Audio or Digital Audio from Audio
connector.

Single channel MPEG board):


Stereo (2.0) components: from SDI (up to 8) or
AES (up to 4) or Analog (up to 2) or
Surround (5.1) components: from SDI (up to 2)
or AES (up to 1) or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1)
components: from SDI (up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1))
or AES (up to 1 (2.0) and 1 (5.1)).
1 Uncompressed stream can be transmitted instead
of a stereo stream from SDI or AES or Analog.
1 Dolby E stream can be transmitted instead of a
stereo stream from SDI or AES.
The mix of SDI, AES and Analog inputs is
authorized.

343

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-20. MPEG Encoder board, Audio processing specifications

Parameter
Encoding formats and bitrates

344

Description
MPEG-1 Layer II
Mono (1.0) bitrate (kbit/s): 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96,
112, 160, 192
Stereo (2.0) or Dual Channel bitrate (kbit/s): 64,
96, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384
AAC-LC*
Stereo (2.0) or Dual Channel bitrate (kbit/s): 32,
48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256,
320, 384
Surround (5.1) bitrate (kbit/s): 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 576, 640
HE-AAC*
Stereo (2.0) or Dual Channel bitrate (kbit/s): 32,
48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192
Surround (5.1) bitrate (kbit/s): 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 576
HE-AAC v2*
Stereo (2.0) bitrate (kbit/s): 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96
Dolby Digital (AC3) (option)
Stereo (2.0) bitrate (kbit/s): 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 576, 640
Surround (5.1) bitrate (kbit/s): 224, 256, 320,
384, 448, 576, 640
Uncompressed compliant with SMPTE 302M-2002
(16, 20 bits@48KHz modes)
Audio Pass-thru (for precompressed audio)
MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0)
AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC v2 (2.0)
Dolby E
Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1)
At the Encoder input, the audio signal must be
compliant with SMPTE 337M-2010.
* With MPEG-2 / MPEG-4 Syntax and ADTS / LOAS
Encapsulation
HE-AAC and HE-AAC v2 are not available in Low
Delay compression mode

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-20. MPEG Encoder board, Audio processing specifications

Parameter

Description

Audio Auto configuration

In Audio auto configuration mode the Audio encoder


detects the audio input format (PCM or
precompressed). The Operator sets an audio
configuration for PCM audio for each audio channel.
When PCM audio is detected the PCM audio encoding
parameters are applied to encode the audio, when
precompressed audio is detected Pass-thru mode is
used to encode it.
Supported precompressed formats:
MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0)
AAC-LC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC (2.0, 5.1)
HE-AAC v2 (2.0)
Dolby E
Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1)

Miscellaneous features

Multi Audio Frame per PES mode in Standard End


to End Delay only.
This mode allows to reduce the audio PES bitrate
overhead. In the Multi Audio Frame mode:

Multiple Audio frames are transported in a


TS packet.

The number of audio frames in a PES payload


is not a integer value, it is between 8 and 9
The start of audio frame is not aligned with
frame header
The PTS refers to the first access unit
commencing in the PES packet
If there is no audio input signal, the Encoder will
generate an audio component containing a Sine
Tone (400 Hz or 1000 Hz) or silence.
Audio Delay can be set from -100 to 400 ms (step
1 ms) to adjust lipsync.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

345

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

VBI/ANC processing
VBI processing (SD Format)
Table A-21. SD VBI processing

Data
Teletext

Transparent
lines (Y + C)

VBI signal
Transport

Possible
lines

ETS 300 706


ETSI EN 300 472
DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775

50 Hz only
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335

DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775

Monochrome
lines (Y)a

DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775

VITC
(Time Code)b

IEC 60461
SMPTE 12M-1
ISO/IEC 14496-10

AFDc
(Active Format
Description)

First part of the SMPTE


RP186 Video Index
ETSI EN 101 154

WSS

ETS 300 294

Max. lines
processed
/ frame

50 Hz
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335
59.94 Hz
from 10 to 21
from 273 to 284

50 Hz
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335
59.94 Hz
from 10 to 21
from 273 to 284

32

50 Hz
from 6 to 22
from 319 to 335
59.94 Hz
from 10 to 21
from 273 to 284

50 Hz
11 and 324
59.94 Hz
14 and 277

1/2 line 23

16

59.94 Hz only
from 21 or 284

DVB A056
ETSI EN 301 775

346

VPS

ETS 300 231


ETSI EN 301 775

CC
(Closed caption)

EIA-608
ATSC A/53

Between CP6000 Encoder and Decoder only. Use the Transparent mode to transport Monochrome Lines.

Between CP6000 Encoder and Decoder only. Use the Transparent mode to transport VITC.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

- Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9): The User can select the Picture Format 4:3 or 16:9.
- Active Format Description (AFD) information: The User can select the source of the AFD information (Active
format (letter box ...) and Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9)) between incoming ancillary AFD (SMPTE 2016-3) or incoming
Video Index (SMPTE RP186).
- UK Video Index is supported.

VBI data can be sent by a maximum of 4 PIDs per encoding channel

ANC processing (SD and HD Format)


Table A-22. ANC processing

VBI signal
Transport

Data
Transparent mode

Specification

SMPTE 2038
All the VANC are transported in the
EN 301 775 Transport Stream.
SMPTE RDD-11
All the SDI HD ANC are transported in the
EN 301 775 Transport Stream.

OP47 Subtitles

SMPTE RDD-8
DID = 143h
EN 301 775 SDID = 102h
The OP-47 Subtitling Distribution Packet
(SDP) data is transported in a dedicated
PID.

Time Code (ATC)

SMPTE 12M-2

AFD/BARa

SMPTE 2016
DID = 41h
ETSI TS 101 54 SDID = 05h

CC
(Closed caption)

EIA 608

DID = 61h
ATSC A/53D SDID = 02h

DTVCC
(Digital Television
Closed caption)

EIA 708

DID = 61h
ATSC A/53D SDID = 01h

DID = 60h
SDID = 60h

- Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9): The User can select the Picture Format 4:3 or 16:9.
- Active Format Description (AFD) information: The User can select the source of the AFD information
(Active format (letter box ...) and Aspect Ratio (4:3, 16:9)) between incoming ancillary AFD (SMPTE 2016-3) or
incoming Video Index (SMPTE RP186).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

ANC data can be sent by a maximum of 2 PIDs per encoding


channel.
In the release 04.10 SDI HD ANC can be sent in RDD-11 format by
a maximum of 1 PID per encoding channel.

347

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Automatic Encoding configuration


Automatic Encoding configuration according to the input video format
feature is available.
The SDI incoming format is automatically analyzed and the pre-defined
Encoding profile is automatically applied based on the detected input
format.
Encoding profile is included in each configuration (not global). This
implementation choice allows having self contained configuration that
can be applied to any equipment.
For example when an SDI HD 1080i signal is detected the HD 1080i profile
is applied automatically, and when the incoming signal changes from HD
1080i to SD 576i, the SD 576i profile is activated without user
intervention.The decoder automatically detects the new format and
changes accordingly without User intervention if encoding format does
not change when By PID mode is selected as Service selection mode
in the decoder.
The maximum number of profiles is 24.

Input formats supported:

720 x 576i @ 25 Hz, 720 x 576i @ 29.97 Hz

1920 x 1080i @ 25 Hz, 1920 x 1080i @ 29.97 Hz, 1920 x 1080i @ 30 Hz

1280 x 720p @ 50 Hz, 1280 x 720p @ 59.94 Hz, 1280 x 720p @ 60Hz

Figure A-12. Automatic Encoding configuration

348

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

SDI input redundancy


Automatic SDI input redundancy feature is available (1 nominal input
and 1 backup input per channel).
The Input backup mode can be selected between:

Auto Switchback on nominal faultless: When no signal is received on


the nominal SDI input, the input switches automatically to the backup
SDI input. When a signal is received on the nominal SDI Input, the
system switches automatically to this nominal input.
The time to switch from nominal SDI input to backup SDI input when
no signal is received can be set from 0 to 30 s.
The time to switch from backup SDI input to nominal SDI input when
a signal is received on the nominal SDI input can be set from 0 to 30 s.

Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When no stream is received on


the nominal SDI input, the input switches automatically to the backup
SDI input. The system stays on the backup SDI input until a redundant
fault occurs.

Figure A-13. Nominal and backup SDI inputs, SDI mode

Dual channels MPEG board

Single channel MPEG board


LAN 1

Audio

MPEG

IO1

Nominal
SDI in

IO2

LAN 2

IO5

Backup
SDI in

SDI input redundancy feature is not available if IO2 / IO4 interfaces


are configured as ASI outputs.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

349

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Scrambling
Scrambling is an optional feature. 1 option must be installed per MPEG
board and enable multiple services scrambling.
This feature is used for BISS mode 1 and BISS E scrambling:

BISS mode 1, DVB scrambling. The components are scrambled with a


fixed control word (CW) derived from an unscrambled session word
of 12 characters (SW). The Session Word is sent to the Encoder using
the Web Interface.

BISS E, DVB scrambling. The components are scrambled with a fixed


control word (CW) derived from a encrypted session word of 16
characters (ESW). This scrambling mode operates with a Injected ID
or an Buried ID (BISS E Buried mode):

BISS E Injected mode: The Injected ID (16 characters) is sent to


the Encoder using the Web Interface.

BISS E Buried mode: The Buried ID is set at the factory and can
not be changed or displayed. The Buried ID is the same for all
the CP6000 Encoders / Decoders.
The BISS E Buried scrambling mode should only be used
between CP6000 Encoders / Decoders.
When a service is scrambled, scrambling is performed on all the
service components.

350

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

ASI Input for external components


IO5 can be used as an ASI input to inject external components (eg DVB
Subtitle components).
These external components are added to the output services.
Figure A-14. ASI Input for external DVB Subtitle components

Table A-23. IO5 used as ASI input specifications

Parameter
Capability

Characteristics

Dual channels MPEG board


Up to 8 external components can be extracted from
the IO5 ASI input and added to the output encoded
services (up to 4 components per service).
An external component can be added to only one
output encoded service.
Single channel MPEG board
Up to 4 external components can be extracted from
the IO5 ASI inputs and added to the output encoded
service.

Bitrate

Min bitrate: 15 kbit/s

Synchronizing

Some external components require to be synchronous (DVB


sub) with the incoming SDI video signal some other it is not
required.

Signaling

For each component to be extracted from the ASI input, the


User gives the components PID values (In and Out from 33
to 3190), Stream type (used to create signaling tables). The
User also has the option of creating a specific descriptor for
each component, in order to add it to the signaling tables.

Scrambling

If the output encoded service is scrambled, any external


component added to this service is scrambled.

IO5 cannot be used as ASI input for External components if the "ASI
to IP Gateway" feature is used. Refer to section ASI to IP Gateway
on page 352.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

351

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

ASI to IP Gateway
Refer also to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376.
ASI to IP gateway is an optional feature. It allows an MPEG Transport
stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and a remote
CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported transparently and
bit-accurately. Two options must be installed (1 per MPEG Encoder board
and 1 per MPEG Decoder board).
In the MPEG Encoder board the feature allows a TS stream to be
transported from an ASI input to an IP output.
Figure A-15. ASI to IP Gateway feature. Example: MPEG board without audio interface

IP to ASI Gateway feature


refer to section IP to ASI Gateway on page 376

ASI to IP Gateway feature

Specifications
ASI to IP gateway runs simultaneously with the video encoder(s).
Incoming ASI is converted to TS over IP.
ASI to IP gateway has an integrated rate shaper to limit the output to the
user-defined rate to avoid network overload in the event of a high
incoming ASI rate.
The "ASI to IP Gateway" feature is not available if IO5 is used as ASI
inputs for external components. Refer to section ASI Input for
external components on page 351.
Table A-24. ASI to IP gateway specifications

Parameter

Characteristics

Capability

1 ASI to IP gateway per MPEG Encoder board

IP Output

LAN1, LAN2 on the MPEG Encoder board or LAN1, LAN2 on


the Manager board (CP6000 only)

ASI Input

352

ASI In: IO5


Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 110 Mbit/s
MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes
Mode: Data burst or Data packet

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Multiplexing Across Boards


Multiplexing across boards is an optional feature. It allows an MPTS to
be formed from all the components generated on the different Encoder
boards of the device.
One option (1 multiplexer) can be instantiated per MPEG Encoder board.
Multiplexing runs simultaneously with encoders.
Figure A-16. Multiplexing across board feature - Use cases

Specifications
Table A-25. Multiplexing across board specifications

Parameter
Capability

Characteristics

CP6000: Up to 4 multiplexers (1 per Encoder board).


Each multiplexer can multiplex up to 8 services.
CP6100: Up to 2 multiplexers (1 per Encoder board).
Each multiplexer can multiplex up to 4 services.
An SPTS encoded by an encoding channel can be
used to generate up to 3 MPTSs.

MPTS output

The MPTS output is available on either:


an ASI and/or Ethernet output (MPEG Encoder or
Manager board ports (CP6000 only))
a Modulator board

MPTS bitrate

Up to 400 Mbit/s

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

353

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

SCTE 104 to SCTE 35


SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 is an optional feature used to translate SCTE-104
messages to SCTE 35 messages.
One option can be instantiated per MPEG Encoder board.
Figure A-17. SCTE 104 to SCTE 35 message translation
SCTE104
SCTE104
SCTE35
SCTE35
IPIP

CP6000encoder
encoder
CP6000

SDIinin
SDI

Splicer
Splicer
TSTS

SCTE104messages
messagesembedded
embeddedin
SCTE104
in SDI
according
SMPTE-2010or
SDI
according
to SMPTE-2010
or from
IP input
from
IP input

TSTS
Service 1
Service 1

Video
Video
Audio
Audio
Data SCTE35
Data SCTE35

SCTE35messages
messagesconverted
convertedfrom
fromincoming
incoming
SCTE35
SCTE104messages.
messages.
SCTE104
NoIDR
IDRinsertion
insertionatatsplice
splicepoint
point
No

Specifications
Table A-26. Multiplexing across board specifications

Parameter
Messages source

Characteristics

354

From SDI input according to SMPTE 2010.


From C&C IP input according to SCTE 104.
SCTE 104 IP port value: between 1024 and 65535.

SCTE 35 table repetition

Can be set from 1 to 255

IDR Insertion

No IDR insertion at splice point

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged


Networks
Overview
Contribution & Distribution Over Unmanaged Networks is an optional
feature. It offer the capability to deliver transport stream over
unmanaged networks, typically internet.
In release 04.10, this feature is not available on the Ethernet
interfaces of the Manager board. It is available on the Ethernet
interfaces of the MPEG board.

The feature consists of:

Providing a robust protection algorithm to cope with unmanaged


network impairments.

Reporting information to monitor the unmanaged network.

Support Point to Point and Point to Multi-Points applications:

Figure A-18. Point to Point application

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

355

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Figure A-19. Point to Multi-Points application

Zixi Broadcaster

Internet is Unicast, it means it is only possible to establish point to


point system. To address Point to Multi-points architecture a
broadcaster must be included in the system. Broadcaster is in charge
of duplicating incoming stream to each destination. Broadcaster is
either software running in a private server or service running in the
cloud.

Licensing
On MPEG board configured as Decoder, receiver license is applied per
board: that means up to two decoders with Zixi input protected IP
streams can operate with one license.
No license is required on MPEG board configured as Encoder (Zixi
Feeder)
Two Type of licenses

Point to Point and Point to Multi-Points application


- Zixi receiver for point to point and point to multi-points
application: CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PP

Point to Multi-Points application


- Zixi receiver for point to multi-points application:
CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PMP

Maximum operational performances


When the ZIXI encapsulation is activated to operate on an un-managed
network. Lost packets on the decoder can be recovered by 2 different
methods depending on latency value versus round trip time (value
reported in the GUI snap shot).

FEC mode operates setting prevents to send back lost packets as


below

RETRY mode operates when setting allows to send back lost packets
FEC & RETRY modes can run simultaneously

356

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

Table A-27. ZIXI, maximum operational performances

Default values
Max total Useful bitrate
(1 to 4 IP protected TS)
Latency
FEC Overhead
FEC Block

FEC & RETRY mode

RETRY mode only

24 Mbits/s

50 Mbits/s

L < 2 seconds

L 2 seconds

20%

0%

50 ms

0 ms

Zixi back pressure


Transmission bandwidth over satellite depends from weather network
conditions. To benefit from optimize the channel bandwidth availability,
the transmission rate is adjusted according to the channel condition.
When link errors appear, the ZIXI receiver sends a rate change request
message back to the streamer. The process occurs is repeated until a
defined minimum rate or until the link is error free of error.

Max FEC overhead & FEC block settings


ViBE CP6000 performances, on an un-managed network, are strongly
linked to TS bitrate and the settings of the ZIXI modules. Below, the
maximum settings are reported to operate the system in normal
conditions when FEC mode functions.

FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on TS bitrate on Encoder

Table A-28. ZIXI, FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on TS bitrate on Encoder

Total useful TS bitrate

Max FEC overhead

Max FEC block duration

> 15 Mbits/s

20 %

50 ms

12 Mbits/s

20 %

50 ms

9 Mbits/s

20%

50 ms

6 Mbits/s

30 %

100 ms

3 Mbits/s

30 %

100 ms

< 1 Mbits/s

30 %

100 ms

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

357

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Encoder Specifications

FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on Latency value on


Decoder in Point to Multi-Points

Table A-29. ZIXI, FEC overhead / FEC block table depending on Latency value on Decoder
in Point to Multi-Points

Latency

Max FEC overhead

Max FEC block duration

400 ms

20 %

50 ms

800 ms

20 %

50 ms

1200 ms

20%

50 ms

1600 ms

20 %

50 ms

2000 ms

0%

100 ms

358

FEC overhead / FEC block duration: Default values to optimize


resources usage:

FEC overhead: 10 %

FEC block duration: 50 ms

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

MPEG Decoder Specifications


An MPEG Decoder is the combination of one MPEG board and one
decoding software. There are 2 types of MPEG board:

The Dual Channels MPEG board:


This MPEG board can decode up to 2 channels SD or HD.

The Single Channel MPEG board:


This MPEG board can decode 1 channel SD or HD. It is fitted with an
audio connector.

Decoder Block Diagram


Dual Channels MPEG Decoder Board
A Dual Channels MPEG Decoder board is fitted with 5 IO interfaces (IO1
to IO5) and 2 LAN interfaces.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP inputs of the decoding channel
1 and channel 2.
The IO2 and IO4 interfaces are the SDI outputs of the decoding channel 1
and channel 2.
The IO1 and IO3 interfaces can be configured as SDI outputs from the
decoding channel 1 and channel 2 or as ASI inputs.
The IO5 interface can be configured as ASI input or ASI output from the
channel 1 or channel 2.
ASI inputs are not assigned to a dedicated decoding channel.
Figure A-20. MPEG Decoder block diagram

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

359

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Single Channel MPEG Decoder Board


A Single Channel MPEG Decoder board is fitted with 3 IO interfaces (IO1,
IO2 and IO5), 1 audio interface and 2 LAN interfaces.
The IO2 interface is the SDI output of the decoding channel.
The IO1 interface can be configured as SDI output from the decoding
channel or as ASI input.
The IO5 interface can be configured as ASI input or ASI output (ASI to IP
gateway feature).
The audio interface can be configured as analog or digital audio outputs.
The LAN1 and LAN2 interfaces are the IP inputs of the decoding channel.
Figure A-21. Single Channel MPEG Decoder board block diagram

360

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Interface Specifications
Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications

Connector

Description
Dual channels MPEG board
LAN 1

MPEG

IO1

IO2

SDI output SDI output


or
ASI input
Decoder 1

IO3

SDI output SDI output


or
ASI input

IO4

LAN 2

IO5
Ethernet 1
input

ASI output
or
ASI input

Ethernet 2
input

Decoder 2

Single channel MPEG board


Audio

MPEG

IO1
Audio outputs

LED

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

IO2

SDI output SDI output ASI output


or
or
ASI input
ASI input

LAN 1

LAN 2

Ethernet 1
input

Ethernet 2
input

IO5

Red LED on: The board is powered up and there is at least one
board alarm.
Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board alarm.

361

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications

Connector
Single channel MPEG board:
AUDIO

Description
Purpose:
Analog or digital audio ouputs
Connector: SUBD-HD26 female
Pinout:

Digital mode
Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Clock GND

10 Clock Out

AES4 Out -

11 AES4 Out +

AES3 Out GND 12 AES3 Out -

AES2 Out -

AES1 Out GND 14 AES1 Out -

AES4 In -

15 AES4 In +

23 AES4 In GND

AES3 In GND

16 AES3 In -

24 AES3 In +

AES2 In -

17 AES2 In +

25 AES2 In GND

AES1 In GND

18 AES1 In -

26 AES1 In +

13 AES2 Out +

19 AES4 Out GND


20 AES3 Out +
21 AES2 Out GND
22 AES1 Out +

Note: The shaded pins are not used in decoder mode.


Analog mode
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Signal
Clock GND
Right Ch2
Out Left Ch2
Out GND
Right Ch1
Out Left Ch1
Out GND
Right Ch2
In Left Ch2
In GND
Right Ch1
In Left Ch1
In GND

Pin

Signal

10 Clock Out
Right Ch2
11
Out +
Left Ch2
12
Out Right Ch1
13
Out +
Left Ch1
14
Out Right Ch2
15
In +
Left Ch2
16
In Right Ch1
17
In +
Left Ch1
18
In -

Pin

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Signal
Right Ch2
Out GND
Left Ch2
Out +
Right Ch1
Out GND
Left Ch1
Out +
Right Ch2
In GND
Left Ch2
In +
Right Ch1
In GND
Left Ch1
In +

Note: The shaded pins are not used in decoder mode.


A breakout cable can be fitted as an option. Refer to section
Audio Breakout Cable on page 402.

362

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications

Connector
Single channel MPEG board:
Audio
(continued)

Description

Specifications:

In Digital mode

4 balanced AES outputs:


Digital audio output Signal: AES-2003, Tech 3250-E
Data jitter: 20ns
Output Rise/Fall Time: 5 ns to 30 ns @ 110
Output impedance: 110 20%
Output return loss: > 15 dB (100 kHz-128FS)
Output resolution: 24 bits
Differential voltage range: 3.4 V p to p 0.2 V @ 110
Sampling rate (FS): 48 kHz

In Analog mode

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

2 balanced analog stereo outputs:


Analog Audio output
- Output impedance: 100 20%
- Output signal level for full-scale output: + 4 to + 24 dBu
adjustable in 1 dBu step
- Drive capability maximum: + 24 dBu balanced @ 10K
load
- Differential DC: 0.25 V max
Analog Audio output conversion performance
- Sampling rate: 48 kHz synchronized with the video clock
- Signal to noise ratio: > 102 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz, > 105 dB
A weighted @ 24 dBu
- Inter modulation distortion: < -80 dB CCIF two-tone test,
19 & 20 kHz tones
- THD + noise: < -75 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel crosstalk: < -80 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
- Inter channel gain mismatch: < 0.2 dB
- Inter channel phase mismatch: < 1
- Frequency response: 0.2 dB relative to 1 kHz, 20 Hz to
20 kHz
- DC offset: 50 mV
- Output resolution: 20 bits
- Effective number of bits: 17 bits

363

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications

Connector
Dual channels MPEG board:
IO1 - IO3

Description

Single channel MPEG board:


IO1 only

Dual channels MPEG board:


IO2-IO4
Single channel MPEG board:
IO2 only

IO connectors configured as ASI inputs:


Purpose:
MPEG compressed inputs to decoding channels 1 and 2
Characteristics:
- Connector : Female 75BNC
- TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI)
- Input signal level: 800 mVp-p 10% max
- Return loss: -17 dB
- Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 213 Mbit/s
- MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
- TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic
detection
- Mode: Data burst or Data packet
- Tolerated input jitter: Compliant with SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 292M and DVB ASI
IO connectors configured as SDI outputs:
Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD outputs for each decoding channel.
- IO1: Output for decoding channel 1 (mirror IO2 below)
- IO3: Output for decoding channel 2 (mirror IO4 below)
Characteristics:
- Connector: BNC 75
- Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
Synchronization: Based on Genlock with Horizontal phase
adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels)

Purpose:
SDI/SD-SDI/HD outputs for each decoding channel:
IO2: Output for decoding channel 1
IO4: Output for decoding channel 2
Characteristics:
Connector: BNC 75
Standard compliance:
SMPTE 259M/292M/424M/272M/ITU-BT-601
Synchronization: Based on Genlock with Horizontal phase

adjustment (+/- 32000 pixels)

364

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications

Connector
Dual channels MPEG board
and Single channel MPEG
board:
IO5

Description

IO connector configured as ASI input


Purpose:
MPEG compressed input to decoding channels 1 and 2
Characteristics:
- Connector : Female 75BNC
- TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI).
- Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: From 15 kbit/s to 213 Mbit/s
- MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
- TS packet size: 18 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic
detection
- Mode : Data burst or Data packet.
IO connector configured as ASI output
Purpose:
ASI output for MPEG compressed
- Channel 1 or channel 2 encoded output
Characteristics:
- Connector : Female 75BNC
- TS input compliant with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB PI).
- Bitrate : 270 Mbit/s
- TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max
- MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
If the IP to ASI gateway optional feature is used,
IO5 is the ASI outputs. Refer to section IP to ASI
Gateway on page 376.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

365

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Table A-30. MPEG Decoder board interface specifications

Connector
LAN 1 and LAN 2

366

Description
Purpose:
Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface for MPEG (SPTS or MPTS)
compressed A/V input over IP.
LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of the Manager board can be used as
MPEG over IP inputs. The use of the LAN 1/LAN 2 interfaces of
the MPEG board and the LAN interfaces of the Manager board is
exclusive.
Pinout and LEDs:
Refer to Table A-11 Manager board connectors and LEDs on
page 319.
Characteristics:
Standard: 100/1000 Mbps (autosensing)
Operating mode: Half/Full (autonegotiation)
Auto-crossover mechanism
Input Impedance: 110
Cabling: 2 twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5, AWG
gauge 24, shielded cable
EMC and security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002
IP Adaptation:
TS over UDP or RTP/UDP decapsulation
2 IP receive module per Ethernet interface (up to 4 TS
streams on reception per MPEG decoder board)
Unicast or Multicast modes
IGMPv2,
IGMPv3, IGMPv3 SSM (Source Specific
Multicast, which is an IP technology where the destination
host can select a source when joining a multicast group)
VLAN tagging management
- VLAN tag compliant with IEEE 802.1q
- VLAN Id value: 50 to 4094
- Up to 4 VLAN (1 per IP Rx) can be configured per board
FEC error correction ANNEX B with automatic FEC
configuration
Jitter: Advanced clock recovery to minimize the effects of
IP jitter up to 200 ms

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

TS Processing
Table A-31. MPEG Decoder board, TS Processing

Parameter
TS number and
processing

Description

Monitoring

Two TS IN per decoding channel to redundancy:


SPTS or MPTS from Ethernet inputs or ASI inputs
TS processing:
MPEG-2 Transport Stream compliant with ISO/IEC
13818-1
TS with a bitrate of 400 Mbit/s max
CBR TS
SPTS or MPTS
TS characteristics
- Number of services per TS: up to 32
- Number of videos per service: up to 4
- Number of audios per service: up to 28
- Number of VBIs per service: up to 10

The services carried by the TS source are displayed. For


each service, the service name, service Id, PMT PID and
components with their PID are displayed.
To allow downstream redundancy based on SDI presence,
the SDI output signal can be disabled in the following
cases:

Service Selection
modes

The service to decode can be selected:

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

No Stream received
Service name or service id missing
Video PID missing

1st service in the PMT (default mode)


In this mode the decoder automatically processes the
first valid service containing a video component
declared in the PAT. Other components contained in the
service are processed.
By Service name
By Service Id
By PID (the PID of each component must be indicated)

367

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Video Processing
Table A-32. MPEG Decoder board, Video Processing

Parameter

Description

Video decoding
formats

The Decoder board supports the formats encoded by the


CP6000 Encoder board. Refer to section Input video
encoding formats on page 339.

Video decoding profile


and bitrate

The Decoder board supports the profiles and bitrates


encoded by the CP6000 Encoder board. Refer to section
Video processing on page 340.

Video Rescaling
The
Decoder
handles
Upscaling,
Progressive/Interlaced format conversion.

Downscaling

and

The following rescaling modes are supported:


Table A-33. MPEG Decoder board, Video rescaling

Video Rescalinga
HD to SD Downscaling b

1080i/25 to 576i/25
1080i/29.97 to 480i/29.97

SD to HD Upscaling

576i/25 to 1080i/25
480i/29.97 to 1080i/29.97

Progressive & Interlaced


Conversion

HD to SD c

720p/50 to 576i/25
720p/59.94 to 480i/29.97

SD to HD

576i/25 to 720p/50
480i/29.97 to 720p/59.94

HD 1080i to HD 720p

1080i/25 to 720p/50
1080i/29.97 to 720p/59.94
1080i/30 to 720p/60

HD 720p to HD 1080i

720p/50 to 1080i/25
720p/59.94 to 1080i/29.97
720p/60 to 1080i/30

Frame rate conversion is not supported.

The 1080i/30 and 720p/60 standards are not supported.

c The

368

1080i/30 and 720p/60 standards are not supported.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

The following rescaling types are supported (AFD out values are
indicated):
Table A-34. MPEG Decoder board, Video Scaling types and AFD information

Source

4/3 display
Scaling type and AFD
information

16/9 display
Scaling type and AFD
information

16/9

Anamorphic

No change

AFD 4x3: 1000


Center cut

AFD 4x3: 1000


Letter box

AFD 4x3: 1010


4/3

No change

Anamorphic

AFD 16x9: 1000


Center cut

AFD 16x9: 1001


Pillar box

AFD 16x9: 1001

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

369

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

HD to SD down-conversion

Input / Output

Incoming TS includes:
- HD video
- Audio
- HD teletext component
- DVB subtitle

SDI output inserts:


- SD video (HD video down converted)
- Audio
- SD Teletext in VBI (HD teletext down converted)
- AFD, WSS in VBI

Figure A-22. HD to SD down -conversion

370

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

User commands
The following commands can be set by the User:

Figure A-23. HD to SD down -conversion, User commands

Video rescaling and WSS generation

Video output rescaling is based on user setting (scaling mode:


Manual) or from incoming AFD (scaling mode: AFD or AFD with
default).

WSS is generated from AFD output.

Figure A-24. Video rescaling and WSS generation

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

371

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Audio Processing
Table A-35. MPEG Decoder board, Audio Processing

Parameter
Output

Description

Capabilities

Decoding formats

A Video channel decodes:


Dual channels MPEG board
(audio output = SDI):
Stereo (2.0) components: Up to 8 or
Surround (5.1) components: Up to 2 or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1) components: Up
to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)

Single channel MPEG board):


Stereo (2.0) components: to SDI (up to 8) or AES (up to
4) or Analog (up to 2) or
Surround (5.1) components: to SDI (up to 2) or AES (up
to 1) or
Mixed stereo (2.0) and surround (5.1) components: to
SDI (up to 2 (2.0) and 2 (5.1)) or AES (up to 1 (2.0) and 1
(5.1)).

MPEG-1 Layer II
AAC-LC*
HE-AAC / HE-AAC v2 (2.0, 5.1 (option))
Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1) (option)
Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M-2002)
Audio Pass-thru
MPEG-1 Layer II (1.0, 2.0)
AAC (2.0, 5.1)
Dolby E
Dolby Digital (AC3) (2.0, 5.1)
Audio Pass-thru are compliant with SMPTE 337M-2008.

Miscellaneous
features

372

Dual channels MPEG board:


Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M is
inserted in the SDI signal.
Single channel MPEG board:
Audio embedded in accordance with SMPTE 272M is
inserted in the SDI signal or available as analogue or
digital audio on Audio connector.

Audio Delay can be set from -80 to 100 ms (step 1 ms) to


adjust lipsync.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

VBI/ANC Processing
Table A-36. MPEG Decoder board, VBI/ANC Processing

Parameter

Description

VBI/ANC
components

If VBI/ANC informations are transported in specific components,


2 VBI/ANC components can be decoded at the same time.

SD VBI

SD VBI processing compliant with ETSI EN 301 775 (transport of


Transparent Lines VBI only from CP6000 Encoder to CP6000
Decoder).
The following VBI can be enabled / disabled on SDI output:
Teletext, Video Program System (VPS), Wide Screen Signaling
(WSS), Monochrome Transparent, Full Transparent.

ANC

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

ANCillary processing:
Compliant with SMPTE 2038 (transport of ANC from
CP6000 Encoder to CP6000 Decoder).
Compliant with RDD-11 (transport of HD SDI Ancillary
Data in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream).
Closed Caption EIA-608B & EIA-708B, Ancillary Time Code
(ATC_VITC) and Active Format Description (AFD
SMPTE-2016-2) are extracted from the Video Stream and
inserted in the SDI output.
HD Teletext (OP47): HD Teletext (Standard SMPTE RDD-8,
Transport EN 301775) ancillary data PID is decoded to deliver
the dedicated DID (143h) and SDID (102h) in the SDI output
stream.
The following ANC can be enabled / disabled on SDI output:
SD ANC
Closed Caption (EIA 708-B), Time code (ATC), Active
Format Description (AFD), Ancillary Transparent
(SMPTE-2038).
HD ANC
Closed Caption (EIA 708-B), Time code (ATC), Active
Format Description (AFD), Ancillary Transparent
(SMPTE-2038), Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11), HD Teletext
(OP-47).

373

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode


Table A-37. MPEG Decoder board, VBI/ANC Processing in Video Rescaling mode

VIDEO IN / VIDEO OUT


SD / SD

HD / SD

SD / HD

HD / HD

Yes (VBI
teletext)

N/A

To ANC teletext
OP-47

N/A

Video, Program System


(VPS)

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

Wide Screen Signaling


(WSS)

Yes

Created from
AFD

N/A

N/A

Monochrome
transparent

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

Full transparent

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

Closed caption EIA 608


(Line 21)

No

N/A

N/A

N/A

Video Index

No

N/A

N/A

N/A

Closed caption EIA 708

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Time Code (ATC)

Yes

N/A

Yes

N/A

Active Format
Description (AFD)

Yes

N/A

Yes / Refer to
Table A-34 on
page 369

N/A

Transparent
SMPTE-2038

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

Closed caption EIA 708

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

Time Code (ATC)

N/A

Yes

N/A

Yes

Active Format
Description (AFD)

N/A

Yes / Refer to
Table A-34 on
page 369

N/A

Yes

Transparent
SMPTE-2038

N/A

N/A

N/A

Yes

Transparent RDD-11

N/A

N/A

N/A

Yes

HD teletext (OP47)

N/A

To VBI teletexta

N/A

Yes (ANC
Teletext OP47)

SD VBI
Teletext

SD Ancillary

HD Ancillary

a Only

374

OP47 subtitling distribution packet (SDP) data is processed to deliver a VBI Teletext.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

TS Redundancy
If the nominal TS is missing in an MPEG Decoder, it will be replaced by a
backup TS. TS inputs can be from ASI or (and) Ethernet input(s).
Redundant mode can be selected from the following:

Force nominal TS: The selected TS is always the nominal TS.

Auto Switchback on nominal faultless:


When no TS Stream is received on the nominal input, the input
automatically switches to the backup input after a time which can be
set from 0 to 30s.
When the TS stream is received on the nominal input, the system
automatically switches to this nominal input after a time which can be
set from 0 to 30s.

Auto Switchback on redundant fault: When no TS stream is received


on the nominal input, the input automatically switches to the backup
input after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s. The system stays on
the backup input until a redundant fault occurs. When a redundant
fault occurs, the input automatically switches to the nominal input
after a time which can be set from 0 to 30s.

Force backup TS: The selected TS is always the backup TS.

Figure A-25. TS redundancy, examples

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

375

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Descrambling
Descrambling is an optional feature. 1 option must be installed per MPEG
board and enable multiple services descrambling.
This feature is used for BISS mode 1 and BISS E descrambling. Refer to
section Scrambling on page 350.

IP to ASI Gateway
Refer also to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352.
IP to ASI gateway is an optional feature. The feature allows an
MPEG Transport stream to be exchanged between a CP6000 Encoder and
a remote CP6000 Decoder. The Transport Stream is transported
transparently and bit-accurately. Two options must be installed (1 per
MPEG Encoder board and 1 per MPEG Decoder board).
Figure A-26. ASI to IP and IP to ASI Gateway feature. Example: MPEG board without
audio interface

ASI to IP Gateway feature


refer to section ASI to IP Gateway on page 352

IP to ASI Gateway feature

Specifications
The IP to ASI gateway runs with the video decoder(s) simultaneously.
The incoming TS over IP is converted to ASI.
Table A-38. IP to ASI gateway specifications

Parameter

Characteristics

Capability

1 IP to ASI gateway per MPEG Decoder board

IP Input

ASI Output

376

IP In: LAN1, LAN2 on the MPEG Decoder board or


LAN1, LAN2 on the Manager board (CP6000 only)
Includes user configurable input buffer to cope with
network jitter
ASI Out: IO5
Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
TS bitrate: 213 Mbit/s max
MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications MPEG Decoder Specifications

Contribution & Distribution Over UnManaged


Networks
This feature is optional. Refer to section Contribution & Distribution
Over Unmanaged Networks on page 355.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

377

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications


A single Modulator board per ViBE CP6000 or ViBE CP6100 is allowed.
There are 2 types of Modulator:

IF - Band Modulator (from 50 MHz to 180 MHz)

L- Band Modulator (from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz).


The L - Band Modulator comes with a Diplexer. Refer to section
Diplexer Specifications on page 385.

Modulators are compliant with DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG


standards.

Modulator Block Diagram


A Modulator is fitted with:

3 TS inputs:

2 ASI inputs (ASI in1 and ASI in2)

1 TS input from the backplane

1 TS output (ASI OUT) for monitoring

1 RF output (RF)

1 RF output (MON) for monitoring

1 clock reference input (REF IN) for external synchronization

1 clock reference output (REF OUT)

Figure A-27. Modulator block diagram

In the current release (v04.10) the TS (SPTS or MPTS) of only one


MPEG board can be linked to the Modulator board via the TS from
the backplane input.

378

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

Interface Specifications
Table A-39. Modulator board interface specifications

Connector

Description

LED

Red LED on: The board is powered up and there is at least one
board alarm.
Red LED off: The board is not powered or there is no board alarm.

RF OUT

MON OUT

REF IN

REF OUT

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Purpose:
RF output (band depends on Modulator type)
Characteristics:
Connector: SMA - 50
Standards: DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X / DVB-DSNG
Frequency:
- L- Band modulator: 950 MHz to 2150 MHz in 1 Hz steps
- IF - Band modulator: 50 MHz to 180 MHz in 1 Hz steps
Bandwidth: 0.1 MHz to 72 MHz
SNR: > 34 dB @ 0dBm over the entire RF frequency range
Spurious rejection > -65 dBc over the entire RF frequency
range (except OL rejection -60dBc at 1600 MHz on the
L- Band modulator)
Power level range: From -30 to + 5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
If needed, the output spectrum can be reversed.
Purpose:
RF output monitoring
Characteristics:
Connector: SMA - 50
Bandwidth: 0.1 MHz to 72 MHz
Level: -20 dB under the RF OUT power
Purpose:
Frequency reference input
Characteristics:
Connector: Female 50BNC
Frequency: 10 MHz
Level: From -15 to + 15 dBm
Purpose:
Frequency reference output
Characteristics:
Connector: Female 50BNC
Frequency: 10 MHz
Level: 0 dBm 3 dB

379

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

Table A-39. Modulator board interface specifications

Connector
ASI OUT

Description

ASI IN1

ASI IN2

380

Purpose:
Provides the ASI IN1 TS, ASI IN2 TS, TS from the internal
MPEG Encoder or TS stream after bitrate adaptation
processing for monitoring.
Characteristics:
Connector: Female 75BNC
ASI bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
TS bitrate: 200 Mbit/s max
TS packet size: 188 bytes
Purpose:
MPEG compressed input 1
Characteristics:
Connector: Female 75BNC
ASI bitrate: 270 Mbit/s
TS input compliant with EN 50083-9,
ETSI TR101 891 v1.1.1
TS bitrate: 200 Mbit/s max
MPEG format: SPTS or MPTS
TS packet size: 188 or 204 (188 + 16) bytes with automatic
detection. In 204 bytes mode, the last 16 bytes are not
processed and consequently not modulated
Mode: Data burst or Data packet
Purpose:
MPEG compressed input 2
Characteristics: Refer to ASI IN1 above

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

Miscellaneous Specifications
Table A-40. Miscellaneous specifications

Miscellaneous Specifications
Input Stream
Management

Two modes are available to configure the modulator input:


Manual mode: The Operator selects ASI IN1, ASIN2 or
Internal input (TS stream from an MPEG Encoder board).
Automatic mode: The Operator selects an input combination
from ASI IN1/ASI IN2.
If the ASI IN1 and ASI IN2 streams are available, the
modulator always takes ASI IN1 as its input stream. When
the ASI IN1 stream is interrupted for at least 500ms, the
modulator switches to ASI IN2. If it does not find another
available stream in the next 1000ms, it generates an alarm.
In this mode, in the event of ASI IN1 stream loss the switch
to ASI IN2 is automatic but if the ASI IN1 stream is restored,
there is no switchback to the ASI IN1 stream.

Input Bitrate
Management

This process allows the modulator to build a constant bitrate at


the modulation kernel input. The Modulator board offers
different possibilities to smooth the bitrate:
Null packet adaptation (DVB-S / DVB-S2 / DVB-DSNG): In this
operating mode, the unit discards or inserts Null packets to
adapt the TS input bitrate to the precise bitrate defined by
the selected DVB-S or DVB-S2 mode. PCR (Program Clock
Reference) restamping is then executed accordingly.
Padding insertion (DVB-S2): This method is described in
DVB-S2 standard EN 302 307. It does not modify the
incoming MPEG-TS stream (like the previous method) but
the useful input stream bitrate must be less than the channel
modulation bitrate capability. The process involves
completing the DVB-S2 BBFrame (Base Band Frames) with
padding. The receiver must remove this padding at the
reception end. In this case, the satellite link is transparent for
the MPEG-TS because there is no PCR restamping.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

381

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

Table A-40. Miscellaneous specifications

Miscellaneous Specifications
Clock and
synchronization

The modulator includes its own clock and synchronization


generator. A high stability 10 MHz oscillator provides the
internal clock reference to the modulator clock system.
An external 10 MHz clock signal can be chosen as a reference
clock for the modulator. The modulator clock reference source
can be configured as:
Internal 10MHz (by default)
Locked to the external 10 MHz signal reference
The 10MHz input (REF IN connector) signal can be used to
synchronize several modulators in parallel when they all
broadcast adjacent carriers in the same transponder. However,
internal clock stability is usually sufficient without 10MHz input
in this situation.
If the modulator is synchronized with an external 10 MHz
reference and the reference disappears, the modulator uses its
own clock during a programmable time from 0 to 1440 min (24
hours). After this time the RF output signal is muted.
The 10MHz output (REF OUT connector) signal can be used to
control an up-converter if required.

10 MHz Internal
oscillator

RF output
ON/OFF

Frequency: 10MHz
Stability versus temperature: < 2.5 ppm (0C to 50C)
Aging: < 0.8 ppm /year, < 1.10-8/day
Tuning: 3 ppm

The Operator can enable or disable RF signal muting according


to the following events:
Stream input:
Stream lost
Input packet structure error
TS packet format (incorrect TS packet header)
Buffer overflow/underflow
The default stream detection interval is equal to 1 second.
Lost of external 10MHz Reference Synchronization. A
time out can be set by the Operator.
Manual mute
NB: If the Operator disables automatic mute, PRBS TS packets
are inserted to reach the bitrate.
Un-mute can be configured as direct (abrupt un-muting) or
progressive.

Carrier
Modulated OFF
=> Sinus tone
generation

382

In this mode, the output signal is replaced by a simple sine


signal at the RF frequency. The level of the sinus tone
corresponds to the output power (configurable from -30 to
+5 dBm).
Among other things, this mode allows phase noise
measurement without the need for an external amplifier.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

DVB-S Specifications
Table A-41. DVB-S Specifications

Parameter

Description

Standard

EN 300 421

Modulation

Outer/Inner FEC: Reed Solomon/Viterbi


Modulation Type and Code rate:
QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Roll-off value: 0.35

Useful bitrate

Up to 86 Mbit/s depending on the modulation parameters.


An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate
that can be modulated.

Symbol Rate

0.1 to 53.3 Mbaud

Bandwidth

0.1 to 72 MHz

DVB-DSNG Specifications
Table A-42. DVB-DSNG Specifications

Parameter

Description

Standard

EN 300 210

Modulation

Outer/Inner FEC: Reed Solomon/Viterbi


Modulation Type and Code rate
QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
8PSK: 2/3, 5/6, 8/9
16QAM: 3/4, 7/8
Roll-off value: 0.35

Useful bitrate

Up to 172 Mbit/s depending on the modulation parameters.


An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate
that can be modulated.

Symbol Rate

0.1 to 53.3 Mbaud

Bandwidth

0.1 to 72 MHz

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

383

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

DVB-S2 / DVB-S2X Specifications


Table A-43. DVB-S2 Specifications

Parameter

Description

Standards

EN 300 321, EN 302 307

Modulation

Outer/Inner FEC: BCH/LDPC


Modulation Type and Code rate
QPSK: 1/4, 1/3, 2/5, 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
8PSK: 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
16APSK: 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 (option)
32APSK: 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 (option)
PL Scrambling codes [0, 264143]
Supported DVB modes:
CCM: Constant Coding and Modulation
DVB-S2 Short frames: 16 200 bits
Additional Modulation type and Code rate in DVB-S2X
(option):
QPSK: 11/45, 4/15, 14/45, 7/15, 8/15, 32/45
8PSK: 7/15, short, 26/45, 32/45
16APSK: 7/15, 8/15, 26/45, 3/5, 32/45
32APSK: 32/45
DVB-S2 Normal frames: 64 800 bits
Additional Modulation type and Code rate in DVB-S2X
(option):
QPSK: 13/45, 9/20, 11/20
8PSK: 5/9-L, 26/45-L, 23/36, 25/36, 13/18
16APSK: 1/2-L, 8/15-L, 5/9-L, 26/45, 3/5, 3/5-L, 28/45, 23/36,
2/3-L, 25/36, 13/18, 7/9, 77/90
32APSK: 2/3-L, 32/45, 11/15, 7/9
64APSK: 32/45-L, 11/15, 7/9, 4/5, 5/6
Roll-off values: 0.05 to 0.35 in 0.01 steps (DVB-S2X compliant)
Pilots ON or OFF

Useful bitrate

Up to 200 Mbit/s depending on the modulation parameters.


An internal computer indicates the maximum TS bitrate that can
be modulated.

Symbol Rate

0.1 to 68 Mbaud

Bandwidth

0.1 to 72 MHz

Carried Id

CID contents:
GUI (Global Unique Identifier)
GPS coordinates
Phone number
User data

Signaling
A signaling table Editor (SigEditor) can be found on the CD-ROM shipped
with the device. This tool provides a user-friendly graphical interface
384

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications DVB-S/S2/DSNG Modulator Specifications

representing the NIT table structure with the possibility of modifying or


adding fields and descriptors (selected in a popup menu). Once the table
is ready, it can be saved in a file to be downloaded to the CP6000.
The NIT table is injected on the TS feeding the Modulator Board.
Table A-44. NIT Specifications

Parameter

Description

Standard

Compliant with ISO/IEC 13818-1

Repetition rate

500 ms

NIT Table edition

NIT is edited via the Web Browser Interface

Diplexer Specifications
A Diplexer is used to mix the 10 MHz REF OUT and L- Band RF OUT
signals generated by the Modulator. The mixed signals are sent in a
single cable to the Up converter and Amplifier.
Figure A-28. Diplexer and CP6000, use case

Up converter and Amplifier

L Band and 10 MHz


in a single cable

RF Out (L Band)

REF Out (10 MHz)

Figure A-29. Diplexer connections

High pass (L Band)


Common

Low pass (Ref 10 MHz)

The
detailed
diplexer
specifications
are
described
in
the
Diplexer_ZDPLX-2150+.pdf document on the CD-ROM shipped with the
product.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

385

Appendix A Technical Specifications Standard Compliance

Standard Compliance
Table A-45. Standard compliance

Standards

Title
TV standards

386

ANSI/SMPTE 125M -1995 3

Component Video Signal 4:2:2 - Bit-Parallel Digital


Interface

SMPTE 259M-2006

SDTV Digital Signal/Data Serial Digital Interface

SMPTE 260M-1999

1125/60 High-Definition Production System Digital


Representation and Bit-Parallel Interface

SMPTE 272M

Television - Formatting AES/EBU Audio and Auxiliary


Data into Digital Video Ancillary Data Space

SMPTE 274M-2005

1920 x 1080 Image Sample Structure, Digital


Representation and Digital Timing Reference Sequences
for Multiple Picture Rates

SMPTE 291M-2006

Ancillary Data Packet and Space Formatting

SMPTE 292M-2006

1.5 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface

SMPTE 296M-2001

1280 x 720 Progressive Image Sample Structure


Analog and Digital Representation and Analog Interface

SMPTE 302M-2002

Mapping of AES Data into an MPEG-2 Transport Stream

SMPTE 337M-2008

Format for Non-PCM Audio and Data in an AES3 Serial


Digital Audio Interface

SMPTE 424M-2006

3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface

SMPTE 425M-2008

3 GB/s Signal/Data Serial Interface Source Image


Format Mapping

SMPTE 2010

Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of ANSI/SCTE 104


Messages

SMPTE 2016-1

Format for Active Format Description and Bar Data

SMPTE 2016-3

Vertical Ancillary Data Mapping of Active Format


Description and Bar Data

SMPTE 2022-2

Unidirectional Transport of Constant Bit Rate MPEG-2


Transport Streams on IP Networks

SMPTE 2038M-2008

Carriage of Ancillary Data Packets in an MPEG-2


Transport Stream

SMPTE RDD 11

Carriage of HDSDI Ancillary Data in an MPEG-2


Transport Stream

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Standard Compliance

Table A-45. Standard compliance

Standards

Title

SMPTE RP 168-2002

Definition of Vertical Interval Switching Point for


Synchronous Video Switching

SMPTE RP 165-1994

Error Detection Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in


Bit-Serial Digital Interfaces for Television

SMPTE RP 178-2004

Serial Digital Interface Checkfield for 10-Bit 4:2:2


Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals

SMPTE RP 184-2004

Specification of Jitter in Bit-Serial Digital Systems

SMPTE RP 186

Video Index Information Coding for 525 and 625 Line


Television Systems

SMPTE RP 198-1998

Bit-Serial Digital Checkfield for Use in High-Definition


Interfaces
DVB standards

ETSI EN 301 210

Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB);


Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for
Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and other
contribution applications by satellite

ETSI EN 302 307

Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB);


Second generation framing structure, channel coding
and modulation systems for Broadcasting, Interactive
Services, News Gathering and other broadband satellite
applications (DVB-S2)

ETSI EN 300 421

Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB);


Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for
11/12 GHz satellite services
Chassis standards

AMC.0 R2.0

Advanced Mezzanine Card Base Specification

PICMG MTCA.0 R1.0

Micro Telecommunications Computing Architecture


Base Specification

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

387

Appendix A Technical Specifications Certifications and Environmental Specifications

Certifications and Environmental Specifications


Table A-46. Safety Standards

Category
Safety

388

Standard

Designed/tested for compliance with:

2006/95/EEC

European Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/E replacing


73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.

IEC 60950

Standard for Safety for Information Technology Equipment


- Safety - Part 1: General Requirements, (IEC 60950-1, Second
Edition, 2005, Corrigendum: 01-2007).

EN60950

Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including


Electrical Business Equipment, (EN 60950-1, Second Edition,
September 2006).

ANSI / UL60950

Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements, (ANSI/UL 60950-1,
Second Edition, Dated March 27, 2007). Certified.

CAN/CSA C22.2,
No. 60950

Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment Safety - Part 1: General Requirements, (CAN/CSA-C22.2
No. 60950-1-07. Second Edition). Certified.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Certifications and Environmental Specifications

Table A-47. EMC Standards

Category
EMI

Standard
2004/108/EEC

Designed/tested for compliance with:


EMC European Directive 2004/108/EC replacing 89/336/EEC
and 93/68/EEC.

EN 55022 standard Electromagnetic compatibility (Europe). Information


technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement:
EN 61000-3-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2:
Limits - Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment
input current up to and including 16 A per phase).
EN 61000-3-3: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-3:
Limits - Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and
flicker in public low-voltage supply systems, for equipment
with rated current <= 16 A per phase and not subject to
conditional connection.
EN55024 standard Electromagnetic compatibility (Europe). Information
technology equipment - Immunity characteristics - Limits and
methods of measurement:
EN 61000-4-2: Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-3: Radiated, Radio-Frequency Electromagnetic
Field Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-4: Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-5: Surge Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-6: Immunity to Conducted Disturbances, Induced
Radio-Frequency Fields.
EN 61000-4-8: Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test.
EN 61000-4-11: Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage
Variations Immunity Tests.

EMF

CE labeling

US FCC CFR 47
part 15

Federal Communication Commission - part 15 (USA): Radio


Frequency devices.

AS/NZS 3548

C-Tick: Electromagnetic compatibility (Australia & New


Zealand).
Information technology equipment, modems, fax machines,
BPL modem.

VCCI V-3 / 2011.04

CISPR22:Ed 6.0:2008 Conducted Disturbance Measurement &


Radiated Electric Field

ICES-003 Ed4

Digital Apparatus (Canada).

Council
recommendation
1999/519/EC

Recommendation on the limitation of exposure of the general


public to electromagnetic fields.

EN 62311:2008

Assessment of electronics and electrical equipment related to


human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields.

765/2008 EC

REGULATION of the European Parliament and of the council


setting out the requirements for accreditation and market
surveillance relating to the marketing products.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

389

Appendix A Technical Specifications Certifications and Environmental Specifications

Table A-48. Environmental Specifications

Category
ROHS II

Standard
Directive
2011/65/EU

Pollution
specifications
Protection
specifications

Operating
Temperature

390

Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in


electrical and electronic equipment.
No. 2 pollution.

CEI 60529: 1989

Ram with
built-in lithium
battery type
Recycling
product

Designed/tested for compliance with:

IP20 protection.
M4T32-BR-12SH1, ST-Microelectronics, 2.8V 120 ma

Directive
2012/19/EU

Directive on Waste Electric and Electronic Equipment (


WEEE)
Refer to section Recycling the Product on page 428.
- 5C to + 50C (+23F to +122F)
(Recommended +10C to + 35C (+50F to +95F))

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Certifications and Environmental Specifications

Table A-49. Environmental Standards

Category
Environment
testing

Standard

Designed/tested for compliance with:

ETS 300 019-1-3

Classification of environmental conditions; Stationary use at


weather protected locations:
Environmental class 3.1 and 3.1E.
Operation in temperature-controlled locations.
+ 5C to + 50C (+41F to +122F) @ 85% humidity compliant
with the climatogram featured in the standard
(Platform tested from -5 to +55C).

ETS 300 019-1-2

Classification of environmental conditions; Transportation:


Environmental class 2.2: "Careful transportation" for
mechanical conditions.
- 25C to + 70C (-13F to +158F).
95% humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in
the standard.
Sinusoidal vibrations in packaging.
Random vibrations in packaging.
Shocks in packaging.
Falls in packaging.
Falls in packaging - Green Book Option.

ETS 300 019-1-1

Classification of environmental conditions; Storage


Environmental class 1.2.
Storage in weather-protected, partly temperature-controlled
locations.
- 25C to + 70C (-13F to +158F).
95% humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in
the standard.
Shocks during In-Use.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

391

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Ordering Guide
Figure A-30. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Contribution Platform Ordering guide

392

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Base Systems
Table A-50. ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 Rack Options

Code

Description of the CP6000 rack options

CP6000-1U-1AC

ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform. 1U, LCD front panel, 2


GbE ports, single power supply 110-220 VAC. 4 hot
swappable slots for Encoding and Decoding boards.
Software Release + boards + licenses MUST be ordered.

CP6000-1U-2AC

ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform. 1U, LCD front panel, 2


GbE ports, redundant dual power supply 110-220 VAC. 4 hot
swappable slots for Encoding and Decoding boards.
Software Release + boards + licenses MUST be ordered

CP6000-1U-1DC

ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform. 1U, LCD front panel, 2


GbE ports, single DC (WARNING: LONG LEAD TIME). 4 hot
swappable slots for Encoding and Decoding boards.
Software Release + boards + licenses MUST be ordered.

CP6000-1U-2DC

ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform. 1U, LCD front panel, 2


GbE ports, redundant dual power supply DC (WARNING:
LONG LEAD TIME). 4 hot swappable slots for Encoding and
Decoding boards. Software Release + boards + licenses
MUST be ordered.

CP6000-1U-ACDC

ViBE CP6000 Contribution Platform. 1U, LCD front panel, 2


GbE ports, redundant mixed AC & DC (WARNING: LONG
LEAD TIME). Power supply. 4 hot swappable slots for
Encoding and Decoding boards. Software Release + boards
+ licenses MUST be ordered.

CP6100-HU-AC

ViBE CP6100 Contribution Platform. Half-size 1RU chassis,


LCD front panel, single AC power supply. 2 hot-swappable
slots. Software Release + boards + licenses (common to
CP6000 & CP6100) MUST be ordered.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

393

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Hardware Options
MPEG Board
Table A-51. CP6000-CP6100 Hardware Options 1/2

Code

Description of Hardware Options

CP6x00-OPT-MPG

ViBE CP6000 MPEG encoder/decoder board. Encodes or


decodes up to 2 SD/HD channels. Includes 5 BNC
connectors for SD-SDI, HD-SDI and ASI inputs/outputs,
and 2 GbE elect. Requires SW version 3.00 or higher.

CP6x00-OPT-MPG-AUD

ViBE CP6000 single channel encoder/decoder board.


Includes 3 BNC connectors for SD-SDI, HD-SDI and ASI
inputs/outputs, 2 GbE elect, 4 audio stereo AES or 2 audio
stereo analog. Breakout cable required for audio. Requires
SW version 4.00 or higher.

Modulator Board
Table A-52. CP6000-CP6100 Hardware Options 2/2

Code

Description

CP6x00-OPT-MOD-RF

ViBE CP6000 DVB-S/S2/DSNG modulator board with


L-Band output (950Mhz to 2150Mhz). Hot swappable.
Includes QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Symbol rate up to
68Mbaud.

CP6x00-OPT-MOD-IF

ViBE CP6000 DVB-S/S2/DSNG modulator board with


IF-Band output (50Mhz to 180Mhz). Hot swappable.
Includes QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Symbol rate up to
68Mbaud.

CP6000 Front Panel


Table A-53. CP6000 Hardware Options

Code
CP6x00-OPT-FAV-LCD

394

Description
ViBE CP6000 Front panel with LCD & Keyboard. For
upgrade of chassis without LCD.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

CP6100 Adaptation Kit


Table A-54. CP6100 Adaptation Kit Option

Code

Description

CP6100-OPT-RACK-KIT

ViBE CP6100 Mechanical kit to mount one or two CP6100


in 19" rack.

Audio Cable
Table A-55. AC Mains Cable Options

Code

Description

CPx000-CAB-AUD

CP6K Audio cable In/Out, AES & analog

AC Mains Cables
Table A-56. AC Mains Cable Options

Code

Description

N900PCEUAA

Power cord for continental Europe.

N900PCUSAA

Power cord for US and Japan.

N900PCUKAA

Power cord for UK.

N900PCSWAA

Power cord for Switzerland.

N900PCAUAA

Power cord for Australia.

N900PCARAA

Power cord for Argentina.

Software Options
Product Release
Table A-57. License for CP6000-CP6100 Product release

Code
CP6x00-SW-BASE

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Description
ViBE CP6000 Software Release V4.10

395

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Encoder
Table A-58. Licenses for MPEG Encoder board - Video

Code

Description of Encoder video options

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2SD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0 encoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC.

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2HD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD/HD 4:2:0 encoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC.

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2SD-422

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 encoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC. Up
to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the
chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP2HD-422

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD/HD 4:2:0/4:2:2


encoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
module
(CP6000-HW-MPEG).

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4SD-422

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 8 bits


encoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
board
(CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4SD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0 8 bits encoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC. Up
to 2 per MPEG module (CP6000-HW-MPEG).

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0 8 bits


encoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
module
(CP6000-HW-MPEG).

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-8b

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0/4:2:2 8 bits


encoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
board
(CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP4HD-10b

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0/4:2:2 10 bits


encoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
board
(CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the chassis.

Table A-59. Licenses for MPEG Encoder board - Audio

Code

Description of Encoder audio options

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-MP1L2-AAC

ViBE CP6000 - License for one additional stereo audio MPEG1


Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC encoding. Up to 6 per video encoding
channel, attached to the chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-ENC-DD20

ViBE CP6000 - License for one audio stereo Dolby Digital


(AC-3) encoding. Up to 8 per video encoding channel,
attached to the chassis.

396

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Table A-60. Licenses for MPEG Encoder board - Others

Code

Description

CP6x00-LIC-SCR-BISS

ViBE CP6000 - License for BISS 1/E scrambling. Up to 1 per


MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG).

CP6x00-LIC-ASI-IP-GW

ViBE CP6000 license: enables ASI-to-IP gateway (on encoder)


and IP-to-ASI (on decoder). One license max per
encoder/decoder board.

CP6x00-LIC-SCTE

ViBE CP6000 - License enables SCTE104 to SCTE35 from SDI


or IP input (no IDR insertion).

CP6x00-LIC-MUX

ViBE CP6000 - License enables one MULTIPLEXER with input


from another board.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

397

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Decoder
Table A-61. Licenses for MPEG Decoder board - Video

Code

Description of Decoder video options

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2SD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0 decoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC.

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2HD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD/HD 4:2:0 decoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC.

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2SD-422

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 decoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC. Up
to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG), attached to the
chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP2HD-422

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-2 HD 4:2:0/4:2:2 decoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC. Up
to 2 per MPEG module (CP6000-HW-MPEG).

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4SD-422

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0/4:2:2 8bits


decoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC Up to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG),
attached to the chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-8b

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0/4:2:2 8 bits


decoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC. Up to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG),
attached to the chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-10b

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0/4:2:2 10 bits


decoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC. Up to 2 per MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG),
attached to the chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4SD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD 4:2:0 8bits decoding,


includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC. Up
to 2 per MPEG module (CP6000-HW-MPEG).

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP4HD-420

ViBE CP6000 - License for MPEG-4 SD/HD 4:2:0 8 bits


decoding, includes 2 audio stereo MPEG1 Layer II or
AAC/HE-AAC.
Up
to
2
per
MPEG
module
(CP6000-HW-MPEG).

Table A-62. Licenses for MPEG Decoder board - Audio

Code

Description of Decoder audio options

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-MP1L2-AAC

ViBE CP6000 - License for one additional stereo audio MPEG1


Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC decoding. Up to 6 per video decoding
channel, attached to the chassis.

CP6x00-LIC-DEC-DD20

ViBE CP6000 - License for one audio stereo Dolby Digital


(AC-3) decoding. Up to 8 per video decoding channel,
attached to the chassis.

398

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Table A-63. Licenses for MPEG Decoder board - Others

Code

Description of Decoder options

CP6x00-LIC-DSC-BISS

ViBE CP6000 - License for BISS descrambling. Up to 1 per


MPEG board (CP6000-HW-MPEG).

CP6x00-LIC-ASI-IP-GW

ViBE CP6000 license: enables ASI-to-IP gateway (on encoder)


and IP-to-ASI (on decoder). One license max per
encoder/decoder board.

CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PP

ViBE CP6000 - Zixi receiver for point to point and point to


multi-points application.

CP6x00-LIC-ZIXI-RX-PMP

ViBE CP6000 - Zixi receiver for point to multi-points


application.

Modulator
Table A-64. Licenses for Modulator board

Code

Description of Decoder video options

CP6x00-LIC-MOD-16APSK

ViBE CP6000 license: enables DVB-S2 16APSK modulation


mode

CP6x00-LIC-MOD-32APSK

ViBE CP6000 license:


modulation modes.

CP6x00-LIC-MOD-S2X

ViBE CP6000 license: enables DVB-S2X ModCods and


64APSK mode.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

enables

DVB-S2

16&32APSK

399

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Bundles
8 bundles offer a single HD channel configurations housed either in a
rack chassis (ViBE CP6100) or in a 1RU chassis (ViBE CP6000). They are
fixed configurations regarding hardware items.
Bundles are delivered with the last software version.
Bundles Common Features
Table A-65. Bundles common features
Feature

Commun features

Frame
Single AC PSU

Encoder
Interfaces

SD/HD SDI input & ASI input

Video

Video bitrate up to 80 Mbit/s

CABAC or CAVLC up to 80 Mbit/s

Audio
Audio AES, Analog & SDI embedded

MPEG-1 Layer II or AAC/HE-AAC stereo encode

Linear PCM or Dolby-E Pass-thru

Dolby Digital (AC3) & AAC Pass-thru

Output
BISS scrambling

ASI or dual Giga Ethernet output

Modulator (bundles with modulator)

400

DVB-S2X modulator 950 to 2150 MHz

Symbol rate 0.1 to 68 Mbaud

Roll off 5% to 35% by 1% step

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Ordering Guide

Bundles Ordering Guide


CP6000 Bundles
Table A-66. ViBE CP6000 Bundles

Code

Description of the CP6000 Bundles

CP6000-BDL-HD420-V2

ViBE CP6000 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420 encoder up to 80Mbps. One AC PSU chassis.. Interfaces:
SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 4 stereo MP1
L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

CP6000-BDL-HD422-V2

ViBE CP6000 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps. One AC PSUAC
chassis. Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes
8 stereo MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

CP6000-BDL-HD420-MOD-V2

ViBE CP6000 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps. One AC PSUAC
chassis. Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes
8 stereo MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

CP6000-BDL-HD422-MOD-V2

ViBE CP6000 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps with S2/S2X
QPSK/8PSK L-Band modulator. One AC PSUAC chassis.
Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 8 stereo
MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

CP6100 Bundles
Table A-67. ViBE CP6100 Bundles

Code

Description of the CP6000 Bundles

CP6100-BDL-HD420-V2

ViBE CP6100 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420 encoder up to 80Mbps. Half size One AC PSUAC chassis.
Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 4 stereo
MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

CP6100-BDL-HD422-V2

ViBE CP6100 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps. Half size One AC
PSUAC chassis. Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP.
Includes 8 stereo MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

CP6100-BDL-HD420-MOD-V2

ViBE CP6100 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420 encoder up to 80Mbps with S2/S2X QPSK/8PSK L-Band
modulator. Half size One AC PSU AC chassis. Interfaces: SDI,
AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes 4 stereo MP1 L2/AAC,
BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

CP6100-BDL-HD422-MOD-V2

ViBE CP6100 bundle: Single channel MPEG-2/MPEG-4 SD/HD


420/422 8/10bit encoder up to 80Mbps with S2/S2X
QPSK/8PSK L-Band modulator. Half size One AC PSU AC
chassis. Interfaces: SDI, AES & analog audio, ASI, IP. Includes
8 stereo MP1 L2/AAC, BISS, FEC, Zixi streaming.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

401

Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix

Appendix
Audio Breakout Cable
This cable is optional.
Commercial Reference: CP6x00-OPT-MPG-AUD
Figure A-31. Audio breakout cable

Cable Length: 1.80 m


OUT 1

AES OUT 1 or
Analog OUT 1 Right

IN 1

AES IN 1 or
Analog IN 1 Right

OUT 2

AES OUT 2 or
Analog OUT 1 Left

IN 2

AES IN 2 or
Analog IN 1 Left

OUT 3

AES OUT 3 or
Analog OUT 2 Right

IN 3

AES IN 3 or
Analog IN 2 Right

OUT 4

AES IN 4 or
Analog OUT 2 Left

IN 4

AES IN 4 or
Analog IN 2 Left

CLOCK REF OUT

Connectors Pinout

SUB-D HD26 connector


Refer to audio connector in Table A-13 MPEG Encoder board
interface specifications on page 329 or audio connector in
Table A-30 MPEG Decoder board interface specifications on
page 361.

XLR connectors

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

GND

402

BNC connector

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Clock Out (48 kHz)

GND

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix

Video Profiles & Bitrates recommendations


Depending on the application the following Video Profiles & Bitrates are
recommended:
Table A-68. Recommended Video Profiles & Bitrates for Contribution applications

News

Standard

Premium

SD MPEG-2

4:2:0 / 6 Mbit/s

4:2:2 / 8 Mbit/s

4:2:2 / > 12 Mbit/s

HD MPEG-2

4:2:0 / 18 Mbit/s

4:2:2 / 35 Mbit/s

4:2:2 / > 60 Mbit/s

SD MPEG-4

4:2:0 / 3 Mbit/s

4:2:2 8 bits / 6 Mbit/s

4:2:2 8 bits / > 12 Mbit/s

HD MPEG-4

4:2:0 / 6 Mbit/s

4:2:2 8 bits / 20 Mbit/s 4:2:2 10 bits / > 40 Mbit/s

Primary distribution uses 4:2:0 video profiles.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

403

Appendix A Technical Specifications Appendix

BLANK PAGE

404

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

B
Safety Instructions
Appendix

ENGLISH
Read and follow the important safety information in section Safety
Summary (English) on page 406, noting especially those instructions
related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to persons. Additional
specific warnings not listed there may be found throughout the manual.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, never remove the cover of the
equipment.
If you remove the cover of the equipment, the warranty ceases to
apply.

GERMAN
Lesen
und
befolgen
Sie
die
nachstehenden,
wichtigen
Sicherheitshinweise (section Sicherheit - berblick (Deutsch) on
page 410). Beachten Sie insbesondere die Anweisungen bezglich
Brand-, Stromschlag- und Verletzungsgefahr. Das Handbuch enthlt
weitere, hier nicht angefhrte spezifische Warnhinweise.
Um die Stromschlaggefahr zu verringern, die Gerteabdeckung
niemals entfernen. Andernfalls erlischt die Garantie.

FRENCH
Il est recommand de lire, de bien comprendre et surtout de respecter les
informations relatives la scurit qui sont exposes au paragraphe
Consignes de scurit (Franais), page 415 notamment les consignes
destines prvenir les risques dincendie, les dcharges lectriques et
les blessures aux personnes. Les avertissements complmentaires, qui
ne sont pas ncessairement repris dans le paragraphe sus-cit, mais
prsents dans tous les paragraphes du manuel, sont galement
prendre en considration.
Pour prvenir les risques de dcharges lectriques, nenlevez jamais
le capot de lquipement.
Si le capot de lquipement est enlev, la garantie cesse de
sappliquer.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

405

Appendix B Safety Instructions Safety Terms and Symbols

Safety Summary (English)


Safety Terms and Symbols
Terms on the Product
The following terms may appear on the product:
DANGER A personal injury hazard is immediately accessible as you
read the marking.
CAUTION A hazard to property, product, and other equipment is

present.

Symbols on the Product


The following symbols may appear on the product:
Indicates that dangerous high voltage is present within the
equipment enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock.
Indicates that user, operator or service technician should refer to
product manual(s) for important operating, maintenance, or service
instructions.
This is a prompt to note fuse rating when replacing fuse(s). The fuse
referenced in the text must be replaced with one having the ratings
indicated.
Identifies a protective grounding terminal which must be connected
to earth ground prior to making any other equipment connections.
Identifies an external protective grounding terminal which may be
connected to earth ground as a supplement to an internal
grounding terminal.
Indicates that static sensitive components are present which may
be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Use anti-static procedures,
equipment and surfaces during servicing.

406

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix B Safety Instructions Danger

Danger
The following warning statements identify conditions or practices
that can result in personal injury or loss of life.

Mains Power Safety Instructions


RELIABLE EARTHING The product is designed for connection to an
earth-grounded AC outlet and must be correctly earthed through the
main outlet of cable. To avoid risk of electrical shock or equipment
damage, do not disconnect the grounding plug.
DC MAINS POWER CORD Use the power supply cords shipped with

the device. See section Power Supply and Protective Ground on


page 41.
AC MAINS POWER CORD AC mains cords are only shipped with

equipment if ordered. Otherwise, it is advisable to use mains cords as


described in section Power Supply and Protective Ground on page 41.
The mains power cords should comply with the legislation in force in the
country of installation.
MAINS POWER/CIRCUIT OVERLOADING For each branch circuit, the
connection panel should feature overload and earth fault protection and
a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit breaker.
MAINS POWER/CONNECTION PANEL The connection panel should

comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation.


Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plugs and power
cords are within easy reach for switching off purposes.
OVERLOAD PROTECTION Power supply unit has integrated overload
protection which cannot be accessed or reset. In the event of a
malfunction, please contact the Thomson Video Networks Customer
Services Department.
POWER DISCONNECTING The equipment may or does feature more

than one power supply cords. To reduce the risk of electric shock,
disconnect all power supply cords before any intervention.

Rack Mount Safety Instructions


ELEVATED OPERATING AMBIENT If installed in a closed or multi-unit
rack assembly, the operating air ambient temperature of the rack
environment may be greater than room ambient. Provide proper
ventilation as described in section Mounting in Rack on page 32 to

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

407

Appendix B Safety Instructions Danger

keep the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum


operating temperature (Tma = 50C) specified by the manufacturer.
MECHANICAL LOADING Mounting of the equipment in the rack
should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven
mechanical loading.
CIRCUIT OVERLOADING Considerations should be given to the
connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that
overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and
supply wiring.
RELIABLE EARTHING Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment

should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply


connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use
of power strips).
L-PROFILES USE The equipment must not be fixed with its rack

mounting ears only. If you intend to install it in a rack, L-profiles are


required and you must observe the ventilation and safety instructions
described in section Mounting in Rack on page 32.
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS To avoid injury while installing the

equipment in a rack (or removing it from a rack), take all the necessary
precautions. Ask another person for help or use an adapted carry lift.

Operating Safety Instructions


DO NOT OPERATE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE To avoid injury or
fire hazard, do not operate this equipment in an explosive environment
(atmosphere and materials).
DO NOT OPERATE IN WET/DAMP CONDITIONS To avoid electric
shock, this equipment should only be operated in dry conditions.
REPLACEMENT OF LITHIUM BATTERY OR RAM WITH BUILT-IN LITHIUM
BATTERY Some equipment contains a lithium battery or non-volatile

RAM with a built-in lithium battery.


In this equipment, if for any reason replacement of these components
proves necessary, please observe the following conditions:

The operation must only be performed by qualified personnel;

Only replace with components that have identical features;

Ensure the component is inserted the right way round;

Please dispose of dead components according to the manufacturers


instructions.
Danger of explosion if component is incorrectly replaced.

408

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix B Safety Instructions Cautions

The lithium battery or RAM with a built-in lithium battery comply with
IATA and 49CFR regulations. They require no special declaration,
packaging or labeling.

Cautions
The following caution statements identify conditions or practices
that can result in damage to equipment or other property.

USE CORRECT POWER SOURCE Do not operate this equipment from


a power source that applies a voltage outside the range of voltage
specified for the product.
PROVIDE PROPER VENTILATION To prevent product overheating,
provide equipment ventilation in accordance with installation
instructions. All empty slots should be fitted with blank panels (mask
plates) so as not to impair ventilation.
DO NOT OPERATE WITH SUSPECTED EQUIPMENT FAILURE If you
suspect equipment damage or equipment failure, have the equipment
inspected by qualified service personnel.
ENSURE MAINS DISCONNECT As mains switch is not provided, the

power cord(s) of this equipment provide the means of disconnection.


The socket outlet must be installed near the equipment and must be
easily accessible.
ROUTE CABLE PROPERLY Route power cords and other cables so that
they are not likely to be damaged. Properly support heavy cable bundles
to avoid connector damage.
RETAIN ORIGINAL PACKAGING If equipment is returned to the
Customer Service Department, the faulty equipment must be packed
where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes).
If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty equipment must be
protected against shocks during transportation. The Customer Service
Department examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out
repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation
and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally
noted.
Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns are borne by the
customer. Equipment should only be returned with a Return Material
Authorisation form.
WARRANTY COMPLIANCE Observe the following rules:

Only pluggable board replacement by a qualified personel is allowed.


In all other cases replace the equipment by a spare one.

Never remove the cover of the equipment.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

409

Appendix B Safety Instructions Sicherheit - Begriffe, Hinweise und Warnzeichen

Sicherheit - berblick (Deutsch)


Sicherheit - Begriffe, Hinweise und Warnzeichen
Am Produkt angebrachte Hinweise
Folgende Hinweise knnen sich am Produkt befinden:
GEFAHR Dieser Warnhinweis verweist auf eine unmittelbare

Verletzungsgefahr.
VORSICHT Dieser Warnhinweis verweist auf ein bestehendes Risiko
fr das Gert, Produkt oder Betriebsmittel.

Am Produkt angebrachte Warnzeichen


Folgende Warnzeichen knnen sich am Produkt befinden:
Warnung vor einer gefhrlichen elektrischen Spannung im
Gertegehuse, die stark genug sein kann, um eine
Stromschlaggefahr darzustellen.
Aufforderung an den Benutzer, Bediener oder Servicetechniker, die
in den Produkthandbchern angefhrten wichtigen Bedienungs-,
Wartungs- und Seviceanweisungen zur Kenntnis zu nehmen.
Aufforderung, beim Auswechseln von Sicherungen den
vorgeschriebenen Nennwert fr die im Text angefhrte Sicherung
einzuhalten.
Obligatorische Erdungsklemme zur ordnungsgemen Erdung,
bevor weitere Gerte angeschlossen werden knnen.
Zustzliche, nicht obligatorische externe Erdungsklemme als
Ergnzung zur internen Erdungsklemme.
Statikempfindliche Bauteile, die durch elektrostatische Entladung
(ESD) beschdigt werden knnen, sind durch ESD-geeignete
Verfahren, Werkzeuge und antistatische Oberflchen whrend der
Wartung zu schtzen.

410

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix B Safety Instructions Gefahr

Gefahr
Folgende Warnungen verweisen auf Situationen und Handlungen,
die Verletzungs- oder Lebensgefahr zur Folge haben knnen.

Sicherheitshinweise bezglich des Stromnetzes


ORDNUNGSGEME ERDUNG Das Gert muss an einen geerdeten
AC-Ausgang angeschlossen und ordnungsgem ber den
Hauptkabelausgang
geerdet
werden.
Zum
Vermeiden
von
Stromschlaggefahr und Gerteschden den Schutzkontaktstecker nicht
herausziehen.
AC NETZKABEL Gerte werden ohne AC-Netzkabel geliefert. Diese

sind separat zu bestellen. Netzkabel sollten stets gem den


Anweisungen im Abschnitt Power Supply and Protective Ground auf
page 41 verwendet werden und den anwendbaren Rechtsvorschriften im
jeweiligen Installationsland entsprechen.
DC NETZKABEL Gerte werden mit AC-Netzkabel geliefert.
BERSPANNUNG DES STROMNETZES/STROMKREISES Fr jeden
Abzweigstromkreis ist an der Anschlussplatte ein berspannungs- und
Erdschlussschutz sowie eine doppelpolige Abschaltung oder ein
Differentialschutzschalter vorzusehen.
STROMNETZ/ANSCHLUSSPLATTE Die Anschlussplatte hat den

landesspezifischen Rechtsvorschriften zu gengen. Die Anschlussplatte


ist so im Rack zu montieren, dass alle Stecker und Netzkabel zum
Ausschalten leicht zugnglich sind.
BERSPANNUNGSSCHUTZ Das Netzanschlussgert ist mit einem
nicht zugnglichen und nicht zurcksetzbaren berspannungsschutz
ausgestattet. Fr die Behebung eventueller Strungen ist der
Kundendienst von Thomson Video Networks zustndig.
TRENNUNG DER STROMVERSORGUNG Einige Gerte verfgen ggf.

ber mehrere Spannungsversorgungskabel. Zur Verringerung der


Stromschlaggefahr sind vor jedem Eingriff smtliche Kabel
herauszuziehen.

Sicherheitshinweise bezglich Rackgehuse


BETRIEBSTEMPERATURUMGEBUNG Bei geschlossenen Racks bzw.
Mehrfach-Racks kann die Umgebungstemperatur im Rack hher als die
Raumtemperatur sein. Durch eine ausreichende Belftung gem
Abschnitt Mounting in Rack on page 32 ist dafr zu sorgen, dass die
vom Hersteller vorgeschriebene maximale Betriebstemperatur nicht

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

411

Appendix B Safety Instructions Gefahr

berschritten wird (Temperaturangaben siehe Abschnitt Technische


Daten des Benutzerhandbuchs, (Tma=50C)).
STROMKREIS-BERLASTUNG Beim Anschluss des Gerts an den
Stromkreis
sind
die
eventuellen
Auswirkungen
einer
Stromkreis-berlastung auf den berstromschutz und die elektrischen
Leitungen zu bercksichtigen.
ORDNUNGSGEME ERDUNG Rack-montierte Gerte sind
vorschriftsmig zu erden. Hierbei ist besonders auf Netzanschlsse
ohne direkten Anschluss an den Abzweigstromkreis zu achten (z. B. bei
der Verwendung von Mehrfachsteckdosen).
VERWENDUNG VON L-PROFILEN Zur ordnungsgemen Anbringung
des Gerts im Rack sind neben den Tragsen L-Profile zu verwenden.
Beim Einbau sind die im Abschnitt Mounting in Rack on page 32
angefhrten Sicherheitshinweise und Belftungsanweisungen zu
beachten.
SICHERHEITSMANAHMEN BEIM EIN-/AUSBAU Zur Vermeidung von

Verletzungen beim Ein- und Ausbau des Gerts in das bzw. aus dem Rack
sind alle erforderlichen Vorsichtsmanahmen zu treffen. Es sollte eine
weitere Person um Hilfe gebeten oder eine entsprechende
Hubvorrichtung verwendet werden.

Sicherheitshinweise bezglich des Betriebs


GERTEBETRIEB IN EXPLOSIONSGESCHTZTER UMGEBUNG Zur

Vermeidung von Verletzungen und Brandgefahr darf das Gert nicht in


explosionsgefhrdeten Umgebungen betrieben werden (Atmosphre
und Stoffe).
GERTEBETRIEB IN TROCKENER UMGEBUNG Zur Vermeidung von
Stromschlaggefahr darf das Gert nicht in feuchter oder dunstiger
Umgebung betrieben werden.
AUSWECHSELN DER LITHIUMBATTERIE ODER DES RAM-SPEICHERS
MIT EINGEBAUTER LITHIUMBATTERIE Einige Gerte besitzen eine

Lithiumbatterie bzw. einen nicht flchtigen RAM-Speicher mit


eingebauter Lithiumbatterie.
Sollten in diesen Gerten aus welchem Grund auch immer diese
Komponenten auszuwechseln sein, sind folgende Anweisungen zu
beachten:

412

Das Auswechseln hat durch qualifiziertes Personal zu erfolgen;

Dieselben bzw. gleichwertigen Komponenten verwenden;

Auf die richtige Positionierung der neuen Komponenten achten;

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix B Safety Instructions Vorsichtshinweise

Alte Komponenten gem den Anweisungen des Herstellers


entsorgen.
Bei nicht ordnungsgem installierten Komponenten
besteht Explosionsgefahr.

Das Produkt enthlt eine Lithiumbatterie bzw. einen RAM-Speicher mit


eingebauter Lithiumbatterie, die mit den IATA- und 49CFR
Gefahrgutvorschriften bereinstimmen und keine besondere Erklrung,
Verpackung und Beschriftung erfordern.

Vorsichtshinweise
Folgende Vorsichtshinweise verweisen auf Situationen und
Handlungen, die zu Schden an den Gerten oder sonstigen
Betriebsmitteln fhren knnen.
Angemessene Stromquelle verwenden Das Gert darf nicht an eine

Stromquelle angeschlossen werden, die eine hhere oder untere


Spannung liefert, als fr das Produkt zulssig ist.
Gert ausreichend belften Um einer berhitzung des Gerts
vorzubeugen, ist fr eine angemessene Belftung gem den
Anweisungen in Abschnitt Installation des Benutzerhandbuchs zu
sorgen. Leere Gerteeinschbe sind mit Leerblenden zu verschlieen.
Gert nicht bei Strung betreiben Wird ein Gerteschaden oder eine
Strung vermutet, ist das Gert von qualifizierten Servicetechnikern zu
berprfen.
Trennung vom Stromnetz sicherstellen Verfgt das Gert ber keine(n)

Netzschalter, ist das Gert durch Ziehen des/der Netzkabel vom


Stromnetz zu trennen. Die Steckdose(n) ist/sind leicht zugnglich in
unmittelbarer Nhe des Gerts anzubringen.
Kabel richtig verlegen Netzkabel und sonstige Kabel sind so zu verlegen,
dass sie nicht beschdigt werden knnen. Schwere Kabelbndel sind
ordnungsgem abzusttzen, um Schden an den Steckverbindungen
vorzubeugen.
Originalverpackung aufbewahren Ist das Gert beschdigt und an den

Kundendienst zurckzuschicken, sollte zum sicheren Transport mglichst


die Orginalverpackung (mit Eckenschutz und Schutzhllen) verwendet
werden oder das Gert zumindest stosicher verpackt werden. Bei der
Annahme des Gertes untersucht der Kundendienst die Verpackung auf
eventuelle Transportschden und kann die Reparatur ablehnen, sollte die
Verpackung whrend des Tranports beschdigt worden sein und dies
zustzliche Schden am Gert verursacht haben.
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

413

Appendix B Safety Instructions Vorsichtshinweise

Die mit der Rckgabe und den Transport verbundenen Kosten und
Risiken sind vom Kunden zu tragen. Dem eingeschickten Gert ist ein
ordnungsgem ausgefllter Rckgabeschein beizulegen.
Garantieleistung Folgende Regeln sind fr die Inanspruchnahme der
Garantie zu beachten:

414

Das Auswechseln der Steckkarte hat ausschlielich durch qualifiziertes


Personal zu erfolgen. In allen anderen Fllen ist das Gert durch ein
Ersatzgert zu ersetzen.

Niemals die Abdeckungen des Gertes abnehmen.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix B Safety Instructions Consignes et symboles de scurit

Consignes de scurit (Franais)


Consignes et symboles de scurit
Signaltique appose sur le produit
La signaltique suivante peut tre appose sur le produit :
DANGER Risque de danger imminent pour lutilisateur.
MISE EN GARDE Risque dendommagement du produit, des
installations ou des autres quipements.

Symboles apposs sur le produit


Les symboles suivants peut tre apposs sur le produit :
Signale la prsence dune tension leve et dangereuse dans le
botier de lquipement ; cette tension peut tre suffisante pour
constituer un risque de dcharge lectrique.
Signale que lutilisateur, loprateur ou le technicien de
maintenance doit faire rfrence au(x) manuel(s) pour prendre
connaissance des instructions dutilisation, de maintenance ou
dentretien.
Il sagit dune invite prendre note du calibre du fusible lors du
remplacement de ce dernier. Le fusible auquel il est fait rfrence
dans le texte doit tre remplac par un fusible du mme calibre.
Identifie une borne de protection de mise la masse qui doit tre
raccorde correctement avant de procder au raccordement des
autres quipements.
Identifie une borne de protection de mise la masse qui peut tre
connecte en tant que borne de mise la masse supplmentaire.
Signale la prsence de composants sensibles llectricit statique
et qui sont susceptibles dtre endommags par une dcharge
lectrostatique. Utilisez des procdures, des quipements et des
surfaces antistatiques durant les interventions dentretien.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

415

Appendix B Safety Instructions Avertissements

Avertissements
Les avertissements suivants signalent des conditions ou des
pratiques susceptibles doccasionner des blessures graves, voire
mme fatales.

Instructions de scurit relatives lalimentation


secteur
MISE LA TERRE DE PROTECTION Assurez-vous que la mise la
terre est correctement effectue avant de mettre lappareil sous tension.
La mise la terre de protection se fait au travers du cordon
dalimentation. Pour viter tout risque de chocs lectriques ou de
dommage lquipement, ne dconnectez jamais la fiche de terre.
CORDON DALIMENTATION SECTEUR (AC) Les cordons secteur ne

sont fournis avec lquipement que sils ont t commands. Sinon


utilisez des cordons conformes ceux dcrits au paragraphe
Alimentation et terre de scurit, page 41. Les cordons secteur doivent
tre en conformit avec la lgislation du pays o le produit est install.
CORDON DALIMENTATION CONTINUE (DC) Utilisez les cordons
fournis avec lquipement. Sinon utilisez des cordons conformes ceux
dcrits au paragraphe Alimentation et terre de scurit, page 41.
ALIMENTATION SECTEUR ET PROTECTIONS LECTRIQUES Pour

chaque circuit lectrique, le cblage doit comporter une protection contre


les surintensits, une protection contre les dfauts de fuite la terre et un
systme de coupure des deux ples ou un disjoncteur diffrentiel.
ALIMENTATION SECTEUR/PANNEAU DE CONNEXION Le panneau de
connexion doit tre conforme la lgislation du pays o le produit est
install. Ce panneau de connexion doit tre plac dans la baie de telle
sorte que les prises et les cordons dalimentation soient porte de main
afin de permettre la mise hors tension de lquipement.
PROTECTION CONTRE LES SURINTENSITS Lalimentation lectrique

dispose dune protection intgre contre les surintensits, non


accessible et non rarmable. En cas de dysfonctionnement, contactez le
Dpartement Services Clients de Thomson Video Networks.
SOURCES DALIMENTATION ET INTERVENTION DANS LE CHSSIS
Le chssis peut tre aliment par deux sources dalimentation pourvues
pour chacune delles dun cordon dalimentation. Dconnectez tous les
cordons dalimentation avant toute intervention.

416

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix B Safety Instructions Avertissements

Instructions de scurit relatives linstallation du


chssis dans une baie
TEMPRATURE DAMBIANCE LEVE Si lquipement est install

dans une baie, la temprature dambiance de lquipement peut tre


suprieure la temprature du local technique. Assurez-vous que la
ventilation est conforme ce qui est indiqu au paragraphe Montage en
baie, page 32 pour maintenir lquipement dans un environnement
compatible avec la temprature ambiante maximum spcifie par le
Constructeur (Tma=50C).
CHARGE MCANIQUE Si lquipement est install dans une baie,

veillez ce que les conditions de montage soient conformes ce qui est


indiqu au paragraphe Montage en baie, page 32.
CIRCUIT DE SURCHARGE Le produit est quip de circuit de

protection de surcharge des circuits dalimentation et de protection


contre les court-circuits. Appliquez les valeurs appropries indiques sur
la plaque signaltique.
LIAISON DE TERRE Assurez-vous de la continuit de la liaison de terre

pour lquipement mont en baie. Une attention particulire doit tre


apporte en cas dutilisation de nourrices ou de botiers de
raccordement.
EQUERRES INVERSES OU QUERRES EN L Il est strictement interdit
de supporter le chssis par ses oreilles. Si le chssis doit tre install
dans une baie, posez le chssis sur des querres inverses ou sur des
querres avec profil en L et observez les rgles de ventilation et de
scurit nonces au paragraphe Montage en baie, page 32.
PRCAUTIONS LORS DES MANIPULATIONS Prenez toutes les

prcautions ncessaires pour ne pas vous blesser lors du montage /


dmontage de lquipement dans une baie. Nhsitez pas demander
lassistance dune autre personne ou utiliser un chariot lvateur
adapt.

Instructions de scurit gnrales


ATMOSPHRE EXPLOSIVE Ne mettez en service le produit quen zone

exempte de tout risque dexplosion (atmosphre et matriaux).


HUMIDIT De faon viter tout risque de choc lectrique, ne mettez

en service le produit quen zone sche.


REMPLACEMENT DE PILE AU LITHIUM OU DE MMOIRE AVEC PILE AU
LITHIUM INCORPORE Certains quipements contiennent une pile au

lithium o une mmoire sauvegarde avec une pile au lithium


incorpore.
Dans ces quipements, si pour une raison quelconque le remplacement

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

417

Appendix B Safety Instructions Mises en garde

de ce composant savre ncessaire, il convient de respecter les


conditions suivantes :

Lopration ne doit tre ralise que par un personnel qualifi;

Le composant doit tre remplac par un composant de mmes


caractristiques;

Le sens de montage du composant doit tre respect;

La mise au rebut du composant usag doit seffectuer suivant les


consignes du fabricant du composant.
Il y a risque dexplosion si le composant est mont de
manire incorrecte.

La batterie au lithium ou la mmoire avec pile au lithium incorpore sont


conformes aux rglementations de l'IATA et du 49CFR. Elles ne
ncessitent pas de dclaration, demballage ni dtiquetage spcifiques.

Mises en garde
Les mises en garde suivantes signalent les conditions et les
pratiques susceptibles doccasionner des dommages lquipement
et aux installations.
SOURCE DALIMENTATION ADQUATE Ne branchez pas ce produit
une source dalimentation qui dlivre une tension hors de la plage de
tension nominale spcifie pour ce produit.
VENTILATION ADQUATE Pour viter tout risque de surchauffe,

ventilez correctement le produit. Reportez-vous au paragraphe Montage


en baie, page 32. Pour ne pas perturber la ventilation, tous les
emplacements non occups par des cartes doivent tre obturs par des
caches de bouchement.
DYSFONCTIONNEMENT SUSPECT Si vous constatez une anomalie,
faites procder une vrification par un personnel qualifi.
MARCHE/ARRT DE LQUIPEMENT Le chssis ne comporte pas
dinterrupteur Marche/Arrt. Les cordons dalimentation doivent tre
porte de main afin de permettre la mise hors tension de lquipement.
ACHEMINEZ LES CBLES CORRECTEMENT Acheminez les cbles

dalimentation et les autres cbles de telle faon quils ne risquent pas


dtre endommags. Supportez correctement les enroulements de
cbles afin de ne pas endommager les connecteurs.
EMBALLAGE DORIGINE En cas de retour au Dpartement Service

Clients, l'quipement dfectueux doit tre plac autant que possible dans
418

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix B Safety Instructions Mises en garde

son emballage d'origine (cales de protection et botes). Si vous ne


disposez plus de l'emballage, l'quipement dfectueux doit tre protg
afin de supporter les chocs pendant le transport. Notre Dpartement
Service Clients examine les emballages l'arrive et pourra refuser
d'effectuer une rparation en cas de dfaut visuel sur l'emballage d au
transport et ayant entran de nouveaux dfauts par rapport la nature
de l'anomalie que vous avez constate.
Il est rappel que le transport pour le retour des quipements est la
charge et aux risques du Client. Lquipement ne doit tre retourn
quaccompagn dune autorisation de retour dquipement RMA (Return
Material Authorisation).
ANNULATION DE GARANTIE Respectuez les rgles suivantes pour ne

pas annuler la garantie :

Seul le remplacement des cartes enfichables et qui ne requiert pas le


dmontage du capot est autoris. Dans tous les autres cas, remplacez
lquipement par un quipement de rechange.

Ne dmontez jamais le capot.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

419

Appendix B Safety Instructions Specific Safety Instructions

Safety Instructions for Finland, Norway,


Sweden
Specific Safety Instructions
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR FINLAND Laite on liitettv
suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan.
SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR NORWAY Apparatet m

tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.


SPECIFIC SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR SWEDEN Apparaten skall

anslutas till jordat uttag.

420

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

C
Regulatory Notices
Appendix

FCC Emission Control


This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by Thomson Video Networks
Group can affect emission compliance and could void the users
authority to operate this equipment.

Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance


This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference
Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques
dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe
A prscrites dans le Rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict
par le ministre des Communications du Canada.

EN55022 Class A Warning


In a domestic environment, products that comply with Class A may cause
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

421

Appendix C Regulatory Notices VCCI Class A Warning

VCCI Class A Warning

422

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

D
Customer Services
Appendix

Introduction
This chapter indicates what you should do if you have a problem with
equipment, whether you need to repair it, to return it or to dispose of it.

Content of this Chapter


Support Center Contacts..........................................................page 424
Warranty .....................................................................................page 425
Services.......................................................................................page 426
Spare Parts .................................................................................page 426
Returning Equipment................................................................page 426
Repackaging for Shipment ......................................................page 426
Recycling the Product ...............................................................page 428

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

423

Appendix D Customer Services Support Center Contacts

Support Center Contacts


Our international call center provides Thomson team members to
answer your product and customer service questions. It is available by
phone or e-mail 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The Thomson call center phone numbers are available on our website
(Service & Support / Contact Support page):
http://www.thomson-networks.com

After your call is logged by our call center, you are called back by a
technical support engineer.

424

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix D Customer Services Warranty

To contact the Thomson support center by email please write to us at:


Email: contact.support@thomson-networks.com
To ensure fast customer service please include the following information
when contacting Thomson by email:

Your contract number

Your geographical location (i.e. country you are in)

The name of your product

Any additional system configuration information relating to


your product

Warranty
Thomson Video Networks guarantees that the product will be free from
defects in materials and workmanship, and that the product and/or
software will conform to the applicable specifications, within the
duration of the warranty.
The product is under warranty for a period of twelve (12) months.
The software is under warranty for a period of ninety (90) days.
Concerning the software warranty, Thomson guarantees that, for a
period of 90 days, after the products delivery date, or after a systems
Site Acceptance Test, the physical media will be free from defects and
viruses and the embedded software will conform to applicable
specifications. There is no warranty that Thomson software will be
error-free. The purchase of a software license entitles the customer to use
the Thomson software release shipped at the time the license is
purchased. Rights to new releases (upgrades) are only provided through
a Thomson OneCare service level agreement or can be priced upon
request.
Concerning third party firmware & software (e.g. Java,
SunMicrosystems, etc.), when supplied with a Thomson product,
Thomson is not responsible for supplying any support or information
regarding said software.
The Distributor Warranty Policy
distributorship agreement applies.

described

in

the

individual

For details on the Thomson warranty policy, please contact your


Thomson sales representative (list of sales representatives available on
the Thomson website at: http://www.thomson-networks.com/

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

425

Appendix D Customer Services Services

Services
Training and assistance service offers are available and can be quoted for
upon request.
Thomson OneCare service level agreement offers apply to this product.

Spare Parts
The spare parts are

the base unit of the product with no MPEG board inside

the MPEG board(s)

There are no other subsets available as spare parts.

Returning Equipment
Please contact the call center with questions about the process for
returning Thomson equipment. Within the standard Thomson warranty
period, there is a 30 day turnaround (factory in/out) guarantee for repairs.
Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for return shipment of
equipment are borne by the Customer. The faulty device must be packed
where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes) If
you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected
against shocks during the transportation. The company may not be held
liable for any consequence resulting from non-observance of this return
procedure. The company will not be able to guarantee a repair time for
any RMA request for which we do not have a clear and complete fault
description. If no fault is found, a fixed price will be raised to cover
shipping and testing of the unit.

Repackaging for Shipment


Retain original packaging Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for
return shipment of equipment are borne by the Customer. The faulty
device must be packed where possible in its original packaging
(protective corners and boxes) If you no longer have the packaging, the
faulty device must be protected against shocks during the transportation.
The company may not be held liable for any consequence resulting from
non-observance of this return procedure. The Thomson Customer
Service Department will examine packaging on arrival and can refuse to
carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during
426

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Appendix D Customer Services Long Term Product Support

transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault
originally noted.

Long Term Product Support


Long-Term Product Support (LTPS) is the Thomson support provided
during the product life cycle, starting at the announcement of the end of
product manufacture and ending at the announcement of the end of
services.
After product phase-out announcement, LTPS data is provided by the
Thomson Regional Sales and Field Services organizations.
The Thomson OneCare SLA commitment concerning LTPS data and
associated services may differ from those included as part of the general
Thomson LTPS policy. In such cases, LTPS data and associated services
governed by the terms and conditions of OneCare contracts override the
general LTPS policy.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

427

Appendix D Customer Services Recycling the Product

Recycling the Product


Thomson Video Networks has developed a comprehensive
end-of-life product take back program for recycling or
disposal of end-of-life products. Our program meets the
requirements of the European Unions WEEE Directive and,
in the United States, those of the Environmental Protection
Agency, individual state or local agencies.
All Thomson Video Networks products are labeled per the
CENELEC WEEE marking standard EN 50419. In addition,
Thomson Video Networks ensures that all requirements for
registration, reporting, design and data tracking are
completed to meet the objectives of the WEEE directive.
Under the European Union's Waste Electrical Equipment
and Electronic (WEEE) directive, Thomson Video Networks
is defined as a producer in the business-to-business
category and its products fall under a Category III
classification.
Thomson Video Networks guarantees the proper disposal
of your end-of-life products. A Certificate of Recycling or a
Certificate of Destruction, depending on the ultimate
disposition of the product, can be sent upon request.
Thomson Video Networks will be responsible for all costs
associated with recycling and disposal, including freight,
however you are responsible for the removal of the
equipment from your facility and packing the equipment
ready for pickup.
When the equipment is at end of life, it must be recycled.
You can:
- put it in your regular circuit as for your other equipments
- give it to our partner who will ensure the collection and
the recycling. Just call it to indicate the type and the
number of equipments, as well as the place of removal. You
can find this contact on our website :
http://www.thomson-networks.com/

428

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

E
Alarms

Appendix

Introduction
This chapter gives the list of alarms which can be displayed on the
CP6000. For each alarm the diagnostics, action to be performed and
alarm severity are given.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

429

Appendix E Alarms

430

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1353/Audio standard mismatch
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Audio standard mismatch
Wording (French)
Norme audio incompatible
Diagnosis (English)
Input standard is different from the declared standard.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme dtecte est diffrente de celle dfinie dans la configuration.
Action (English)
Change preferred standard in configuration or change standard of input signal
Action (French)
Redfinir la norme dans la configuration ou modifier la norme du signal d'entre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 2

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1354/Audio standard unknown
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Audio standard unknown
Wording (French)
Norme vido inconnue
Diagnosis (English)
The audio standard is unknown.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme audio est inconnue.
Action (English)
Check input signal or change standard configuration of input signal
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre ou modifier la configuration standard du signal dentre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 3

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1230/bitrate overflow
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Bitrate overflow
Wording (French)
Dpassement du dbit
Diagnosis (English)
Bit rate too high (above 200Mb/s for NFP)
Diagnosis (French)
Dbit trop lv (suprieur 200 Mb/s pour NFP)
Action (English)
Check signal bit rate
Action (French)
Vrifier le dbit du signal
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[2] SI bitrate overflow %2[%3]Kb/s
[6] Bitrate overflow [%5]Kb/s
[35] PID %1 stopped
[111] Bitrate overflow
[117] bitrate overflow
[121] Data overflow on UDP port %1
[135] Tributary rate too high
[140] Input bitrate overflow
[140] Input bitrate overflow
[145] Overflow
[190] Input overflow
[190] Tributary rate too high
[190] Service cell buffer overflow
[190] Service packet buffer overflow

Page 4

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)


[2] Dbordement dbit SI %2[%3]Kb/s
[6] Dbordement dbit [%5]Kb/s
[35] PID %1 bloqu
[111] Dpassement du dbit
[117] Dpassement du dbit
[121] Dbordement dbit sur port UDP %1
[135] Dbit affluent trop haut
[140] Dbit d'entre trop important
[140] Dbit d'entre trop important
[145] Vitesse trop leve.
[190] Dbordement de l'interface
[190] Dbit affluent trop haut
[190] Dbordement du buffer cellule service
[190] Dbordement du buffer paquet service

Page 5

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1229/bitrate underflow
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Bitrate underflow
Wording (French)
Dbit trop faible
Diagnosis (English)
Bit rate too low (below 1,5Mb/s for NFP)
Diagnosis (French)
Dbit trop faible (infrieur 1,5 Mb/s pour NFP)
Action (English)
Check received signal bit rate
Action (French)
Vrifier le dbit du signal
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[34] Video bitrate too low
[48] GID %1 underflow [%3kb/s]
[49] PID %1 underflow [%3kb/s,GID %2]
[50] SRV %1 underflow [%3kb/s,GID %2]
[51] %1 underflow [%3kb/s,GID %2]
[77] DATA-%1 underflow %2[%3]Kb/s
[102] Bitrate underflow
[103] Bitrate underflow
[117] bitrate underflow
[135] Tributary rate too low
[140] Input bitrate underflow
[140] Input bitrate underflow
[155] Filtering CBR bitrate too low
[190] Tributary rate too low

Page 6

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)


[34] Dbit vido trop faible
[48] Sous dbit GID %1[%3kb/s]
[49] Sous dbit PID %1[%3kb/s,GID %2]
[50] Sous dbit SRV %1[ %3kb/s,GID %2]
[51] Sous dbit %1[%3kb/s,GID %2]
[77] Carence DATA-%1 %2[%3]Kb/s
[102] Dbit trop faible
[103] Dbit trop faible
[117] Dbit trop faible
[135] Dbit affluent trop bas
[140] Dbit d'entre trop faible
[140] Dbit d'entre trop faible
[155] Dbit de filtrage CBR trop faible
[190] Dbit affluent trop bas

Page 7

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1091/buffer overflow
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Buffer overflow
Wording (French)
Dbordement de buffer
Diagnosis (English)
FIFO or buffer overflow detected
Diagnosis (French)
Le rsultat du calcul d'un ECM pour la voie (identifie par %1) sur le gnrateur d'ECM
(identifi par %2) n'est pas parvenu pour le prendre en compte pour la prochaine priode
d'embrouillage. L'embrouillage des services du groupe d'accs s'effectue avec le dernier ECM
calcul valide.
Action (English)
Reboot the device. If the alarm registers again, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier que le nombre de cartes mres associes au gnrateur d'ECM en question est
suffisant.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[9] COUPLER FIFO overflow
[9] OUTPUT FIFO overflow
[9] FIFO overflow
[66] Input buffer overflow
[97] Computed ECM buffer overflow
[155] TS Buffer overflow
[155] Decoder Buffer Overflow
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 8

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[9] Dbordement FIFO COUPLEUR
[9] Dbordement FIFO OUTPUT
[9] Dbordement FIFO
[66] Sur dbit du buffer d'entre
[97] Trop de calcul en stock
[155] Overflow du buffer TS
[155] Overflow du flux de sortie du codeur

Page 9

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1110/buffer underflow
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Buffer underflow
Wording (French)
Buffer sous aliment
Diagnosis (English)
FIFO or buffer underflow detected
Diagnosis (French)
FIFO ou buffer sous aliment
Action (English)

Action (French)

Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[155] Decoder Buffer Underflow
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[155] Underflow du flux de sortie du codeur

Page 10

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1040/component error
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Component error
Wording (French)
Erreur de composante
Diagnosis (English)
Component error.
Diagnosis (French)
Erreur de composant.
Action (English)
Check input stream
Action (French)
Vrifier le flux d'entre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[107] component error
[108] component error
[109] component error
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[107] Erreur de composant
[108] Erreur de composant
[109] Erreur de composant

Page 11

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
160/configurationOrCustomisationError
Category
Processing error
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Configuration or customization error
Wording (French)
Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation
Diagnosis (English)
Configuration or customization error detected.
Diagnosis (French)
Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation dtect.
Action (English)
Check consistency between configuration of board or equipment declared and the booad or
equipment physically installed. If the problem persists, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier la cohrence entre la configuration de la carte ou de lquipement dclar et la carte
ou lquipement physiquement prsent. Si le problme persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[34] Flextream configuration error
[63] Failed to update the configuration
[64] Failed to update the configuration
[66] Output port configuration failed
[87] Configuration or customisation error
[87] replaceable unit configuration mismatch
[94] Configuration or customisation error
[134] Board programmation lost
[135] Board programmation lost
[136] Board programmation lost (code lost)
[145] Transmit parameter signal out of loop

Page 12

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)


[34] Erreur de configuration du Flextream
[63] Impossible de changer la configuration
[64] Impossible de changer la configuration
[66] Echec de la configuration du port de sortie
[87] Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation
[87] Configuration de l'unit incompatible
[94] Erreur de configuration ou de personnalisation
[134] Perte de la programmation
[135] Perte de la programmation
[136] Perte de la programmation
[145] Paramtres de transmission non synchronisable

Page 13

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
202/congestion
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Congestion
Wording (French)
Congestion
Diagnosis (English)
Incorrect resource/interface bitrate or service bandwidth too high for the specified traffic
contract.
Diagnosis (French)
Dbit de la ressource/l'interface incorrect.
Action (English)
Increase bitrate or check your throughput configuration in the complete system
Action (French)
Augmenter le dbit.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[102]
[103]
[110]
[111]
[115]
[116]
[118]
[135]
[183]
[188]
[189]
[190]

Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion

Page 14

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)


[102]
[103]
[110]
[111]
[115]
[116]
[118]
[135]
[183]
[188]
[189]
[190]

Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion
Congestion

Page 15

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
22/connectionEstablishmentError
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Connection establishment error
Wording (French)
Erreur d'tablissement de connexion
Diagnosis (English)
Connection has been broken or cannot be established.
Diagnosis (French)
La connexion a t rompue ou ne peut tre tablie
Action (English)
Check the connection. If the problem persists, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier la connexion. Si le problme persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[27] communication problem
[34] Communication problem
[34] DSP communication problem
[34] Dynamux problem with master
[43] Communication problem SIMS->MUX
[43] Communication problem MUX->SIMS
[45] communication problem
[86] TCP connection from the Mediation Unit impossible
[94] Connection establishment error
[95] Connection establishment error
[102] Connection establishment error
[106] Connection establishment error
[134] Board not responding
[135] Board not responding

Page 16

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[136] Board not responding
[145] No response
[145] Tuner fail
[145] No response
[145] No response
[146] No response
[147] No response
[168] Communication problem with Mediation Unit
[168] Device does not respond
[183] Board not responding
[207] Application Equipment Interface does not respond
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[27] Problme de communication
[34] Problme communication VTCE
[34] Problme communication DSP
[34] Problme de communication Dynamux avec le matre
[43] Problme communication SIMS->MUX
[43] Problme communication MUX->SIMS
[45] probleme de communication
[86] Connexion impossible avec l'Unit de Mdiation
[94] Erreur dtablissement de connexion
[95] Erreur dtablissement de connexion
[102] Erreur dtablissement de connexion
[106] Erreur dtablissement de connexion
[134] Problme dialogue
[135] Problme dialogue
[136] Problme dialogue
[145] Pas de rponse
[145] Communication impossible avec le demodulateur
[145] Pas de rponse
[145] Pas de rponse
[146] Pas de rponse
[147] Pas de rponse
[168] Problme communication avec l'Unit de Mdiation
[168] Pas de rponse de l'quipement
[183] Problme de dialogue
[207] Lapplication Interface Equipement ne rpond plus

Page 17

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1074/Corrected error
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Corrected error
Wording (French)
Erreur corrige
Diagnosis (English)
The board is delivering a fully valid signal while frame losses are corrected with the FEC
algorithm.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte fournit un signal parfaitement valide alors que des pertes de trame sont corriges par
l'algorithme FEC.
Action (English)
Check the transmission quality to improve the received signal conformity.
Action (French)
Vrifier la qualit de la transmission pour amliorer la conformit du signal reu.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[115] Corrected error
[116] Corrected error
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[115] Erreur corrige
[116] Erreur corrige

Page 18

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
3/degradedSignal
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Degraded signal
Wording (French)
Signal dgrad
Diagnosis (English)
Input signal is degraded or fluctating.
Diagnosis (French)
Lorsque cet vnement se produit, le champ Problme spcifique indique un code interne
utilis pour dterminer la cause de la dgradation du signal.
Action (English)
Check input signal and cable(s). May be due to unexpected switch behaviour
Action (French)
Vrifier le(s) cble(s) et le signal d'entre. Peut tre d une commutation intempestive du
signal .
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[110] Degraded signal
[120] Degraded signal
[137] Signal low
[145] Fluctuating input
[155] Satellite BER too high
[155] Eb/N0 too low
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[110] Signal dgrad
[120] Signal dgrad
[137] Signal faible

Page 19

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[145] Entre fluctuante
[155] Taux d'erreur trop lev
[155] Eb/N0 trop faible

Page 20

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1075/hardware failure
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Hardware failure
Wording (French)
Dfaillance matrielle
Diagnosis (English)
One or more key hardware modules of the unit are not responding.
Diagnosis (French)
Un ou plusieurs modules matriels cls de la carte ne rpondent pas.
Action (English)
Reboot the equipment. If the alarm registers again, contact Customer Service
Action (French)
Rebooter l'quipement. Si l'alarme est toujours leve, contacter le Service Clients.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[17]
[26]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[45]
[45]
[63]
[64]
[95]
[97]
[97]

Encoder out of use


Encoder out of use
Encoder out of use
HDLC link out of use
1rst pass encoding out of use
Helper channel out of use
Bad SSEB MIGHT for 4150
encoder C1P out of use
Bad SuperEncoder MIGHT for 4150
Failed to update the alarm LED
Failed to update the alarm LED
Hardware failure
ECM computed without associated card
ECM computed without associated card

Page 21

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[97] the ciphering module has broken down
[97] ECMG out of order
[97] no ciphering module
[97] smart card unknown
[97] ECMG is shutting down
[98] ECM computed without associated card
[98] ECMG out of order
[98] no ciphering module
[98] smart card unknown
[98] ECMG is shutting down
[102] Hardware failure
[103] Hardware failure
[106] Hardware failure
[111] Hardware failure
[115] Hardware failure
[116] Hardware failure
[119] Hardware failure
[132] Ancillary data block <-> composite decoder link failed
[132] Automatic calibration failure
[132] LTCe FIFO overflow failure
[132] Ancillary data processing hardware default
[132] Front panel <-> User Maintenance link fail synthesis
[132] Front panel <-> Supervisor link fail synthesis
[132] Front panel <-> CIVA link fail synthesis
[138] Hardware malfunction from the synthetiser
[138] Hardware malfunction from the RF phase lock DRO
[138] Hardware malfunction from the 100MHz local oscillator PLL
[138] Hardware malfunction from the 70MHz local oscillator PLL
[138] MC&C board internal alarm
[138] Modulator board internal alarm
[138] Function/module interface internal alarm
[138] Unexpected architecture
[140] System fault
[144] Hardware error
[144] MMI initialisation failed
[144] Input initialisation failed
[144] Euroboard input failed
[144] TS initialisation failed
[144] CA initialisation failed
[144] DEC initialisation failed
[147] 625 Ln no response
[147] 525 Ln no response
[147] PTS no response
[147] Genlock no response
[148] No response
[148] No response
[148] No response
[149] No response
[149] Audio not running
[150] No response
[151] No response
[151] No response
[151] No response
[151] No response
[154] Hardware failure (%3)
[155] Hardware failure
[173] NV RAM Fault
[173] Watchdog Timer Fault
[173] Program Code Checksum Error
[179] Bad NVRAM Checksum. (All MCC options invalidated)
[180] Factory configuration problem on MCC board

Page 22

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[183]
[184]
[190]
[191]

Hardware failure
Hardware failure
Hardware failure
Hardware failure

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)


[17] Encodeur hors service
[26] Compresseur HS
[34] Compresseur HS
[34] Lien HDLC HS
[34] Codage premire passe HS
[34] Helper channel HS
[34] Mauvaise SSEB MIGHT pour 4150
[45] compresseur C1P hors service
[45] Mauvais SuperEncoder MIGHT pour 4150
[63] Impossible de mettre jour la LED indiquant une alarme
[64] Impossible de mettre jour la LED indiquant une alarme
[95] Dfaillance matrielle
[97] Calcul ECM sans carte associe
[97] Calcul ECM sans carte associe
[97] Module de calcul HS
[97] ECMG HS
[97] Pas de module de calcul
[97] Carte fille inconnue
[97] L'ECMG est en cours d'arrt
[98] Calcul ECM sans carte associe
[98] ECMG HS
[98] Pas de module de calcul
[98] Carte fille inconnue
[98] L'ECMG est en cours d'arrt
[102] Dfaillance matrielle
[103] Dfaillance matrielle
[106] Dfaillance matrielle
[111] Dfaillance matrielle
[115] Dfaillance matrielle
[116] Dfaillance matrielle
[119] Dfaillance matrielle
[132] Dfaut liaison bloc donnes auxiliaires-dcodeur composite
[132] Echec de lautocalibration
[132] Dbordement FIFO dentre LTCe
[132] Problme dans le bloc donnes auxiliaires
[132] Dfaut sur liaison face avant - liaison maintenance utilisateur
[132] Dfaut sur liaison face avant - liaison dexploitation distante
[132] Dfaut sur liaison face avant - carte interne de traitement
[138] Dysfonctionnement hardware du synthtiseur
[138] Dysfonctionnement hardware de la RF phase lock DRO
[138] Problme hardware sur l'oscillateur local 100MHz
[138] Dysfonctionnement hardware sur l'oscillateur local 70MHz
[138] Alarme interne la carte MC&C
[138] Alarme interne la carte de modulation
[138] Alarme interne au module dinterface
[138] Architecture non reconnue
[140] Dfaut systme
[144] Erreur matrielle
[144] Linitialisation du module MMI a chou
[144] Linitialisation du module dentre a chou
[144] Entre Euroboard en panne
[144] Linitialisation du module TS a chou
[144] Linitialisation du module de contrle daccs a chou
[144] Linitialisation du module de decodage a chou

Page 23

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[147] 625 Ln, pas de rponse
[147] 525 Ln pas de rponse
[147] PTS pas de rponse
[147] Genlock pas de rponse
[148] Pas de rponse
[148] Pas de rponse
[148] Pas de rponse
[149] Pas de rponse
[149] Audio ne fonctionne pas
[150] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[151] Pas de rponse
[154] Dfaillance matrielle (%3)
[155] Dfaillance matrielle
[173] Dfaut de la NV RAM
[173] Dfaut de l'horloge interne de l'organe de surveillance
[173] Checksum du code du programme erron
[179] Mauvais checksum de la NVRAM. Toutes options du MCC dsactives
[180] Problme de configuration usine de la carte MCC
[183] Dfaillance matrielle
[184] Dfaillance matrielle
[190] Dfaillance matrielle
[191] Dfaillance matrielle

Page 24

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
123/highTemperature
Category
Environmental
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
High temperature
Wording (French)
Temprature leve
Diagnosis (English)
Internal temperature is over maximum ratings. The device may be permanently damaged if
kept in that state.
Diagnosis (French)
La temprature interne excde la limite maximum. L'quipement risque d'tre dfinitivement
endommag si son tat n'est pas modifi.
Action (English)
Check if the ventilation is running, if air inlet and outlet are not obstructed, and ambiant
external temperature is below 40C.
Action (French)
S'assurer que la ventilation fonctionne, que les entres et sorties d'air ne sont pas obstrues
et que la temprature ambiante externe est infrieure 40 C. Autre action possible:
rinitialiser l'quipement et attendre que la temprature se stabilise pendant 25 minutes. Si
l'alarme se produit de nouveau, mettre hors tension le chassis contenant l'quipement
concern et contacter le Customer Service.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[11] Excessive temperature
[94] High temperature
[95] High temperature
[102] High temperature
[106] High temperature
[115] High temperature

Page 25

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[116] High temperature
[119] High temperature
[132] CIVA board overheating
[133] Overheating
[137] Temperature high
[146] Excessive temperature
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[11] temprature excessive
[94] Temprature leve
[95] Temprature leve
[102] Temprature leve
[106] Temprature leve
[115] Temprature leve
[116] Temprature leve
[119] Temprature leve
[132] Surchauffe de la carte
[133] Temprature excessive
[137] Temprature leve
[146] Temprature excessive

Page 26

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1067/Link down
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Link down
Wording (French)
Liaison coupe
Diagnosis (English)
The line transceiver of the board cannot lock on signal. Note : This event, as many other
reception alarms, is generally produced by transmission problems in the network. It can also
comes for a device partial failure. The quality of transmission shall be analysed by skilled staff.
A check of network state shall be made. If no cause is directly detected there, a transmission
analyser shall be used in place of the device for comparison. If a test system is not available a
device exchange can be performed. Hereunder analysis proposal covers only trivial causes.
Diagnosis (French)
Lmetteur-rcepteur de lignes de la carte ne peut pas verrouiller le signal. Remarque : cet
vnement est gnralement d des problmes de transmission du rseau. Il peut
galement provenir dune dfaillance partielle de lquipement. La qualit de la transmission
doit tre analyse par un personnel qualifi. Ltat du rseau doit galement tre vrifi. Si
aucune cause nest directement dtecte de cette manire, remplacer lquipement par un
analyseur de transmission et effectuer une comparaison. Si aucun systme de test nest
disponible, il est possible dchanger les quipements.
Action (English)
Check if the good cable is plug on the board. If signal conformity is proved, de plug and re plug
the board. Wait until it is recognised by the control and command software.
Action (French)
Sassurer que le cble appropri est correctement raccord la carte. Si la conformit du
signal est tablie, retirer, puis rinsrer la carte.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

Page 27

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[111] Link down
[116] Link down
[135] Unconnected linked tributary
[136] Unconnected linked tributary
[155] Fast ethernet link down
[183] No data link
[184] Lower layer down
[185] Lower layer down
[186] Lower layer down
[187] Lower layer down
[187] SSCOP link down
[187] ILMI link down
[188] Lower layer down
[189] Lower layer down
[190] Lower layer down
[191] Lower layer down
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[111] Liaison coupe
[116] Liaison coupe
[135] Affluent li non connect
[136] Affluent li non connect
[155] Liaison coupe
[183] Pas de lien data
[184] Couche infrieure HS
[185] Couche infrieure HS
[186] Couche infrieure HS
[187] Couche infrieure HS
[187] Perte du lien de signalisation
[187] Perte du lien ILMI
[188] Couche infrieure HS
[189] Couche infrieure HS
[190] Couche infrieure HS
[191] Couche infrieure HS

Page 28

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
8/lossOfSignal
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Loss of signal
Wording (French)
Perte de signal
Diagnosis (English)
No input signal detected on physical interface.
Diagnosis (French)
Pas de signal d'entre dtect sur l'interface physique.
Action (English)
Check signal at the input physical interface and check cable.
Action (French)
Vrifier le cble et le signal dentre sur le connecteur physique.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[7] no signal in PES INTF
[17] No SDI signal
[25] No signal
[26] No analog signal
[26] No SDI signal
[27] no signal
[27] no reference signal
[34] No SDI signal
[45] no SDI signal
[47] Internal secure mode activated
[63] Signal is lost at the input port %2
[64] Signal is lost at the input port %2
[110] Loss of signal
[115] Loss of signal

Page 29

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[120] Loss of signal
[132] No signal on reference input
[132] No signal on digital video input
[132] No signal on analog video input
[134] Signal lost
[135] Tributary lost
[137] Input data loss
[138] ASI optical signal loss
[138] LVDS input signal loss
[140] Input Loss
[140] Input Loss
[145] Absence RF
[145] No signal
[145] No G703 signal
[146] No input
[147] No signal
[154] No signal is detected (input %1)
[155] Loss of signal
[186] Signal lost
[190] Tributary lost
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[7] Aucun signal sur PES INTF
[17] Pas de signal SDI
[25] Aucun signal en entre
[26] Pas de signal analogique
[26] Pas de signal SDI
[27] Pas de signal analogique
[27] Absence de synchro
[34] Pas de signal SDI
[45] absence signal SDI
[47] Scurisation interne active
[63] Pas de signal sur lentre %2
[64] Pas de signal sur lentre %2
[110] Perte de signal
[115] Perte de signal
[120] Perte de signal
[132] Absence de la rfrence synchroniseur
[132] Absence de la vido incidente numrique
[132] Absence vido analogique dentre
[134] Perte du signal
[135] Perte du signal affluent
[137] Donnes perdues
[138] Perte du signal ASI optique
[138] Perte du signal LVDS
[140] Pas de signal en entre
[140] Pas de signal en entre
[145] Absence RF
[145] Absence de signal
[145] Pas de signal G703
[146] Pas dentre
[147] Pas de signal
[154] Pas de signal dtect (entre %1)
[155] Perte de signal
[186] Perte du signal
[190] Perte du signal affluent

Page 30

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1072/Loss of TS synchro
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Loss of TS synchro
Wording (French)
Perte de synchro TS
Diagnosis (English)
Loss of TS synchro.
Diagnosis (French)
Perte de synchro TS.
Action (English)
Collect extra information in the log and contact Customer Service for analysis and repair.
Action (French)
Recueillir des informations supplmentaires dans le journal et contacter le Customer Service
pour analyse et rparation.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[24] Synchro loss
[110] Loss of TS synchro
[115] Loss of TS synchro
[116] Loss of TS synchro
[135] MPEG tributary synchro lost
[136] Output MPEG packet synchro lost
[145] No synchronisation
[145] Unrecoverable transport stream
[145] No MPEG sync
[151] No sync
[155] Loss of synchronization
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 31

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[24] Perte synchro
[110] Perte de synchro TS
[115] Perte de synchro TS
[116] Perte de synchro TS
[135] Perte de la synchronisation MPEG
[136] Perte de synchro paquet en sortie
[145] Synchronisation impossible
[145] Signal dentre non rcuprable
[145] Pas de synchro MPEG
[151] Pas de synchro
[155] Perte de synchronisation

Page 32

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1039/no component
Category
Communications
Default severity
warning
Wording (English)
No component
Wording (French)
Pas de composante
Diagnosis (English)
No component.
Diagnosis (French)
Pas de composant.
Action (English)
Check input stream
Action (French)
Vrifier le flux d'entre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[107] no component
[108] no component
[109] no component
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[107] Pas de composant
[108] Pas de composant
[109] Pas de composant

Page 33

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1062/no embedded signal
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
No embedded signal
Wording (French)
Pas de signal insr
Diagnosis (English)
No embedded signal.
Diagnosis (French)
Pas de signal insr.
Action (English)
Check input signal
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal d'entre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[17] No embedded audio input
[104] No embedded signal
[110] No embedded signal
[120] No embedded signal
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[17] Pas dentre avec audio insre
[104] Pas de signal insr
[110] Pas de signal insr
[120] Pas de signal insr

Page 34

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1287/No stream received
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
No stream received
Wording (French)
Aucun flux reu
Diagnosis (English)
No TS packets from internal source.
Diagnosis (French)
Absence de rception de paquets MPEG en provenance dune source interne.
Action (English)
Check connection configuration. If conformity of received signal is proved and if the state is still
the same, please contact your after sales representative for analysis and repair.
Action (French)
Vrifier la configuration de la connexion. Si la conformit du signal reu est tablie et si ltat
perdure, contacter le service aprs-vente pour ananlyse et rparation.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[110] No stream received
[115] No stream received
[116] No stream received
[117] No stream received
[145] No transport stream
[146] No stream input
[147] No stream input
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[110] Aucun flux reu
[115] Aucun flux reu

Page 35

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[116] Aucun flux reu
[117] Aucun flux reu
[145] Pas de signal dentre
[146] Pas de flux en entre
[147] Pas de flux video dans le signal TS

Page 36

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1054/PAT not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
PAT not present
Wording (French)
PAT non prsente
Diagnosis (English)
No data is received on the PAT PID.
Diagnosis (French)
Absence de donnes sur le PID de la PAT
Action (English)
Check input signal and verify source
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre ainsi que les sources
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[52] No PAT received
[63] Failed to get program tables for the input port %2
[64] Failed to get program tables for the input port %2
[110] PAT not present
[117] PAT not present
[146] PAT not present
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[52] PAT non reue
[63] Impossible de rcuprer les tables de programme pour le port %2
[64] Impossible de rcuprer les tables de programme pour le port %2
[110] PAT non prsente
[117] PAT non prsente

Page 37

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[146] PAT non prsente

Page 38

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1056/PMT not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
PMT not present
Wording (French)
PMT non prsente
Diagnosis (English)
No data is received on the PMT PID witch is referred in PAT.
Diagnosis (French)
Aucune donne n'est reue sur le PID de la PMT rfrenc dans la PAT.
Action (English)
Check input signal and verify source
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal d'entre et la source.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[63] Request to get the PMTs for the input port %2 failed
[64] Request to get the PMTs for the input port %2 failed
[110] PMT not present
[117] PMT not present
[146] PMT not present
[190] Timeout on PAT/PMT extraction
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[63] Recuperation de la PMT pour le port dentre %2 impossible
[64] Recuperation de la PMT pour le port dentre %2 impossible
[110] PMT non prsente
[117] PMT non prsente
[146] PMT non prsente

Page 39

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[190] Temps de rponse dpass / extract PAT/PMT

Page 40

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
78/powerSupplyFailure
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Power supply failure
Wording (French)
Dfaillance de lalimentation
Diagnosis (English)
Power Supply Failure detected. One of the voltages required for nominal use has a defect.
Diagnosis (French)
Dfaillance de lalimentation dtecte. Lune des tensions requises pour lutilisation nominale
prsente un dfaut.
Action (English)
De plug and re plug the board in the chassis and then reboot the function. If the problem
persists, return the board to the Customer Service.
Action (French)
Retirer et rinsrer la carte dans le chssis, puis rinitialiser la fonction. Si le problme
persiste, retourner la carte au Customer Service.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[5] +5V power supply failed
[5] -5V power supply failed
[5] +12V power supply failed
[5] +12.2V power supply failed
[5] -12V power supply failed
[5] +3.3V power supply failed
[5] -5.2V power supply failed
[5] Power supply 1&2 failed
[5] Power supply 1 failed
[5] Alarm on power supply 1
[5] Power supply 2 failed

Page 41

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[5] Alarm on power supply 2
[5] Power supply 1 or 2 failed
[27] power supply failed
[95] Power supply failure
[102] Power supply failure
[106] Power supply failure
[115] Power supply failure
[116] Power supply failure
[119] Power supply failure
[132] Power supply default
[133] Supply fault
[138] Power supply fault
[140] 5V power failed
[140] Power supply alarm
[173] Power supply 1 failed
[173] Power supply 2 failed
[182] Power supply KO
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[5] Alimentation +5V HS
[5] Alimentation -5V HS
[5] Alimentation +12V HS
[5] Alimentation +12.2V HS
[5] Alimentation -12V HS
[5] Alimentation +3.3V HS
[5] Alimentation -5.2V HS
[5] Alimentations 1&2 HS
[5] Alimentation 1 HS
[5] Alarme alimentation 1
[5] Alimentation 2 HS
[5] Alarme alimentation 2
[5] Alimentation 1 ou 2 HS
[27] Dfaut d'alimentation
[95] Dfaillance de lalimentation
[102] Dfaillance de lalimentation
[106] Dfaillance de lalimentation
[115] Dfaillance de lalimentation
[116] Dfaillance de lalimentation
[119] Dfaillance de lalimentation
[132] Dfaut d'alimentation
[133] Dfaut dalimentation
[138] Problme dalimentation
[140] Dfaut sur lalimentation +5V
[140] Alarme alimentation
[173] Alimentation 1 HS
[173] Alimentation 2 HS
[182] Alimentation HS

Page 42

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1098/Rebooting
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
(Re)booting
Wording (French)
(Re)dmarrage
Diagnosis (English)
(Re)boot of the device is in progress. The product does not render the expected service until
this alarm disappears.
Diagnosis (French)
L'quipement est en phase de (re)boot. Le produit ne rend pas le service attendu tant que
cette alarme persiste.
Action (English)
Wait for boot to be completed.
Action (French)
Attendez que le dmarrage soit termin
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[46] Equipment still booting
[140] Start Boot
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[46] Equipement en phase de boot
[140] Dbut dinitialisation

Page 43

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
62/replaceableUnitMissing
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Replaceable unit missing
Wording (French)
Unit amovible manquante
Diagnosis (English)
Board can not be detected.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte ne peut tre dtecte.
Action (English)
Check that board is correctly inserted in the right slot. If the problem persists, contact
Customer Service.
Action (French)
Sassurer que la carte est correctement insre dans lemplacement appropri. Si le problme
persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[94] Replaceable unit missing
[137] No channel filter
[144] No input board
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[94] Unit de remplacement manquante
[137] Pas de channel filter
[144] Pas de carte dentre

Page 44

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
69/replaceableUnitProblem
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Replaceable unit problem
Wording (French)
Problme d'unit amovible
Diagnosis (English)
The board has been configured as inhibited. It is declared as a spare inactive board. Note :
this is an informational state.
Diagnosis (French)
TBD.
Action (English)
If this state is not willed, check configuration.
Action (French)
TBD.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[183] Board inhibited
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[183] Carte inhibe

Page 45

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
63/replaceableUnitTypeMismatch
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Replaceable unit type mismatch
Wording (French)
Type d'unit amovible incompatible
Diagnosis (English)
Equipment or board declared differs from the detected one.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte MANAGER attend un type de carte spcifique dans l'emplacement mais en a dtect
un autre.
Action (English)
Check consistency between installation and configuration.
Action (French)
Vrifier la position physique des cartes par rapport la topologie. Retirer, puis rinsrer la
carte. Si le problme persiste, contacter le Service Clients.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[61] %4 expected, %5 found
[66] Unknown or bad I/O Module
[75] bad equipment type
[75] bad extension board %1
[75] bad extension board %1
[75] bad extension board %1
[75] bad extension board %1
[87] declaration and present boards mismatched
[94] Replaceable unit type mismatch
[134] Invalid configuration
[135] Invalid configuration
[136] Invalid configuration

Page 46

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[182] TCC is in wrong slot
[183] Board wrong type
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[61] Carte %4 attendue, %5 dtecte
[66] Module dE/S inconnu ou mauvais
[75] Mauvais type dquipement
[75] Mauvaise carte extension %1
[75] Mauvaise carte extension %1
[75] Mauvaise carte extension %1
[75] Mauvaise carte extension %1
[87] incohrence entre la dclaration et les cartes prsente
[94] Type dunit de remplacement incompatible
[134] Configuration non valide
[135] Configuration non valide
[136] Configuration non valide
[182] TCC insre dans un mauvais slot
[183] Mauvais type de carte

Page 47

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
26/routingFailure
Category
Communications
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Routing failure
Wording (French)
Echec de routage
Diagnosis (English)

Diagnosis (French)

Action (English)

Action (French)

Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 48

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1058/SDT not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
SDT not present
Wording (French)
SDT non prsente
Diagnosis (English)
No data is received on the SDT PID (Actual (table_id=0x42) or Other (table_id=0x46))
Diagnosis (French)
Aucune donne nest reue sur le PID de la SDT (Actual (table_id=0x42) ou Other
(table_id=0x46))
Action (English)
Check input signal and verify source
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre et la source.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[54] No SDT received
[110] SDT not present
[117] SDT not present
[146] SDT/BAT not present
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[54] SDT non reue
[110] SDT non prsente
[117] SDT non prsente
[146] SDT/BAT non prsente

Page 49

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1059/ServiceId not present
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
ServiceId not present
Wording (French)
ID Service non prsent
Diagnosis (English)
The selected service Id is not present.
Diagnosis (French)
Le service slectionn n'est pas prsent dans les tables PSI/SI du flux
Action (English)
Check configuration or check input stream
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal en entre. Contacter le Service Client.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

Impossible

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[110] ServiceId not present
[117] ServiceId not present
[154] Selected service is not applicable in PSI-SI and cannot be decoded (input %1)
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[110] ID Service non prsent
[117] ID Service non prsent
[154] Le service slectionn ne peut tre decod (absent des tables PSI-SI) (entre %1

Page 50

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
164/softwareError
Category
Processing error
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Software error
Wording (French)
Erreur logicielle
Diagnosis (English)
A software error has occured and impact the selected ressource or interface.
Diagnosis (French)
Lorsque cet vnement se produit, le champ Problme spcifique indique un code interne
utilis pour dterminer la cause de l'erreur logicielle.
Action (English)
Collect extra information and contact Customer Service for analysis and repair.
Action (French)
Recueillir des informations supplmentaires dans le journal et contacter le Service Clients pour
analyse et rparation.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[16]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[26]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]

Coupler internal error


Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2
Internal error %2

Page 51

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[34] Internal error %2
[45] internal error %2
[45] internal error %2
[66] Error occured during processing of Ad Insertion commands
[66] Failed to release recoder
[80] Incorrect file(s) in PCMCIA card
[90] Internal DBP error (%1)
[95] Software error
[97] Unknown ECMG error %2
[97] Incorrect ECM compute mode
[97] Impossible to inform some elements of session
[97] unknown ECMG name
[97] ECM length error
[97] Unrecoverable error
[98] Unknown ECMG error %2
[98] Incorrect ECM compute mode
[98] Problem in obtaining session number
[98] Impossible to inform some elements of session
[98] unknown ECMG name
[98] the ciphering module has broken down
[98] ECM length error
[98] error code unknown
[100] activation failure (error code = %2)
[102] Software error
[103] Software error
[104] Software error
[105] Software error
[107] Software error
[109] Software error
[110] Software error
[111] Software error
[115] Software error
[116] Software error
[117] Software error
[119] Software error
[132] DSP DESIC watchdog failed
[132] Internal microprocessor watchdog failed
[140] Self-test error
[140] Watchdog timeout
[178] Crosspoints list incompatible with the switcher
[206] Error while running events in playlist
[206] Connection with the scheduler down.
[206] Playlist can not lock devices
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[16]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[17]
[26]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[34]
[45]
[45]

Erreur interne coupleur


Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
Erreur interne %2
erreur interne %2
erreur interne %2

Page 52

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[66] Erreur de traitement dune commande dAd Insertion
[66] Echec du relachement dun recoder
[80] Configuration sauvegarde incorrecte sur la carte PCMCIA
[90] Problme interne au DBP (%1)
[95] Erreur logicielle
[97] Erreur %2 ECMG inconnue
[97] Mode de calcul de la session incorrect
[97] Impossible de renseigner des lments de la session
[97] Nom ECMG inconnu
[97] Taille ECM incorrecte
[97] Erreur insurmontable
[98] Erreur %2 ECMG inconnue
[98] Mode de calcul de la session incorrect
[98] Problme d'obtention du numro de session
[98] Impossible de renseigner des lments de la session
[98] Nom ECMG inconnu
[98] Module de calcul HS
[98] Taille ECM incorrecte
[98] Code erreur inconnu
[100] chec dactivation (Code derreur = %2)
[102] Erreur logicielle
[103] Erreur logicielle
[104] Erreur logicielle
[105] Erreur logicielle
[107] Erreur logicielle
[109] Erreur logicielle
[110] Erreur logicielle
[111] Erreur logicielle
[115] Erreur logicielle
[116] Erreur logicielle
[117] Erreur logicielle
[119] Erreur logicielle
[132] Dfaut DSP
[132] Dfaut micro-contrleur 68HC11
[140] Autotest dfaillant
[140] Chien de garde chu
[178] Liste des points de croisements incompatibles avec la grille
[206] Erreur lexcution dvnements dans playlist
[206] La connexion avec le scheduler est rompue
[206] Playlist ne peut prendre la main sur les quipements

Page 53

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1276/Stream discontinuity
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Stream discontinuity
Wording (French)
Discontinuit du flux
Diagnosis (English)
Received UDP data length in incoming RTP MPEG frames is not consistent with the previous
ones.
Diagnosis (French)
La longueur des donnes UDP reues dans les trames MPEG RTP entrantes n'est pas
cohrente par rapport aux prcdentes.
Action (English)
Check the transmitter behavior
Action (French)
Vrifier le comportement de l'metteur.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[116] Stream discontinuity
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[116] Discontinuit du flux

Page 54

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1030/stream error
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Stream error
Wording (French)
Erreur de flux
Diagnosis (English)
Error in stream.
Diagnosis (French)
Erreur dans le flux.
Action (English)
Check input stream
Action (French)
Contacter le Service Client.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[28] Bad packet size
[63] Request to get the program headers failed
[64] Request to get the program headers failed
[66] Packet continuity counter error.
[66] Cannot insert timestamp, invalid picture header
[66] Packet payload errors
[66] Cannot reconstruct output stream
[66] Transport_error_indicator set in packets
[104] Stream error
[110] Stream error
[117] Stream error
[137] No valid data
[138] Data interface failure
[147] Error in stream

Page 55

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[147] Unknown error
[147] Error in stream
[155] TS Error
[155] Decoder Stream Error
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[28] Taille paquet incorrecte
[63] La rcuperation de lentte du programme a chou
[64] La rcuperation de l'entte du programme a chou
[66] Erreur de "Packet Continuity Error"
[66] Impossible dinsrer le timestamp, entte dimage non-valide
[66] Erreurs sur les paquets MPEG
[66] Impossible de reconstruire le flux de sortie
[66] Transport_error_indicator mis 1 sur les paquets
[104] Erreur de flux
[110] Erreur de flux
[117] Erreur de flux
[137] Pas de donnes valides
[138] Echec de linterface donnes
[147] Erreur dans le flux
[147] Erreur inconnue
[147] Erreur de trame
[155] Erreur de TS
[155] Erreurs sur le flux desortie du codeur

Page 56

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
64/synchronizationSourceMismatch
Category
Equipment
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Synchronization source mismatch
Wording (French)
Incompatibilit des sources de synchronisation
Diagnosis (English)
Bit stream Problem.
Diagnosis (French)
Problme de flux.
Action (English)
Check the input signal. Contact Customer Service
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal en entre. Contacter le Service Client.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

Selectable

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[154] Decoder cannot lock on the MPEG-2 bit stream because of sync (input %1)
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[154] Impossible de vrouiller le flux MPEG-2 (problme de synchro) (entre %1)

Page 57

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1238/TR 101 290 First priority error
Category
Quality of service
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
TR 101 290 First priority error.
Wording (French)
Erreur de premire priorit TR 101 290.
Diagnosis (English)
MPEG2 Transport Stream in error according to norm TR 101 290 first priority indicator.
Diagnosis (French)
MPEG2 Transport Stream en erreur selon l'indicateur de premire priorit de la norme TR 101
290.
Action (English)
Check signal. Contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal. Contacter le Service Client.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 58

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1073/Unrecoverable errors
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Unrecoverable errors
Wording (French)
Erreurs irrcuprables
Diagnosis (English)
The board is delivering a corrupted signal with bit errors. It is issued only if used mode
provides error detection mechanism. Means FEC capacity is overflowed.
Note : This event, as many other reception alarms, is generally produced by transmission
problems in the network. It can also comes for a device partial failure. The quality of
transmission shall be analysed by skilled staff. A check of network state shall be made. If no
cause is directly detected there, a transmission analyser shall be used in place of the device
for comparison. If a test system is not available a device exchange can be performed.
Hereunder analysis proposal covers only trivial causes.
Diagnosis (French)
La carte fournit un signal corrompu prsentant une perte de trame. Signal uniquement si le
mode utilis dispose dun mcanisme de dtection des erreurs. Cela signifie que la fonction
FEC est sature. Remarque : cet vnement, comme beaucoup dautres alarmes de
rception, est gnralement d des problmes de transmission du rseau. Il peut galement
provenir dune dfaillance partielle de lquipement. La qualit de la transmission doit tre
analyse par un personnel qualifi. Ltat du rseau doit galement tre vrifi. Si aucune
cause nest directement dtecte de cette manire, remplacer lquipement par un analyseur
de transmission et effectuer une comparaison. Si aucun systme de test nest disponible, il est
possible dchanger les quipements. La proposition danalyse suivante ne sapplique quaux
causes simples.
Action (English)
Check the good cable is plugged on the board input. If received signal conformity is proved, de
plug and re plug the board. Wait until it is recognised by the control and command software. If
the state is still the same, please contact your after sales representative for analysis and
repair.
Action (French)

Page 59

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


Pour amliorer le comportement du systme, commencer par rgler les paramtres FEC du
ct mission. Si ltat est identique, contacter le Customer Service pour analyse et
rparation.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[98] Unrecoverable error
[115] Uncorrectable errors
[116] Uncorrectable errors
[140] Uncorrected input packet
[140] Uncorrected input packet
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[98] Erreur Insurmontable
[115] Erreurs non corrigibles
[116] Erreurs non corrigibles
[140] Paquets en entre non corrigs
[140] Paquets en entre non corrigs

Page 60

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1278/Unreachable destination
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Unreachable destination
Wording (French)
Destination inaccessible
Diagnosis (English)
Unreachable destination. Destination host is not connected to network, or bad IP settings of
destination host or problem of configuration on intermediate routers.
Diagnosis (French)
Impossible datteindre la destination. Hte de destination non connect au rseau, paramtres
IP de lhte de destination incorrects ou problme de configuration des routeurs
intermdiaires.
Action (English)
Check destination host. Contact your network infrastructure representative
Action (French)
Vrifier lhte de destination. Contacter votre service infrastructure rseau.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[111] Unreachable destination
[116] Unreachable destination
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[111] Destination inaccessible
[116] Destination inaccessible

Page 61

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1339/Unsuitable link speed
Category
Communications
Default severity
minor
Wording (English)
Unsuitable link speed
Wording (French)
Vitesse de la liaison inadapte
Diagnosis (English)
The affected ethernet interface has detected a connection but the speed is not compatible with
the port speed.
Diagnosis (French)
Une connexion a t dtecte sur linterface ethernet mais la vitesse nest pas compatible
avec celle du port
Action (English)
For the Control and Command ethernet, check that the network is a 10Mbps or a 100Mbps
network.
For the Ethernet streaming ports, check that the network is a 100Mbps or 1000Mbps network.
Action (French)
Pour lethernet Contrle et Commande, vrifier que le rseau est un rseau 10Mbps ou 100
Mbps.
Pour les ports ethernet de flux, vrifier que le rseau est un rseau 100 Mbps ou 1000
Mbps.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 62

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1076/ventilation failure
Category
Equipment
Default severity
critical
Wording (English)
Ventilation failure
Wording (French)
Dfaillance de la ventilation
Diagnosis (English)
Fan concerned is out of service.
Diagnosis (French)
Le ventilateur concern est hors service.
Action (English)
If external, check that an air fan is powered on. Else, check that no object has been inserted in
the unit and is blocking a fan. If no external cause is detected, contact Customer Service.
Action (French)
Mettre le chssis hors tension afin dviter toute temprature excessive susceptible de causer
un dommage matriel. Pour les produits 5U, remplacer lunit de ventilation. Pour les produits
1U, remplacer le chssis.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[32] Ventilator fault
[94] Ventilation failure
[132] Fan unit default
[133] Fan fault
[182] Air fans KO
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[32] Ventilation HS
[94] Dfaillance de la ventilation
[132] rotor(s) bloqu(s)

Page 63

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[133] Dfaut de ventilation
[182] Ventilation HS

Page 64

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
167/versionMismatch
Category
Processing error
Default severity
indeterminate
Wording (English)
Version mismatch
Wording (French)
Incompatibilit de version
Diagnosis (English)

Diagnosis (French)

Action (English)

Action (French)

Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)

Page 65

Impossible

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1064/video standard mismatch
Category
Communications
Default severity
major
Wording (English)
Video standard mismatch
Wording (French)
Norme vido incompatible
Diagnosis (English)
Input standard is different from the declared standard.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme dtecte est diffrente de celle dfinie dans la configuration.
Action (English)
change preferred standard in configuration or change standard of input signal
Action (French)
Redfinir la norme dans la configuration ou modifier la norme du signal d'entre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Selectable

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[34] Bad standard 50/60Hz
[45] Bad standard 50/60Hz
[107] videoStdMismatch
[110] Video standard mismatch
[132] Unknown or wrong standard on reference input
[132] Unknown or wrong standard on digital video input
[132] Unknown composite standard
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[34] Mauvais standard 50/60Hz
[45] Mauvais standard 50/60Hz
[107] Norme vido incompatible
[110] Norme vido incompatible

Page 66

Selectable

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00


[132] Rfrence synchroniseur inconnue ou incorrecte
[132] Standard vido numrique inconnu ou incorrect
[132] Standard composite inconnu

Page 67

Alarm Help (X733 syntax) 1.00

Probable Cause
1065/video standard unknown
Category
Communications
Default severity
warning
Wording (English)
Video standard unknown
Wording (French)
Norme vido inconnue
Diagnosis (English)
The video standard is unknown.
Diagnosis (French)
La norme vido est inconnue.
Action (English)
Check input signal or change standard configuration of input signal
Action (French)
Vrifier le signal dentre ou modifier la configuration standard du signal dentre.
Automatic redundancy
Current autobackup:

Impossible

Upstream autobackup:

MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (english)


[110] Video standard unknown
MTEP syntax alarms matching this probable cause (french)
[110] Norme vido inconnue

Page 68

Impossible

Glossary

This glossary is common to all products. Defined words do not


necessarily apply to this product.
100/1000Base-T

An Ethernet standard designed to generate, monitor and capture 100/ 1000


Ethernet traffic.

3:2 pull-down

A technique used when converting film material (which operates at 24


pictures per second) to 525-line video (operating at 29.97 pictures per
second).

3G-SDI

3 Gbps High-Definition Serial Digital Interface.

4:2:0

A chrominance sub-sampling system in which the difference signals are


sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate.

4:2:2

A chrominance sub-sampling system in which the difference signals are


sampled on all lines at half the luminance rate.

AAC

Advanced Audio Compression algorithm that has been ratified for both
MPEG-2 (ISO/IEC 11818-7) and MPEG-4 (ISO/IEC 14496-3).

AAC-LC

Low Complexity-Advanced Audio Coding.

AC-3

Audio Coding 3.
AC-3 is a digital audio encoding, also called Dolby Digital, technique
developed by Dolby for multi-channel sound applications.

ADTS

Audio Data Transport Stream.


ADTS is a method for encapsulating AAC bitstreams into transport
streams. AAC bitstream is packaged in a streaming format called Audio
Data Transport Stream (ADTS), consisting of a series of frames, each frame
having a header followed by the AAC audio data.

AES

Audio Engineering Society.


Professional organization of electrical engineers whose concern is with the
standards of audio engineering.

AFD

Active Format Descriptor.


Standard set of codes that can be sent in the MPEG video stream or in the
baseband SDI video signal that carries information about their aspect ratio
and active picture characteristics.

AGC

Automatic Gain Control.

AMOL I and II

Automatic Measure of Lineups.


Data inserted in the VBI lines and used by automated equipment to
measure program-viewing ratings (NTSC).
AMOL I: 48 bits/line, AMOL II: 96 bits/line.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

431

Glossary

ANSI/SCTE-20

Methods for Carriage of Closed Captions and Non-Real Time Sampled


Video. It defines how to implement VBI (Vertical Blanking Interval) services
using the user data field of the picture layer of the MPEG-2 video bitstream,
and according to ISO/IEC 13818-2.

ANSI/SCTE-21

The Standard for Carriage of NTSC VBI Data in Cable Digital Transport
Stream. It defines a standard for the carriage of VBI services in MPEG-2
compliant bitstreams constructed according to ISO/IEC 13818-2.

ARIB

Association of Radio Industries and Businesses.


ARIB is a standardization organization in Japan. It is a designated center
for the promotion of efficient use of the radio spectrum and frequency
change support agency. Its activities include those previously performed
by the Research and Development Center for Radio Systems (RCR) and
Broadcasting Technology Association (BTA).

ARP

Address Resolution Protocol.


Internet protocol used to map an IP address to physical (hardware)
addresses on local area networks.

ASI

Asynchronous Serial Interface.

ATSC

Advanced Television Standards Committee.


ATSC is a set of standards developed for digital television transmission
over terrestrial, cable, and satellite networks for the USA.

AVC

Advanced Video Coding.

B-Frame

Bidirectional-Frame.
A frame type in the MPEG compression scheme that is predicted from past
and future reference frames.

Balanced Audio

An audio signal that consists of two wires carrying an audio signal in


anti-phase with each other. Balanced audio has greater ability to reject
interference.

BAT

Bouquet Association Table


The BAT provides information about bouquets. It gives the name of the
bouquet and a list of associated services.

BISS

Basic Interoperable Scrambling System.


BISS is a satellite signal scrambling system developed by the European
Broadcasting Union and a consortium of hardware manufacturers.

Bouquet

A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of the


three) grouped and sold together, and identified in the SI as a group. A
single service may be in several bouquets.

Buffer

A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.

CA

Conditional Access.
System to control subscriber access to services, programs and events.

CABAC

Context-based Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding


CABAC is a form of entropy coding used in H.264 video encoding. It is
notable for providing much better compression than CAVLC but is more
computationally expensive. CABAC is not supported in Baseline and
Extended profiles.

432

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Glossary

CAT

Conditional Access Table


CAT table is used for conditional access to the streams. It provides
association with the EMM stream.

CAVLC

Context Adaptive Variable Length Coding.


CAVLC is a form of entropy coding used in H.264 video encoding. CAVLC
has lower coding efficiency than CABAC but is less computationally
expensive.

CBR

Constant Bit-rate.
The bit-rate of the bit-stream is constant. (see VBR)

CC

Close Caption.

Chrominance

Chrominance (chroma or C for short) is the signal used in video systems


to convey the
information of the picture, separately from the
accompanying luma signal (or Y for short).

CIF

Common Intermediate Format.


A format used to standardize the horizontal and vertical resolutions in
pixels of YCbCr sequences in video signals, commonly used in video
teleconferencing systems (video size: 352p x 288p).

Closed Caption

A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analog transmissions.

Composite Video

A baseband representation of a video signal containing luminance and


chrominance information.

Compression

The process of removing redundant data from audio or video streams to


reduce the amount of data transferred or stored.

CPU

Central Processing Unit.

CrCb

Digital difference signals. These signals, in combination with the


luminance signal (Y), define the and brightness of each picture element
(pixel) on a TV line. See: Chrominance.

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check.


A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is an error-detecting code designed to
detect accidental changes to raw computer data, and is commonly used in
digital networks and storage devices such as hard disk drives.

CVBS

Composite Video, Blanking, and Sync.

CVCT

Cable Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).

CW

Control Word.

CWG

Control Word Generator.

dB

Decibel
The decibel is a logarithmic unit that indicates the ratio of a physical
quantity (usually power or intensity) relative to a specified or implied
reference level. A ratio in decibels is ten times the logarithm to base 10 of
the ratio of two power quantities. A decibel is one tenth of a bel, a
seldom-used unit.

dBFS

Decibel Full Scale

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

433

Glossary

De-blocking Filter

An in-loop de-blocking filter is designed to smooth out artifacts introduced


by the compression process in the reconstructed image in both the
encoder and decoder.

Decoder

The device containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode


encrypted signals. Some Decoders features a receiver.

D TS

Decoding Time Stamp


A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time
that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target Decoder.

DET

Data Event Table (ATSC)

DID

Data Identifier
DID is used for embedded audio within the SDI or HD-SDI signal. The Data
Identifier word indicates the type of ancillary data that the packet
corresponds to.

Dolby Digital

Formerly AC-3. An audio coding system based on transform coding


techniques and psycho acoustic principles.

Downconvert

The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is


shifted to a lower frequency range.

Downmixing

Combining (or mixing down) the content of n original channels to produce


m channels, where m < n.

DPI

Digital Program Insertion.

DSNG

Digital Satellite News-Gathering.

DSP

Digital Signal Processor.

DTVCC

Digital Television Closed Captioning.

DVB

Digital Video Broadcasting


The Digital Video Broadcasting Project (DVB) is an industry-led consortium
of around 250 broadcasters, manufacturers, network operators, software
developers, regulatory bodies and others in over 35 countries committed
to designing open technical standards for the global delivery of digital
television and data services. Services using DVB standards are available
on every continent with more than 500 million DVB receivers deployed.

DVB-H

Digital Video Broadcasting - Handheld. A technical specification for


bringing broadcast services to mobile handsets. DVB-H was formally
adopted as ETSI standard EN 302 304 in November 2004.

DVB-T

Digital Video Broadcasting baseline system for digital terrestrial television.

DVB SI

Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.

DVS 053

See ANSI/SCTE-21.

DVS 157

See ANSI/SCTE-20.

434

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Glossary

DVS 706

The Carriage of Vertical Blanking Information Data in North American


Digital Television Bitstream. Based on the ETSI EN 301 775 standard and
provides extensions for the carriage of VBI data. VBI data is carried in
MPEG-2 packetized elementary stream (PES) packets as private stream 1,
which in turn is carried in MPEG2 transport packets. The Data_unit_ID
values identify the type of data as AMOL 1, AMOL II, or TV Guide. Data
encoded in the data fields are supposed to be transcoded into the VBI of
525 line video but may be interpreted directly by a decoder.

EBU

European Broadcast Union.

ECM

Entitlement Control Message.


Private Conditional Access information that specifies control words and
possibly other stream-specific, scrambling, and/or control parameters.

ECMG

ECM Generator

EDI

Ethernet Data Input.

EIA 708-B

Digital Television Closed Captioning specifies the standards for DTV


technology. DTV closed captioning is transported in the bitstream as a
logical data channel in MPEG-2 picture user data field of the DTV digital
bitstream (as defined in the ATSC A/53 and ISO/IEC 13818 standards). To
ensure compatibility, the transport channel is designed to carry analog
(EIA-608-B) and digital closed captioning (EIA-708-B).

EIT

Event Information Table


A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table that transmits
information relating to the events in the MPEG transport stream.

Elementary Stream

A generic term for a coded bit-stream, be it video, audio or other.

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility.

EMM

Entitlement Management Message.


Private Conditional Access information that specifies the authorization
level or services of specific decoders.

Encryption

Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the appropriate


decryption equipment and authorization.

EPG

Electronic Program Guide.


Provides users of television, radio, and other media applications with
continuously updated menus displaying scheduling information for
current and upcoming programming.

ES

Elementary Stream
A generic term for a stream of data of one particular type. Typically these
streams are of Video or Audio Types.

Ethernet

The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE as the
802.3 standard.

ETSI EN 300 706

The European Television Standards Institutes (ETSI) specification for


World Standard Teletext (WST).

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

435

Glossary

ETSI EN 300 775

The European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)


specification for the Carriage of Vertical Blanking Information Data in DVB
bitstreams. VBI data is carried in MPEG-2 packetized elementary stream
(PES) packets as private stream 1, which in turn is carried in MPEG2
transport packets. The packet identifier (PID) of a VBI data stream
associated with a service is identified in the program map table (PMT) of
the program specific information (PSI) for that service. A VBI PES packet
contains data for only one video frame and always carries a PTS. A
Data_unit_ID identifies the type of data as EBU teletext non-subtitle data,
EBU teletext subtitle data, video program system (VPS), or wide screen
signaling (WSS). Data encoded in the data fields are supposed to be
transcoded into the VBI of 625-line video but may be interpreted directly
by a decoder.

ETT

Extended Text Table

FCC

Federal Communications Commission.

FEC

Forward Error Correction.


A system of error control for data transmission, whereby the sender adds
systematically generated redundant data to its messages. The carefully
designed redundancy allows the receiver to detect and correct a limited
number of errors occurring anywhere in the message without the need to
ask the sender for additional data. FEC enables the receiver to correct
errors without the need for a reverse channel to request retransmission of
data, but this advantage is at the cost of a fixed higher forward channel
bandwidth

Field

For an interlaced video signal, a "field" is the assembly of alternate lines of


a frame. Therefore, an interlaced frame is composed of two fields, a top
field and a bottom field.

Fps

Frame Per Second.

FTP

File Transfer Protocol.


A standard network protocol used to copy a file from one host to another
over a TCP-based network.

Frame

A frame contains lines of spatial information of a video signal. For


progressive video, these lines contain samples starting from one time
instant and continuing through successive lines to the bottom of the
frame. For interlaced video a frame consists of two fields, a top field and a
bottom field. One of these fields will commence one field later than the
other.

GOP

Group of Pictures.
In MPEG video, a GOP represents one or more I pictures, followed by P and
B pictures.

GPI

General Purpose Interface

GUI

Graphical User Interface


A type of user interface that allows users to interact with electronic devices
with images rather than text commands. A GUI represents the information
and actions available to a user through graphical icons and visual
indicators such as secondary notation, as opposed to text-based
interfaces, typed command labels or text navigation.

H.264

ITU/ETSI name for MPEG-4 Part-10 (ISO/IEC 14496-10).

436

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Glossary

HANC

Horizontal Ancillary.
Ancillary packets located in the horizontal blanking interval of the video
signal.

HD

High Definition.

HD-SDI

High-Definition Serial Digital Interface.

HDTV

High Definition Television.

HE-AAC

High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Encoding.


A lossy data compression scheme for digital audio defined as a MPEG-4
Audio profile in ISO/IEC 14496-3. There are two types of HE-AAC:
- HE-AAC = AAC+ = AAC-LC + SBR (Spectral Band Reconstitution)
- HE-AACv2 = eAAC+ = AAC-LC + SBR + PS (Parametric Stereo)

HSYNC

Horizontal (line) Sync.

HTML

Hyper Text Markup Language.


HTML is the predominant markup language for web pages. That is the
basic building-blocks of web pages.

HTTP

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol.

I-Frame

Intracoded Frame.
A frame, which is coded using purely intracoding with reference to no
other field or frame information. I frames provide a reference point for
dependent P and B frames and allow random access into the compressed
video stream.

I-Picture

Refer to I-Frame.

ID

Identifier

IDR

Instantaneous Decoding Refresh. IDR pictures can be decoded without


reference to previous frames.

IEC

International Electrotechnical Committee.

IGMP

Internet Group Management Protocol.


IGMP is a communication protocol used by hosts and adjacent routers on
IP networks to establish multicast group memberships.
There are three versions of IGMP, as defined by "Request for Comments"
(RFC) documents of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). IGMPv1 is
defined by RFC 1112, IGMPv2 is defined by RFC 2236 and IGMPv3 was
initially defined by RFC 3376 but has since been superseded by RFC 4604.

IP

Internet Protocol.

IP Address

A 32-bit (IPv4) or 128-bit (IPv6) numerical identifier for a specific TCP/IP


host device on a network, that represents the sender or receiver of
information sent across the network.

IRD

Integrated Receiver Decoder.


The IRD is the official name for the satellite receiver, which has a built-in
decoder for unscrambling subscription channels. Also known as a Set-Top
Box for cable.

ISO

International Standards Organization.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

437

Glossary

ITU-R

International Telecommunications Union - Radio.


Formerly CCIR. Deals with the standardization of wireless communication.

ITU-T

International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications.


Formerly CCITT. Produces global telecommunication standards, and
defines tariff and accounting principles.

Joint Stereo

An audio mode in which the left and right channels of audio are encoded
into one channel. This mode is used to reduce bandwidth needs, and thus
improve compression efficiency.

JPEG

Joint Photographic Experts Group.


Name of the committee that created the JPEG standard (and also other
standards). The JPEG standard specifies the codec, which defines how a
still image is compressed into a stream of bytes and decompressed back
into an image.

JVT

Joint Video Team (JVT).


The Joint Video Team is a group of video coding experts from ITU-T Study
Group 16 (VCEG) and ISO/IEC JTC 1 SC 29 / WG 11 (MPEG) created to
develop an advanced video coding specification. The JVTs main result has
been ITU-T Rec. H.264 | ISO/IEC 14496-10, commonly referred to as
H.264/MPEG-4-AVC, H.264/AVC, or MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC.

kbit/s

Kilo bits per second.

LAN

Local Area Network.


A local area network is a network that connects computers and devices in
a limited geographical area such as home, school, computer laboratory or
office building.

LATM

Low-overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.


LATM is part of the method to encapsulate HE-AAC audio into transport
stream.

LC-AAC

Low Complexity-Advanced Audio Coding.

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display.

LED

Light Emitting Diode.

LOAS

Low-overhead Audio Stream


LOAS is part of the method to encapsulate HE-AAC audio into a transport
stream.

In a GOP (Group Of Picture), M is the distance between successive


P-Frames.

Macroblock

A area of the TV picture. Macroblocks are usually composed of two or


more blocks of pixels. The size of a block depends on the codec and is
usually a multiple of 4. In MPEG-2 the size is fixed at blocks of 8x8 pixels.
In H264 the overarching macroblock size is fixed at 16x16 pixels, but this is
broken down into smaller blocks or partitions which are either 4, 8, 12 or
16 pixels by 4, 8, 12 or 16 pixels.

MBAFF

MacroBlock Adaptive Frame Field coding. Use a macroblock pair structure


for pictures coded as frames.

Mbit/s

Million bits per second.

MGT

Master Guide Table (ATSC).

438

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Glossary

MIB

Management Information Base.


SNMP collects management information from devices on the network and
records the information in a management information base. The MIB
information includes device features, data throughput statistics, traffic
overloads, and errors.

Motion Compensation The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of
sample values. The prediction uses motion vectors to provide offsets into
the past and/or future reference frames or fields containing previously
decoded sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal.
Motion Estimation

The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.

Motion Vector

A two-dimensional vector used for inter prediction that provides an offset


from the coordinates in the decoded picture to the coordinates in a
reference picture.

MP@ML

Main Profile at Main Level


A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports transmissions up to 15
Mbit/s.

MP@HL

Main Profile at High Level


A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports transmissions up to 80
Mbit/s.

MPEG

Moving Pictures Experts Group


An international standards-setting group, working to develop standards
for compressed full-motion video, audio, and other associated
information. Current standards are MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and MPEG-4.

MPEG-2

Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression
and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal bit-rate in
preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818. The standard is
split into layers and profiles defining bit-rates and picture resolutions.

MPEG-4

Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression
and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal bit-rate in
preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 14496. Part 2 of this
standard defines the original MPEG-4 video compression whereas Part 10
is the new algorithm also known as H264.

MPTS

Multiprogram Transport Stream.

Multicast

Process where a single stream is served from one source to multiple


receivers. The multicast address range is: 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255.

Multiplex

-The combination of two or more signals into one single output stream.
-A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 24 depending on the
compression standards), from encoders, that are compressed together in
a single DVB compliant transport stream for delivery to a Modulator.

In a GOP (Group Of Picture), N is the distance between successive


I-Frames.

NAL

Network Abstraction Layer (H264)

NIT

Network Information Table


A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table, that provides a
grouping of Transport Streams (TSs) and the relevant tuning information.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

439

Glossary

NMS

Network Management System.

NTP

Network Time Protocol.

NTSC

National Television Systems Committee


An American based committee who sets
television broadcast
transmission and reception standards used in the US, Canada, Mexico and
Japan as well as other Latin American and Asian countries. This system
uses 525 picture lines and a 59.97 Hz field frequency.

NVOD

Near Video On Demand.


NVOD is a consumer video technique used by multi-channel broadcasters
using high-bandwidth distribution mechanisms such as satellite and cable
television. Multiple copies of a program are broadcast at short time
intervals (typically 1020 minutes) providing convenience for viewers, who
can watch the program without needing to tune in at a scheduled point in
time. The video can be sold.

P-frame

Predicted frame
A P-frame holds only the changes in the image from the previous frame.

Packet

- In networks, a unit of data transmitted over a packet-switching network.


A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes
from an elementary data stream.
- In transport streams, a packet is a small, fixed-size data quantum.

PAFF

Picture Adaptive Frame Field coding. Allows a freely selected mixture of


pictures coded either as complete frames where both fields are combined
together for encoding or as individual single fields.

PAT

Program Association Table.


It lists all programs available in the MPEG-2 transport stream. Each of the
listed programs is identified by a 16-bit value called program_number.
Each of the programs listed in the PAT has an associated value of PID for
its Program Map Table (PMT).

PCM

Pulse Code Modulation


PCM is a modulation technique. It is a digital representation of an analog
signal where the magnitude of the signal is sampled regularly at uniform
intervals. Every sample is quantized to a series of symbols in a digital
code, which is usually a binary code.

PCR

Program Clock Reference.


A time stamp used in digital video compression that indicates the system
time clocks (STC) value the instant the time stamped packet leaves the
encoder. In the Moving Pictures Experts Group 2 (MPEG-2) system the
digital video source is clocked at 27 MHz and the decoder must generate
the same 27 MHz clock so that the encoder and decoder clocks are
synchronized. These clocks are called System Time Clocks (STC). To
synchronize the decoder, the encoder sends a PCR to the decoder. The
decoder receives the packet and compares the STC value with its own STC
counter value. If the values are the same then no adjustment is needed but
if the two values are different, the decoder must either reset, speed up, or
slow down its STC.

440

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Glossary

PDC

Program Delivery Control (VBI).


PDC is specified by the standard ETS 300 231, published by the European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). This specifies the signals
sent as hidden codes in the teletext service, indicating when transmission
of a program starts and finishes.

PES

Packetized Elementary Stream


A specification in the MPEG-2 Part 1 (Systems) (ISO/IEC 13818-1) and ITU-T
H.222.0[1][2] that defines carrying of elementary streams in packets within
MPEG program streams and MPEG transport streams [3]. The elementary
stream is packetized by encapsulating sequential data bytes from the
elementary stream inside PES packet headers.

PID

Packet Identifier
A unique integer value used to identify the contents of an MPEG-2
Transport Stream packet (Video component PID, Audio component PID,
etc.).

Profile

A defined subset of the syntax specified in the MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 video


coding specification.

PMT

Program Map Table.


A mandatory MPEG-2 PSI table. Each service has a PMT. It lists the service
component parts (elementary streams of video, audio, location of the PCR
fields, etc.).

PSI

Program Specific Information.


Normative data that is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport
streams and the regeneration of programs.

PSIP

Program and System Information Protocol.


A method of describing Naming and Navigation data for a multi program
transport stream as defined in ATSC A/65A.

PSU

Power Supply Unit.

PTS

Presentation Time Stamp.


The PTS is a metadata field in an MPEG transport stream that is used to
achieve synchronization of programs' separate elementary streams (for
example Video, Audio, Subtitles) when presented to the viewer. The PTS
is given in units related to a program's overall clock reference, either
Program Clock Reference (PCR) or System Clock Reference (SCR), which is
also transmitted in the transport stream or program stream.

PVR

Personal Video Recorder.

QCIF

Quarter Common International Format.


To have one fourth of the area as "quarter" implies the height and width of
the frame are halved (video size: 176p x 144p).

QSIF

Quarter Screen International Format.


To have one fourth of the area as "quarter" implies the height and width of
the frame are halved (video size:160 x 120 pixels (NTSC) or 192 X 144 pixels
(PAL).

QVGA

Quarter Video Graphics Array.


QVGA is a popular term for a computer display with 320240 display
resolution.

R, G, B

Red, Green, Blue.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

441

Glossary

Resolution

Determined by the number of pixels displayed per line or for a given area.

RLC

Run Length Coding.


Run length encoding is a method of compressing digital information by
representing repetitive data information by a notation that indicates the
data that will be repeated and how many times the data will be repeated.

RRT

Rating Region Table (ATSC).

RS

Reed-Solomon coding.
Reed-Solomon is an algorithm for Forward Error Correction (FEC). It does
not specify a block size or a specific number of check symbols, instead
these variables can be set to the best variables for each transmission
medium. Reed Solomon codes are used in a wide variety of commercial
applications such as CDs, DVDs, and in data transmission technologies like
DVB and WiMAX.

RST

Rating System Table (ATSC).

RTP

Real Time Transport Protocol.


This Protocol defines a standardized packet format for delivering audio
and video over IP networks.

RTSP

Real Time Streaming Protocol.


A network control protocol designed for use in entertainment and
communications systems to control streaming media servers. Used for
establishing and controlling media sessions between end points.

RU

Rack Unit. A unit of measure used to describe the height of equipment


intended for mounting in a 19-inch rack or a 23-inch rack. One rack unit is
1.75 inches (44.45 mm) high.

Scrambling

Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent


unauthorized reception of the information in clear form.

SBR

Spectral Band Replication.


SBR is a tool used in HE-AAC for broadcast transmissions.

SD

Standard Definition.

SDI

Serial Digital Interface.

SDT

Service Description Table.


A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table, that provides
information in the SI stream about the services in the system; for example,
the name of the service, the service provider, etc.

SDTV

Standard Definition Television.

SI

Service Information
Digital information describing the delivery system, content and scheduling
/timing of broadcast data streams (DVB).

SIF

Source Input Format


A video format that was developed to allow the storage and transmission
of digital video. The SIF format specifies resolutions of the following:
NTSC (525/59.94 SIF format) is 352x240 x29.97fps
PAL (625/50 SIF format) is 352x288 x25.00fps

442

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Glossary

SMPTE

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.


A Standards Organization devoted to advancing theory and application in
motion imaging, including film, television, video, computer imaging, and
telecommunications.

SNG

Satellite News-Gathering.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol.


SNMP provides a means to monitor and control network devices, and to
manage configurations, statistics collection, performance, and security.
SNMP network management is based on the client and server model. Each
managed host runs a process called an agent. The agent is a server
process that maintains the Management Information Base (MIB) database
for the host. SNMP uses ports 161 and 162.

SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol.

SPTS

Single Program Transport Stream.

SRTP

Secure Real Time Transport Protocol.

StatMux

Statistical Multiplexing
Statistical multiplexing is a proven technique used to dynamically assign
compression bitrates based upon video complexity and motion
requirements of individual channels. The principle of statistical
multiplexing is that a group or pool of encoders shares a fixed quantity
of bandwidth. The bandwidth is allocated on a frame by frame basis by a
centralized controller (multiplexer) so the encoder with the most complex
video is allowed to borrow more bandwidth from the pool of encoders
with less difficult video.

STB

Set-Top Box.
A device that provides access to the Broadband broadcast or Internet and
displays information on a TV screen.

STT

System Time Table (ATSC).

SVC

Scalable Video Coding.


SVC is the name for the Annex G extension of the H.264/MPEG-4 AVC video
compression standard. SVC standardizes the encoding of a high-quality
video bitstream that also contains one or more subset bitstreams. A subset
video bitstream is derived by dropping packets from the larger video to
reduce the bandwidth required for the subset bitstream. The subset
bitsteam can represent a lower spatial resolution (smaller screen), lower
temporal resolution (lower frame rate), or lower quality video signal.

Switch (Network)

A network switch is a computer networking device that connects network


segments.
An Ethernet switch operates at the data link layer of the OSI model to
create a separate collision domain for each switch port. With 4 computers
(e.g., A, B, C, and D) on 4 switch ports, A and B can transfer data back and
forth, while C and D also do so simultaneously, and the two conversations
will not interfere with one another.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

443

Glossary

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol.


One of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks. TCP enables two hosts to
establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees
delivery of data and packets, that will be delivered in the same order in
which they were sent. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery
of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data
(called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through
the Internet.

TCP / IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol


Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP
operates on the OSI transport layer and breaks data into packets. IP
operates on the OSI network layer and routes the packets. While IP takes
care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping
track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is
divided into for efficient routing through the Internet. TCP/IP allows the
construction of very large networks with little central management.

TDT

Time and Date Table.


A mandatory Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) SI table that supplies the
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) time and date.

Time-Code

A sequence of numeric codes generated at regular intervals by a timing


system.

Time-stamp

A sequence of characters, denoting the date and/or time at which a certain


event occurred.

Timeslicing

Time slicing is a technique that is used in DVB-H applications to increase


the battery life time of mobile DVB-H receivers (for instance cell phones,
PDAs, etc.). Chunks of data will be transmitted in bursts, which allows the
mobile receiver to be switched off when no data is transmitted. During this
inactivity the mobile receiver can scan neighboring cells in order to select
the best reception conditions and be prepared for seamless handovers.

TOT

Time Offset Table.


An optional (DVB) SI table that supplies the actual UTC-time also including
time offset information coded as MJD.

TS

Transport Stream.
A multiplex of several Elementary Streams that are contained in packets.

TSDT

Transport Stream Descriptor Table.


A mandatory MPEG-2 PSI table that describes which type of Transport
stream it is in (i.e. DVB, ATSC etc.). It may also contain other descriptors.

TVCT

Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).

UDP

User Data Protocol.


A connectionless protocol, like TCP, that runs on top of IP networks. Unlike
TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offering instead
a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network without
acknowledgement for guaranteed delivery.

Unicast

Unicast is communication between a single sender and a single receiver


over a network.

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time.


UTC is the time standard by which the world regulates clocks and time. In
casual use, UTC corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time (or GMT).

444

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Glossary

VANC

Vertical Ancillary.
Ancillary packets located in the vertical blanking interval.

VBI

Vertical Blanking Interval.


In analog video, the interval after the last displayed line of video in a field
and before the first displayed line of video in the next field, during which
a television receiver will synchronize vertically.

VBR

Variable Bit-Rate.
VBR is an encoding method that is designed to achieve a better video
quality vs. bitrate ratio than CBR (Constant Bit-Rate) encoding. This is
achieved by continuously changing the bit rate during the encoding
process depending on the picture complexity. Refer to Statmux.

VBV

Video Buffering Verifier


The video buffering verifier is a theoretical MPEG video buffer model used
to ensure that an encoded video stream can be correctly buffered and
played back at the decoder device.

VCT

Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).


A VCT contains a list of all the channels that are or will be online, along
with their attributes. This table is critically important as it contains the set
of data that enables a receiver to tune and locate the service being
broadcast.

VGA

Video Graphics Array (640x480 pixels).

VITC

Vertical Interval Time Code.


VITC is Time-Code information inserted in the vertical blanking of the
video signal.

VITS

Vertical Interval Test Signal.


VITS signals may be inserted in the lines of the vertical blanking interval to
permit on the air testing of video circuit functions and adjustments.

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network.


A local area network with a definition that maps workstations on some
other basis than geographic location (for example, by department, type of
user, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can change or add
workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocation more
easily than with a physical picture of the LAN. Network Management
System software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the local area
network with the actual physical picture. VLANs are based on logical
instead of physical connections.

VPS

Video Programming System.


VPS is an older system which helped video recorders in Germany to
automatically record TV broadcasts correctly. Since replaced with Program
Delivery Control (PDC).

Weighted prediction Allows an encoder to specify the use of a scaling and offset when
performing motion compensation, and providing a significant benefit in
performance in special cases, such as fade-to-black, fade-in, and
cross-fade transitions.

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

445

Glossary

WSS

Wide Screen Signalling.


WSS is digital information embedded in the TV signal describing the
qualities of the broadcast, in particular the intended aspect ratio of the
image. This can be used by a widescreen TV to switch to the correct display
mode.
The WSS signal is placed in line 23 (PAL) and lines 20/283 (PAL-M and
NTSC) and has 14 data bits.

WST

World System Teletext.


WST is the name of a standard for encoding and displaying teletext
information, which is used in 625 line / 50 Hz television systems (ITUR 653).
It is used for teletext throughout Europe today. The actual version of the
WST is Word System B.

Y (Luminance)

Defines the brightness of a TV picture.

446

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Index
Numerics
1 Gb/s .........................................................233
100 Mb/s ....................................................233
1280 x 720 p @ 50 Hz ..............................209
1280 x 720 p @ 59,94 Hz .........................209
1280 x 720 p @ 60 Hz ..............................209
188 + 16 bytes ...........................................228
188 bytes ....................................................228
1920 x 1080 I @ 25 Hz .............................209
1920 x 1080 I @ 29.97 Hz .......................209
1920 x 1080 I @ 30 Hz .............................209
5.1 Surround ..............................................220
720 x 480 I @ 29.97 Hz ............................209
720 x 576 I @ 25 Hz .........................209, 210
A
AAC Encapsulation ..................................221
AAC Syntax ..............................................221
AAC, decoding ..........................................240
About .........................................................269
AC Mains power supply cord(s) ...............42
Active alarms ..........................................118
Active alarms .............................................118
Active Format Description (AFD) ...243, 244
Activity ..... 184, 201, 226, 228, 229, 235, 242
Activity, Modulator ...................................250
Add Decoder Dual Module ......................145
Add Decoder Single Module ....................145
Add Encoder Dual Module ...............123, 181
Add Encoder Single Module ....................123
Add Modulator Module ............................156
Add MPEG Encoder Module ...123, 181, 182
Additional service component formats, TS ...
338

AFD, VBI ...............................................346


AFD/BAR, ANC .....................................347
Alarms Panel ...........................................118
Alignment ..................................................215
Ancillary Transparent (RDD-11) .............244
Ancillary Transparent (SMPTE-2038) ....243,
244

Antialiasing ...............................................105
Apply .................................................117, 161
ASI IN1, Modulator ................................380
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

ASI IN2, Modulator ................................ 380


ASI OUT, Modulator .............................. 380
ASI Output ................................................ 228
Audio formats, Decoding ........................ 372
Audio Mode .............................................. 220
Audio source ............................................. 218
Audio Standard ......................................... 219
Auto backup delay .................... 193, 195, 208
Auto Negociation ..................................... 233
Auto nominal delay .................................. 193
Auto vertical size ...................................... 105
Automation ....................................... 113, 203
B
Bar Pattern ................................................ 209
Bar pattern ......................................... 207, 240
Bitrate ........................................................ 227
Bitrate, Audio ........................................... 220
Bitrate, Video ............................................ 212
Bitrate, Video encoding .......................... 341
Black Pattern ............................................. 209
Black pattern ..................................... 207, 240
Blink Slot x ............................................... 102
Broadcaster IP address, Zixi .................... 237
Broadcaster UDP port, Zixi ..................... 237
Burst .......................................................... 228
C
C&C, Manager board ............................. 320
CABAC ..................................................... 213
Cabling ..................................................... 40
Capabilities, Decoding ............................ 372
Capatibilities, Audio ............................... 343
Carried Modulated, Modulator ................ 251
CAVLC ...................................................... 213
CC Closed caption, ANC ........................ 347
CC Closed caption, VBI ......................... 346
Channel Mode ................................... 206, 234
Check ................................................ 117, 161
Chroma Format ......................................... 211
Clean NIT ................................................. 227
Cleaning chassis ventilation grids ........... 265
Clear .......................................................... 119
Clock Reference, Modulator .................... 252
Closed alarms ......................................... 119
Closed Caption EIA 708-B .............. 243, 244
447

Index

Closed GOP .............................................. 213


Command Line Interface ..................51, 256
Comment .................................................. 257
Component PID allocation ......................338
Configuration Panel
Automation tab .................................113
List of Configurations .......................115
Statistics tab ..............................103, 111
Connecting the cables ...............................58
Connection Mode, Zixi ............................ 237
Copy .......................................................... 117
Cost ........................................................... 233
Creating a new configuration ..................121
Customizing the Configuration Tabs Layout
94

D
D - Column deph ...................................... 230
Data Packet ............................................... 228
Data, Modulator ....................................... 252
Date and time
Displaying ...........................................57
Setting .................................................57
Default configuration ..............................203
Default Gateway ....................................... 232
Delay, Audio ..................................... 221, 240
Description ................................ 118, 119, 120
Descriptor, External component .............. 173
Destination IP @ ...................................... 233
Destination IP address .............................. 229
Destination UDP port ....................... 229, 237
Dimensions .............................................311
Disable Service ......................................... 209
Display points ........................................... 105
Division ..................................................... 105
Division count .......................................... 105
Dolby Digital Pass-Thru, decoding ......... 240
DTVCC Closed caption, ANC ................347
Dual Channels .......................................... 220
Dump ........................................................ 270
Dump report .............................................. 269
E
Edit ............................................................ 203
Edit/Unedit ................................................ 117
EMC ground .............................................40
EN 301775 ................................................ 241
Enable Ancillary / VBI ............................ 241
Enable audio ............................................. 240
Enable interface ........................................ 232
Encapsulation ........................................... 237
448

Encoding format ................................211, 239


Encoding formats and bitrates, Audio .....344
Encrypted Session Word (ESW) ..............201
End .............................................................119
End date .....................................................120
End to End delay .......................................212
End to End Delay, Encoding ...................342
Entropy Coding ......................................342
Entropy coding ..........................................213
Eqcod .........................................................258
eqcod .........................................................258
Equipment code ........................................259
Extent .........................................................120

F
FEC block Duration, Zixi .........................230
FEC block, Zixi .........................................237
FEC Mode .................................................230
FEC overhead, Zixi ...........................229, 237
FEC protection ..........................................230
FEC, RTP .......................................321, 335
Field ...........................................................213
Forward error Correction ..........................237
Frame .........................................................213
Frame per PES ..........................................220
Frame synchronizer ..................................244
Frame, Modulator .....................................248
Freeze on last valid frame ........................240
Freq. Calculator, Modulator .....................251
Front Panel
Alarms screen .....................................75
Device booting screnn ........................73
Info screen ..........................................80
IP Settings screen ................................76
LCD CAL screen ................................79
Main board information screen ...........80
Main Menu screen ..............................75
Reboot screen .....................................79
Recall screen .......................................77
Setup screen ..................................76, 81
Status screen .......................................74
Front panel ................................................26
Front Panel Description
Device status LEDs .............................68
Keypad ................................................69
Power Supply LEDs ............................69
Screen tree menu .................................71
frudisp .....................................................260
Full Transparent ........................................243

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A

Index

G
Global Unique Identifier, Modulator .......252
GOP Size (N) ............................................213
GOP, Encoding .......................................342
GPIO .......................................................322
GPS coordinates, Modulator ....................252
H
H-264 (MPEG-4) ......................................211
HD Teletext (OP-47) .................................244
HD Teletext (OP47) ..................................241
HD to SD Downscaling, Decoding .........368
Headroom ..................................................215
I
Id ................................................................257
IGMP .........................................................233
IGMPv2 .....................................................233
IGMPv3 .....................................................233
IGMPv3 with source address ...................233
Injected id ..................................................201
Input backup mode ....................193, 195, 207
Input Bitrate Management, Modulator ....381
Input Format, Audio .................................218
Input pair ...................................................207
Input PID, External component ................173
Input redundancy status ............................239
Input Standard ...........................................209
Input standard ............................................184
Input Stream Management, Modulator ....381
insopt .......................................................259
Interface Speed ..........................................233
Interface State when disable .....................233
IO1 - IO3, MPEG Decoder .....................364
IO1 - IO3, MPEG Encoder ......................332
IO2 - IO4, MPEG Decoder .....................364
IO2 - IO4, MPEG Encoder ......................333
IO5, MPEG Decoder ...............................365
IP @ ...........................................................232

IP parameters
Displaying ...............................55, 60, 61
Editing ....................................56, 60, 61
IPCounters .................................................111
J
J2K DEC module
Connectors ........................361, 379, 381
K
Key .............................................................257

L
L - Column burst length recovery ............230
LAN 1 and LAN 2, MPEG Decoder .......366
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

LAN 1 and LAN 2, MPEG Encoder ....... 335


LAN 1, LAN 2, Manager board .............. 321
Latency, Zixi ..................................... 229, 237
LCD screen brightness and contrast, setting .
70

LED, MPEG Encoder ............................. 329


LEDs, Manager board ............................. 319
Level .......................................... 118, 119, 120
Level, Audio out ....................................... 245
Link Down ................................................ 233
Link Up/No Multicast .............................. 233
Link Up/No Traffic ................................... 233
Load NIT file ............................................ 227
Login ................................................ 52, 256
Loss of Ref. Time Out, Modulator .......... 251
Low delay ................................................. 212
lsopt ................................................. 257, 259
M
Management ............................................. 102
Max IPDV ................................................. 237
Maximum power .................................... 310
MBAFF ..................................................... 213
Miscellaneous features, Audio ........ 345, 372
Miscellaneous features, Encoding .......... 342
Missing IP Packets after FEC, IP counters ...
112

Missing IP Packets, IP counters .............. 111


Modcod, Modulator .......................... 248, 249
Mode, BISS ............................................... 201
Modulation, DVB-DSNG ....................... 383
Modulation, DVB-S ............................... 383
Modulation, DVB-S2 .............................. 384
Modulator Frequency, Modulator ............ 251
MON Out, Modulator ............................. 379
Monitoring Output, Modulator ................ 247
Mono Left ................................................. 220
Mono Right ............................................... 220
Monochrome lines, VBI ......................... 346
Monochrome Transparent ........................ 243
Moving Pattern ......................................... 209
Moving pattern ......................................... 207
MPEG Decoder
LED .................................................. 361
MPEG Modulator
LED .................................................. 379
MPEG1 Layer II, decoding ...................... 240
MPEG-2 .................................................... 211
Multicast @ ............................................... 237

449

Index

N
Name ................................. 206, 234, 237, 246
Netmask ............................................ 232, 233
New ................................................... 116, 121
Next Hop ................................................... 233
NIT Actual ................................................ 227
No automation ........................................113
No automation .......................................... 204
No IGMP .................................................. 233
No Source Mode ............................... 209, 220
No Video Pid ............................................ 240
Null Packet stuffing .................................. 230
Number ..................................................... 257
Number of TP per IP frame ..................... 230
O
OL Translator, Modulator ........................ 251
OP47 Subtitles ........................................347
Open .......................................................... 116
Open report ............................................... 269
Option id ........................................ 258, 260

Power consumption ........................310, 311


Power outlet ..............................................41
Power supply ..................................306, 309
Power up ...................................................50
PPS, Manager board ...............................320
Profile ........................................................211
Profile selection ........................................184
Profile selection, Scrambling ...................226
Program Number .......................................225
Progressive & Interlaced Conversion, Decoding ...........................................................368
Protective ground ......................................41
R
Rate Adaptation, Modulator .....................249
RDD 11 ......................................................241
Rear panel .................................................26
reboot ...............................................258, 259
Reboot Shelf ..............................................102
Reboot Slot x .............................................102
Received IP Packets, IP counters .............111

Option Key .............................................. 259


Original Network Id ................................. 226
Output format ........................................... 240
Output Level, Modulator ......................... 250
Output Pair ........................................ 201, 242
Output Standard ........................................ 242
Output, Audio .........................................372

Ref .............................................................257
REF IN, Modulator .................................379
REF OUT, Modulator .............................379
Reliability ...............................................316
Remove ......................................................117
Rename ..............................................117, 122
Reverse Spectrum, Modulator ..................250
RF Out, Modulator .................................379
RF Output Tilt, Modulator .......................250
RF Power On Type, Modulator ................251
rmopt .........................................................258
Roll-Off custom value, Modulator ...........248
Roll-Off, Modulator ..................................248

P
P Picture Period (M) ................................ 213
Packet mode .............................................. 228
Pair 1 (IO1 + IO2) ............................ 207, 242
Pair 2 (IO3 + IO4) ............................ 207, 242
Panels ........................................................93
Pass-Thru, Audio ...................................... 240
Password ...........................................52, 256
Phone, Modulator ..................................... 252
Picture Filtering ........................................ 213
Picture Format .......................................... 210
Picture Resolution .................................... 210
Picture Structure, Encoding ....................342
Pid ............................................. 239, 240, 241
Pilots Insertion, Modulator ...................... 248
Pixel offset ................................................ 244
PLS Mode, Modulator ............................. 248
PLS Sequence 1, Modulator .................... 249
PLS Sequence 2, Modulator .................... 249
PMT PID ................................................... 225
Port Number ............................................. 232
Port, IP counters ....................................... 111
450

S
Sample Rate Converter, Audio .................216
Save ...................................................117, 119
Scaling Mode ............................................243
Scaling Type ..............................................243
Schedule .................................................113
Schedule .................................................203
Screen layout ............................................93
SD Aspect Ratio ........................................243
SD to HD Upscaling, Decoding ..............368
SDI Input Pair x ................................125, 182
Select automation ...................................203
Select source IP address ...........................238
Send ...........................................117, 161, 204
Service Id ...................................................239
Service Name ............................225, 238, 239
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Index

Service selection mode .............................238


Service Selection modes, Decoding ........367
Services and components number ...........338
Session Word (SW) ...................................201
SIG Editor
GUI Description ................................273
Operation ..................................276, 300
Overview ...........................................272
PC Setup ...........................................276
SigEditor ....................................................300
Signaling .................................................338
Signaling Mode .........................................219
Silence .......................................................220
Sine Tone (1000 Hz) .................................220
Sine Tone (400 Hz) ...................................220
Slot Number ..............................206, 234, 246
Slot x - Modulator .....................................157
Slot x - MPEG Encoder ....................125, 181
SMPTE 2038 .............................................241
Snapshot panel ..........................................98
Software options
Displaying .........................................257
Recovering lost keys .........................259
Uninstalling ...............................258, 260
Source IP address ......................................238
Source selector ..................................207, 235
Source UDP port .......................................230
Source, Audio .........................................343
Source, Audio out .............................245, 246
Sources .............................. 123, 145, 156, 181
Specifications
Electrical ...........................................306
Mechanical ........................................311
Standard compliance ...............................386
Standard delay ...........................................212
Standard, DVB-DSNG ............................383
Standard, DVB-S ....................................383
Standard, Modulator .........................248, 249
Standards, DVB-S2 .................................384
Start ....................................................118, 119
Start date ....................................................120
Statistic ......................................................103
Status ..........................................................257
Status bar ..................................................95
Stereo .........................................................220
Stop Video .................................................209
Stream (Rx IP@
port VLAN), IP counters ....................111
Stream Id, Zixi ...................................229, 237
ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10
User Manual Edition A

Stream Input Loss, Modulator ................. 251


Symbol Rate, Modulator .................. 248, 249
SYN, Manager board .............................. 319
SYNC, Manager board ........................... 319
System layer, TS ..................................... 338
T
Teletext ...................................................... 243
Teletext, VBI .......................................... 346
Term, Manager board ............................. 320
Test Mode, Modulator ...................... 248, 249
Time .......................................................... 105
TIME code (ATC) ............................ 243, 244
Time Code (ATC) ................................... 347
Time Out, Modulator ................................ 251
TOS (hexadecimal value) ......................... 231
Transparent lines, VBI ............................ 346
Transparent mode, VANC, HD SDI ANC ....
347

Transponder Band, Modulator ................. 251


Transponder Freq, Modulator .................. 251
Transport format ....................................... 241
Transport Stream Id .................................. 227
TS bitrate ................................................ 338
TS bitrate computing ................................ 227
TS Monitoring, Decoding ....................... 367
TS Multiplexing ..................................... 338
TS number .............................................. 338
TS packet size ........................................... 228
TS Processing, Decoding ........................ 367
TS Selection, Modulator .................. 157, 247
TTL ........................................................... 231
TX Encapsulation ..................................... 229
U
Uncompressed (SMPTE 302M) or Dolby E
Pass-Thru, decoding ................................. 240
Uncompressed Audio Mode (SMPTE 302M)
220

Uptime, IP counters .................................. 111


V
Value scale color ....................................... 105
Values ........................................................ 105
Ventilation ........................................ 32, 315
Video formats, Decoding ........................ 368
Video formats, Encoding, Decoding ....... 339
Video profiles, Decoding ........................ 368
Virtual Source @ ...................................... 230
Virtual Source IP @ ................................. 230
VITC, VBI .............................................. 346
VLAN Id ........................................... 230, 238
451

Index

VLAN tagging .................................. 230, 238


VPS ........................................................... 243
VPS, VBI ................................................346
W
Weight ....................................................314
Window duration ...................................... 105
WSS .......................................................... 243
WSS Blanking .......................................... 210
WSS, VBI ...............................................346
X
XLR Input ................................. 215, 216, 246
XLR Output .............................................. 245

452

ViBE CP6000 / CP6100 v04.10


User Manual Edition A